FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA34AC 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac+ BT 4.1 M.2 Type Card

 

Lenovo S41/U41 Regulatory Notice Lenovo regulatory notice for wireless adapters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This manual contains regulatory information for the following Lenovo products:

Lenovo Yoga 3 14

Read first regulatory information Please read this document before you use the Lenovo computer. Lenovo computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. Veuillez lire ce document avant dutiliser lordinateur Lenovo. Lordinateur Lenovo est conforme aux normes de scurit et de radiofrquence du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est agre. Vous devez installer et utiliser votre ordinateur en respectant scrupuleusement les instructions dcrites ci-aprs.

USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo module

FCC ID: PD93160NGU (Model: 3160NGW)

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP)

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1076 (Model: BCM94352Z)

FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC)

FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA335 (Model: QCNFA335) Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). i) The FCC RF Exposure compliance:

The radiated output power of the Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo Mini PCI Express Card authorized to use for the your Lenovo computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

ii) FCC ID of wireless module:

On the bottom side of your Lenovo computer, you will find an indicator label of the format Contains Transmitter Module: FCC ID XXXX, where XXXX represents the FCC ID that corresponds to your preinstalled Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo module. 1 iii) Radio Frequency interference requirement:

Each device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 5. When you use a Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode:

High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. II. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Make sure of the following conditions on use of wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, all wireless features in your Lenovo computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option device's user's manual. 2

Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number I) Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo modules:

IC: 1000M-3160NG (Model: 3160NGW)

IC: 4324A-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP)

IC: 4324A-BRCM1076 (Model: BCM94352Z)

IC: 4104A-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC)

IC: 4104A-QCNFA335 (Model: QCNFA335) Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). There is no certification number of Industry Canada for Mini PCI Express Card shown on the enclosure of your Lenovo computer. Instead you will find an indicator label pointing to the location of the IC Certification number on the bottom side of your Lenovo computer. This label will be of the format Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: XXXX, where XXXX represents the IC ID that corresponds to your preinstalled WLAN module. II) Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210):

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The transmitter devices have been designed to operate with the antennas integrated in Lenovo computer, and having a maximum gain of within 3 dBi. III) Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102):

Lenovo computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure requirement regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 4 clause 4.2. The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, and 5725-5825 MHz bands complies with the e.i.r.p. limit in section A9.2 of RSS-210. When you use a Wireless LAN and Bluetooth Combo module adapter in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode:

The devices for the band 5150-5250 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems.

High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250-

5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz bands and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN (Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. 3 Numro dhomologation IC I) Modules de rseaux local sans fil pr-install lusine:

IC: 1000M-3160NG (Model: 3160NGW) IC: 4324A-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP) IC: 4324A-BRCM1076 (Model: BCM94352Z) IC: 4104A-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC) IC: 4104A-QCNFA335 (Model: QCNFA335) Les cartes de rseau local sans fil Express mini-PCI commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. Le botier de votre ordinateur Lenovo ne comporte pas de numro dhomologation IC (Industry Canada) pour la carte mini-PCI Express ; mais sous votre Lenovo, vous trouverez une tiquette indicatrice pointant vers lemplacement du numro dhomologation IC. Ltiquette se prsente sous la forme Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: XXXX o XXXX reprsente lID IC qui correspond au module WLAN prinstall. II) Remarque relative aux appareils de communication radio de faible puissance sans licence (CNR-210):

Le fonctionnement de ce type dappareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas perturber les communications radio, et 2. cet appareil doit supporter toute perturbation, y compris les perturbations qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. Les priphriques dmission sont conus pour fonctionner avec des antennes intgres aux Lenovo et ayant un gain maximal de moins de 3 dBi. III) Exposition des tres humains aux champs radiolectriques (RF) (CNR-102):

Lordinateur Lenovo utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui nmettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par le Ministre de la sant canadien pour la population. Consultez le Safety Code 6 sur le site Web du Ministre de la sant canadien ladresse www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. Lnergie mise par les antennes relies aux adaptateurs sans fil respecte la limite dexposition aux radiofrquences telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4.2 du document CNR-102. Le gain d'antenne maximal autoris pour les appareils dans les bandes 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, et les bandes 5725-5825 MHz est conforme la pire limite la section A9.2 de RSS-210.When vous utilisez un module adaptateur LAN sans fil et Bluetooth Combo dans le mode 802.11 a / n transmission:

Les dispositifs pour la bande 5150-5250 MHz ne sont que pour une utilisation en intrieur pour rduire l'interfrence nuisible potentielle de co-canal de systmes satellite mobile. Les radars haute puissance sont dsigns comme utilisateurs principaux

(ce qui signifie qu'ils ont la priorit) de 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et les bandes de ces radars pourraient provoquer des interfrences et / ou endommager les priphriques

(locaux exempts de licence Area Network) Lelan. 4

Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement

Models: 3160NGW, BCM943162ZP, BCM94352Z, QCNFA34AC and QCNFA335 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Telephone: 1-919-294-5900 5

 

 

Lenovo S41/U41 Regulatory Notice Lenovo regulatory notice for wireless adapters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This manual contains regulatory information for the following Lenovo products:

Lenovo Yoga 3 14

Read first regulatory information Please read this document before you use the Lenovo computer. Lenovo computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. Veuillez lire ce document avant dutiliser lordinateur Lenovo. Lordinateur Lenovo est conforme aux normes de scurit et de radiofrquence du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est agre. Vous devez installer et utiliser votre ordinateur en respectant scrupuleusement les instructions dcrites ci-aprs.

USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo module

FCC ID: PD93160NGU (Model: 3160NGW)

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP)

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1076 (Model: BCM94352Z)

FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC)

FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA335 (Model: QCNFA335) Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). i) The FCC RF Exposure compliance:

The radiated output power of the Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo Mini PCI Express Card authorized to use for the your Lenovo computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. ii) FCC ID of wireless module:

On the bottom side of your Lenovo computer, you will find an indicator label of the format Contains Transmitter Module: FCC ID XXXX, where XXXX represents the FCC ID that corresponds to your preinstalled Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo module. 1 iii) Radio Frequency interference requirement:

Each device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 5. When you use a Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode:

High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. II. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Make sure of the following conditions on use of wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, all wireless features in your Lenovo computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option device's user's manual. 2

Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number I) Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo modules:

IC: 1000M-3160NG (Model: 3160NGW)

IC: 4324A-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP)

IC: 4324A-BRCM1076 (Model: BCM94352Z)

IC: 4104A-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC)

IC: 4104A-QCNFA335 (Model: QCNFA335) Wireless LAN + Bluetooth Combo Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). There is no certification number of Industry Canada for Mini PCI Express Card shown on the enclosure of your Lenovo computer. Instead you will find an indicator label pointing to the location of the IC Certification number on the bottom side of your Lenovo computer. This label will be of the format Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: XXXX, where XXXX represents the IC ID that corresponds to your preinstalled WLAN module. II) Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210):

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The transmitter devices have been designed to operate with the antennas integrated in Lenovo computer, and having a maximum gain of within 3 dBi. III) Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102):

Lenovo computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure requirement regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 4 clause 4.2. The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, and 5725-5825 MHz bands complies with the e.i.r.p. limit in section A9.2 of RSS-210. When you use a Wireless LAN and Bluetooth Combo module adapter in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode:

The devices for the band 5150-5250 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems.

High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250-

5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz bands and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN (Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. 3 Numro dhomologation IC I) Modules de rseaux local sans fil pr-install lusine:

IC: 1000M-3160NG (Model: 3160NGW) IC: 4324A-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP) IC: 4324A-BRCM1076 (Model: BCM94352Z) IC: 4104A-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC) IC: 4104A-QCNFA335 (Model: QCNFA335) Les cartes de rseau local sans fil Express mini-PCI commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. Le botier de votre ordinateur Lenovo ne comporte pas de numro dhomologation IC (Industry Canada) pour la carte mini-PCI Express ; mais sous votre Lenovo, vous trouverez une tiquette indicatrice pointant vers lemplacement du numro dhomologation IC. Ltiquette se prsente sous la forme Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: XXXX o XXXX reprsente lID IC qui correspond au module WLAN prinstall. II) Remarque relative aux appareils de communication radio de faible puissance sans licence (CNR-210):

Le fonctionnement de ce type dappareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas perturber les communications radio, et 2. cet appareil doit supporter toute perturbation, y compris les perturbations qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. Les priphriques dmission sont conus pour fonctionner avec des antennes intgres aux Lenovo et ayant un gain maximal de moins de 3 dBi. III) Exposition des tres humains aux champs radiolectriques (RF) (CNR-102):

Lordinateur Lenovo utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui nmettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par le Ministre de la sant canadien pour la population. Consultez le Safety Code 6 sur le site Web du Ministre de la sant canadien ladresse www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. Lnergie mise par les antennes relies aux adaptateurs sans fil respecte la limite dexposition aux radiofrquences telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4.2 du document CNR-102. Le gain d'antenne maximal autoris pour les appareils dans les bandes 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, et les bandes 5725-5825 MHz est conforme la pire limite la section A9.2 de RSS-210.When vous utilisez un module adaptateur LAN sans fil et Bluetooth Combo dans le mode 802.11 a / n transmission:

Les dispositifs pour la bande 5150-5250 MHz ne sont que pour une utilisation en intrieur pour rduire l'interfrence nuisible potentielle de co-canal de systmes satellite mobile. Les radars haute puissance sont dsigns comme utilisateurs principaux

(ce qui signifie qu'ils ont la priorit) de 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et les bandes de ces radars pourraient provoquer des interfrences et / ou endommager les priphriques

(locaux exempts de licence Area Network) Lelan. 4

Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement

Models: 3160NGW, BCM943162ZP, BCM94352Z, QCNFA34AC and QCNFA335 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Telephone: 1-919-294-5900 5

 

 

FLEX 3/EDGE 2 User Guide Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes

Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide rst. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 8.1. If you are using another Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice

For details, refer to Guides & Manuals at http://support.lenovo.com. First Edition (September 2014) Copyright Lenovo 2014. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Lenovo FLEX 3/EDGE 2 User Guide Instructions and technical information in this manual are applicable to the following Lenovo notebook computers unless otherwise stated. Model name FLEX 3-1470 FLEX 3-1475 FLEX 3-1570 FLEX 3-1535 EDGE 2-1570 FLEX 3-1470 HSW FLEX 3-1475 Carrizo FLEX 3-1570 HSW EDGE 2-1570 HSW MT 80JK 80JL 80JM 80JN 80JX 80JY 80K1 80K0 80K2 Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer..................................................................................... 1 Top view ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 Left-side view ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Right-side view .............................................................................................................................................. 9 Bottom view ................................................................................................................................................. 10 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1........................................................................................ 12 Configuring the operating system for the first time .............................................................................. 12 Operating system interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 12 The charms ................................................................................................................................................... 13 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down ................................................................................ 15 Touch screen operation .............................................................................................................................. 16 Connecting to a wireless network ............................................................................................................ 20 Help and support ........................................................................................................................................ 21 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System.............................................................................. 22 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting............................................................................................................ 23 Frequently asked questions ....................................................................................................................... 23 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................... 25 Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................... 28 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

FLEX 3-1470/FLEX 3-1475/FLEX 3-1470 HSW/FLEX 3-1475 Carrizo 2 3 1 3 2 4 5 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer FLEX 3-1570/EDGE 2-1570/FLEX 3-1570 HSW/EDGE 2-1570 HSW 2 3 1 3 2 4 5 Note: The dashed areas indicate parts that are not visible externally. Attention:

When closing the display panel, be careful not to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a Integrated camera

(on select models) b Wireless LAN antennas c Built-in microphone d Multi-touch screen e Touchpad Use the camera for video communication. Connect to a wireless LAN adapter to send and receive wireless radio signals. Captures sound which can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or audio recording. The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant visual output. Multi-touch function is available on this display. The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Touchpad: To move the pointer on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the pointer to move. Touchpad buttons: The functions of the left/right side correspond to that of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad by pressing F6 (

). 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using the keyboard Keyboard function keys You can access certain system settings quickly by pressing the appropriate function keys.

: Mutes/unmutes the sound.

: Enables/disables Airplane mode.

: Decreases the volume level.

: Displays all currently active apps.

:

Increases the volume level.

: Closes the currently active window.

:

Refreshes the desktop or the currently active window.

:

:

Turns on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Toggles the display between the computer and an external device.

: Decreases the display brightness.

: Enables/disables the touchpad.

:

Increases the display brightness. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Positioning the display panel The display panel can be opened to any angle up to 300 degrees. Notebook Mode Suitable for tasks that require a keyboard and mouse (such as creating documents, writing e-mails, and so on). Stand Mode (Theater Mode) Suitable for tasks that require little or no touch (such as viewing photos or playing videos). Attention:

Do not open the display with too much force, otherwise the panel or hinges may be damaged. Note: The keyboard and touchpad are automatically locked when the screen is opened beyond 190 degrees

(approximately). 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a Kensington lock slot Attach a security lock (not supplied) here to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Notes:

You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. features. Lenovo offers no comment judgment or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features. b AC power adapter jack c USB port Connects to the AC power adapter. Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB device on page 7. d Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 7. e Combo audio jack Connects to headsets. Notes:

The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. The recording function might not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. f Rotation lock button Keeps the screen locked in portrait or landscape orientation. Locking the screen rotation will disable the gravity sensing function, thereby preventing the screen from changing its orientation automatically depending upon the angle at which it is held. Note: The screen rotation lock button will be disabled in notebook mode. g Volume down button h Volume up button Decreases the volume level. Increases the volume level. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting USB device Your computer comes with 3 USB ports compatible with USB devices. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver has been installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after it has been connected, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data to that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the Windows notification area to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card

Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) card

Secure Digital eXtended Capacity (SDXC) card

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Notes:

Insert only one card in the slot at a time. This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Inserting a memory card Insert the memory card until it touches the bottom of the slot. Removing a memory card Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it by using the Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Screen orientation You can rotate the display panel to your preferred orientation.

The orientation of the display automatically changes (alternating between portrait and landscape modes) depending on how you hold it. Landscape Portrait

To prevent automatic orientation, press the rotation lock button. It is located on the right edge of the computer (See illustration below). Note: The screen rotation lock button will be disabled in notebook mode. 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 2 3 4 5 6 a Battery status indicator b Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. Indicator Indicator status Meaning On (solid white) On (solid amber) Blinking quickly (amber) Blinking slowly (amber) Blinking slowly (white) On (solid white) Blinking Off The battery has more than 20% charge. The battery has between 5% and 20% charge. The battery has less than 5% charge. The battery is being charged. When the battery charge reaches 20%, the blinking color will change to white. The battery has between 20% and 80%

charge and is still charging. When the battery reaches 80% charge the light will stop blinking, but charging will continue until the battery is fully charged. The computer is powered on. The computer is in sleep mode. The computer is powered off. When the computer is off, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System or the BIOS setup utility, or to enter the boot menu. Connects to USB 3.0 devices. Battery status indicator Power status indicator c Novo button d USB port Note: For details, see Connecting USB device on page 7. e RJ-45 port f HDMI port Connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or an external display. 9 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

FLEX 3-1470/FLEX 3-1475/FLEX 3-1470 HSW/FLEX 3-1475 Carrizo 1 2 2 10 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer FLEX 3-1570/EDGE 2-1570/FLEX 3-1570 HSW/EDGE 2-1570 HSW 1 2 2 a Ventilation slots Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that the ventilation slots are not blocked or else the computer may overheat. b Speakers Provide audio output. 11 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Configuring the operating system for the first time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below:

Accepting the end user license agreement

Configuring the Internet connection

Registering the operating system

Creating a user account Operating system interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Windows 8.1 comes with two main user interfaces: the Start screen and the Windows desktop. To switch from the Start screen to the Windows desktop, do one of the following:

Select the Windows desktop tile on the Start screen.

Press the Windows button

.

Press the Windows key

+ D. To switch from the desktop to the Start screen, do one of the following:

Select Start

Move the cursor to the lower-left corner, and then select the Start button. from the charms bar. Start screen Desktop 12 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 The charms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Charms are navigation buttons that let you control your Windows 8.1 experience. Charms include: Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings. The Charms Bar is the menu that contains the charms. The five charms provide new and faster ways to perform many basic tasks, and are always available regardless of whichever app you are currently in. To display the charms, do one of the following:

Move the cursor to the upper-right or lower-right corner until the charms bar is displayed.

Use one finger to swipe in from the right edge of the screen until the charms bar is displayed.

Press Windows key

+ C. Search charm The Search charm is a powerful new way to find what you are looking for, including settings, files, Web images, Web videos, etc. Share charm The Share charm lets you send links, photos, and more to your friends and social networks without leaving the app you are in. 13 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Start charm The Start charm is a fast way to go to the Start screen. Devices charm The Devices charm allows you to connect or send files to any external devices, including the devices to play, print, and project. Settings charm The Settings charm lets you perform basic tasks, such as setting the volume or shutting down the computer. Also, you can get to the Control Panel through the Settings charm when on the Desktop screen. 14 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

When you have finished working with your computer, you can put it to sleep or shut it down. Putting your computer to sleep If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer to sleep. When the computer is in sleep mode, you can quickly wake it to resume use, bypassing the startup process. To put the computer to sleep, do one of the following:

Close the display lid.

Press the Power button.

Open the charms, and then select Settings Power Sleep. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep mode) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following:

Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only)

Press the Power button.

Press the Windows button

. Shutting down the computer If you are not going to use your computer for a long time, shut it down. To shut down the computer, do one of the following:

Open the charms, and then select Settings

Press and hold or right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner and select Shut down or Shut down. Power sign out Shut down.

Select Shut down in the upper-right corner of the Start screen. Note: The operation depends on the BIOS setup. Please refer to the actual product. 15 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Touch screen operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The display panel can accept inputs like a tablet, using the multi-touch screen, or like a traditional notebook computer, using the keyboard and touchpad. Multi-touch gestures You can touch the screen with one or more fingertips to perform a variety of tasks. Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Tap Tap once on an item. Performs an action, such as starting an app, opening a link, or performing a command. Similar to left-clicking with a mouse. Press and hold Press your finger down and leave it there for a moment. Enables you to see detailed information before selecting an action. Can also open a menu with more options. Similar to right-

clicking with a mouse. 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Zoom Move two fingers together or apart while touching the screen. Zooms in and out on visual apps, such as pictures and maps. Can also jump to the beginning or end of a list. Rotate Place two or more fingers on an item and then turn your hand. Rotates an object (Note: Not all items can be rotated, depending upon the app.). Slide Drag your finger across the screen. Pans or scrolls through lists and pages. Can also move an object or be used to draw or write, depending upon the app. Similar to pressing and holding to pan and to scrolling with a mouse. 17 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swipe Start from any edge of the screen, then swipe inwards toward the center. Swiping down from the top edge or up from the bottom edge displays a task bar on the bottom of the screen with app commands, including save, edit, and delete. If you have an app currently open, you can also:

Swipe from the top edge to halfway down the screen without lifting your finger to dock that app on the left or right side of the screen. This enables you to keep two apps open simultaneously in a split-screen format. Swipe from the top edge straight down to the bottom edge of the screen continuously without lifting your finger to close the currently open app. 18 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swiping in from the left edge can:

Bring in and open an app currently running in the background. If there is more than one currently open app, you can:

Swipe in from the left to bring in an app and, without lifting your finger, push that app quickly back off the left edge of the screen. This displays a list of the apps currently running in the background. Swiping in from the right edge of the screen displays the charms. 19 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Connecting to a wireless network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless functions, do one of the following:

Press F7 (

) to disable airplane mode.

Open the charms and select Settings Then toggle the airplane mode switch to off. to open the network configuration page. Note: Ensure the Wi-Fi switch on the Network configuration page is toggled to On. Connecting to a wireless network After wireless has been enabled, the computer will automatically scan for available wireless networks and display them in the wireless network list. To connect to a wireless network, click the network name in the list, and then click Connect. Note: Some networks require a network security key or passphrase for connection. To connect to one of those networks, ask the network administrator or the Internet service provider (ISP) for the security key or passphrase. 20 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Help and support - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you have a problem with the operating system, see the Windows Help and Support file. To open the Windows Help and Support file, do one of the following:

Select Settings charm, then select Help.

Press Windows key

+ Fn + F1. You can read the Windows Help and Support file on your computer. You can also get online help and support by clicking on one of the two links listed under More to explore. Note: Windows 8.1 also provides an app, Help + Tips. You can find it on the Start screen, to learn more information on new features of Windows 8.1. 21 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System The Lenovo OneKey Recovery System is software designed to back up and restore your computer. You can use it to restore the system partition to its original status in case of a system failure. You can also create user backups for easy restoration as required. Notes:

If your computer is preinstalled with a GNU/Linux operating system, OneKey Recovery System is not available. To utilize the features of the OneKey Recovery System, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and the OneKey Recovery System program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons, which explains why the available disk space is less than the stated capacity. Backing up the system partition You can back up the system partition to an image file. To back up the system partition:

1 Press the Novo button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. 2 Click System Backup. 3 Select a back-up location and click Next to start the backup. Notes:

You can choose a back-up location on the local hard disk drive or an external storage device. Remove the removable hard disk drive before starting the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. Otherwise, data from the removable hard disk drive might be lost. The back-up process may take a while. The back-up process is only available when Windows can be started normally. Restoring You can choose to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. To restore the system partition:

1 Press the Novo button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. 2 Click System Recovery. The computer will restart to the recovery environment. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. Notes:

The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any data you wish to save on the system partition before starting the recovery process. The recovery process may take a while. So be sure to connect the AC power adapter to your computer during the recovery process. The above instructions should be followed when Windows can be started normally. If Windows cannot be started, then follow the steps below to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button. From Novo Button Menu, select System Recovery and press Enter. 22 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions by category. Finding information What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

The Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide which came with your computer contains safety precautions for using your computer. Read and follow all the precautions when using your computer. Where can I find the hardware specifications for my computer?

You can find the hardware specification for your computer on the printed flyers which came with your computer. Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide (SWSG) that came with your computer. Drivers and preinstalled software Where are the installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software (desktop software)?

Your computer did not come with installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software. If you need to reinstall any preinstalled software, you can find the installation program on the D partition of your hard disk. If you cannot find the installation program there, you can also download it from the Lenovo consumer support website. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?

If your computer is preinstalled with a Windows operating system, Lenovo provides drivers for all the hardware devices that you need on the D partition of your hard disk. You can also download the latest device drivers from the Lenovo consumer support website. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with any recovery discs. Use the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System if you need to restore the system to its original factory status. What can I do if the back-up process fails?

If you can start the backup but it fails during the back-up process, try the following steps:

1 Close all open programs, and then restart the back-up process. 2 Check to see if the destination media is damaged. Select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to its factory status?

Use this feature when the operating system fails to start up. If there is critical data on the system partition, back it up before starting recovery. 23 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting BIOS setup utility What is the BIOS setup utility?

The BIOS setup utility is a ROM-based software. It displays basic computer information and provides options for setting boot devices, security, hardware mode, and other preferences. How can I start the BIOS setup utility?

To start the BIOS setup utility:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. How can I change the boot mode?

There are two boot modes: UEFI and Legacy Support. To change the boot mode, start the BIOS setup utility and set boot mode to UEFI or Legacy Support on the boot menu. When do I need to change the boot mode?

The default boot mode for your computer is UEFI mode. If you need to install a legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc (that is, any operating system before Windows 8) on your computer, you must change the boot mode to Legacy Support. The legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc cannot be installed if you don't change the boot mode. Getting help How can I contact the customer support center?

See Chapter 3. Getting help and service in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 24 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. The screen goes blank while the computer is on. Sleep problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test (POST). If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The AC power adapter is connected to the computer, and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. Press the Power button again for confirmation. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to its original factory contents using the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to resume from sleep mode:

- Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only)

- Press the Power button.

- Press the Windows button.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC power adapter to the computer. Make sure that:

- The battery pack is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery pack is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 25 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode, and the computer does not work. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC power adapter to the computer, then press the Windows button or the Power button. If the system still does not return from sleep mode, stops responding, or cannot be turned off, reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the Power button for eight seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC power adapter. Display panel problems The screen is blank. Do the following:

- If you are using the AC power adapter or the battery pack, and the battery status indicator is on, press F12 (

make the screen brighter.

) to

- If the power indicator is blinking, press the Power button to resume from sleep mode.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off.

- If the problem persists, follow the solution in the next problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Make sure that:

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. Is the operating system or programs installed correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speakers even when the volume is turned up. Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The combo audio jack is not being used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 26 Battery pack problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. Other problems Your computer does not respond. The connected external device does not work. Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Recharge the battery. To turn off your computer, press and hold the Power button for eight seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC power adapter. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on. Otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use an external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or the system may shut down as a result. 27 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 28 L e n o v o C h n a i 2 0 1 4 en-US Rev. AA00

 

 

User Guide ThinkPad E460 and E465 Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read and understand the following:

Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide Regulatory Notice Appendix E Notices on page 147 Important safety information on page vi The Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide and the Regulatory Notice have been uploaded to the Web site. To refer to them, go to http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadUserGuides and follow the instructions on the screen. First Edition (November 2015) Copyright Lenovo 2015. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Read this first . Important safety information . Conditions that require immediate action . Service and upgrades . Power cords and power adapters . Extension cords and related devices . Plugs and outlets . Power supply statement . External devices . General battery notice . Notice for built-in rechargeable battery . Notice for non-rechargeable coin-cell battery . Heat and product ventilation . Electrical current safety information . Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice . Using headphones or earphones. Additional safety information . v

. vi vii vii viii ix

. ix

. ix

. x

. x

. x

. xi

. xi xii xiii xiii xiii

. Front view. Right-side view. Left-side view . Bottom view . Status indicators . Locating important product information . Chapter 1. Product overview . Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators. Machine type and model information . FCC ID and IC Certification information . Labels for the Windows operating systems . Accessing Lenovo programs . An introduction to Lenovo programs . Features . Specifications . Operating environment

. Lenovo programs

. 1

. 1 1 3 4 6 6 8 8 8 9 9 10 11 11 11 12

. Chapter 2. Using your computer . Registering your computer . Frequently asked questions

. Getting help about the Windows operating

. system . Special keys

. Function keys and key combinations . Windows key . ThinkPad pointing device. ThinkPad pointing device . 15 15

. 15

. 17 17 17 18 19 19 Copyright Lenovo 2015

. Power management

. Using the ac power . Checking the battery status . Charging the battery

. Maximizing the battery life . Managing the battery power

. Power-saving modes . Handling the battery. Connecting to the network . Ethernet connections . Wireless connections . Trackpad touch gestures . Customizing the ThinkPad pointing device . Replacing the cap of the TrackPoint pointing

. stick . Connecting an external display . Choosing a display mode . Changing display settings . Using audio features . Using the camera . Using a flash media card. Using an external display

. Chapter 3. Enhancing your

. computer . Finding ThinkPad options . ThinkPad OneLink Dock . ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock . Chapter 4. You and your computer . Accessibility and comfort

. Ergonomic information. Comfort

. Accessibility information . Traveling with your computer . Travel tips . Travel accessories . Chapter 5. Security . Attaching a mechanical lock . Using passwords. Typing passwords

. Power-on password . Supervisor password . Hard disk passwords . Hard disk security . Setting the security chip . 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 24 25 25 26 27 27 27 29 30 30 31 31 31 32

. 35 35

. 35

. 36

. 39 39

. 39

. 40 40

. 43

. 43

. 43

. 45 45

. 45 45

. 46

. 46

. 48 50

. 50 i

. Using the fingerprint reader. Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive . Using firewalls . Protecting data against viruses . Chapter 6. Advanced configuration . Installing a new operating system . Installing the Windows 7 operating system . Installing Windows 10 operating system . Main menu . Config menu. Date and Time menu . Security menu . Startup menu . Restart menu . Updating your system UEFI BIOS . Installing device drivers . Using the ThinkPad Setup program . Chapter 7. Preventing problems . General tips for preventing problems . Making sure device drivers are current

. Taking care of your computer . Cleaning the cover of your computer . 51 54 54 54

. 57 57

. 57 58

. 59

. 59

. 60 60

. 65

. 65

. 72 73

. 74

. 75 75

. 76

. 77

. 78

. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems . Diagnosing problems . Troubleshooting . 81

. 81

. 81

. 81

. Computer stops responding . 82

. Spills on the keyboard . 82

. Error messages

. 84

. Errors without messages . 85

. Beep errors . 86

. Memory module problems . 86 Networking problems . Problems with the keyboard and other pointing devices . Problems with the display and multimedia

. devices . Fingerprint reader problems. Battery and power problems . Problems with drives and other storage

. devices . A software problem . Problems with ports and connectors . 89 94 95 97 98 98 88

. Chapter 9. Recovery overview . Recovery overview for the Windows 7 operating

. system . Creating and using a recovery media . 101

. 101 101 ii User Guide

. Performing backup and recovery operations

. Using the Rescue and Recovery

. workspace . Creating and using a rescue medium . Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device

. drivers . Solving recovery problems . Recovery overview for the Windows 10 operating system . Resetting your computer . Using advanced startup options . Recovering your operating system if Windows 10 fails to start . Creating and using a recovery USB drive . Chapter 10. Replacing devices . Static electricity prevention. Replacing the coin-cell battery . Replacing the internal storage drive . Replacing the memory module . Replacing the keyboard . Chapter 11. Getting support

. Before you contact Lenovo . Getting help and service . Using diagnostic programs . Lenovo Support Web site. Calling Lenovo . Purchasing additional services . Certification related information . Export classification notice . Electronic emission notices. Appendix A. Regulatory information . Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas . Wireless related information . Wireless-radio compliance information . Locating wireless regulatory notices . Federal Communications Commission

. Declaration of Conformity

. Industry Canada Class B emission compliance statement . European Union - Compliance to the

. Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . German Class B compliance statement . Korea Class B compliance statement . Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement . Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase . 102 103 104 105 106 106 106 106 107 107 109 109 109 112 116 119 127 127 127 128 128 128 129 131 131 131 132 133 133 133 133 133 134 134 134 135 135 135

. Japan notice for ac power cord . Lenovo product service information for

. Taiwan . Eurasian compliance mark . Brazil audio notice . 135 136 136 136

. Appendix B. WEEE and recycling

. statements . Important WEEE information . Japan recycling statements

. Recycling information for Brazil . Battery recycling information for the European

. Union . Battery recycling information for Taiwan. Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada. 137 137 137 138 138 139 139 Recycling information for China . 139 Appendix C. Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) . European Union RoHS . China RoHS. India RoHS . Turkish RoHS . Ukraine RoHS . 141 141 142 142 143 143 Appendix D. ENERGY STAR model information . Appendix E. Notices . Trademarks . 145 147 148

. Copyright Lenovo 2015 iii iv User Guide Read this first Be sure to follow the important tips given here to get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury, or cause your computer to fail. Protect yourself from the heat that your computer generates. When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. The temperature they reach depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time. Periodically take hands from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest. Protect yourself from the heat generated by the ac power adapter. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. Do not place the ac power adapter in contact with any part of your body while it is in use. Never use it to warm your body. Prevent your computer from getting wet. To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock, keep liquids away from your computer. Protect the cables from being damaged. Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them. Route communication lines, or the cables of an ac power adapter, a mouse, a keyboard, a printer, or any other electronic device, so that they cannot be walked on, tripped over, pinched by your computer or other objects, or in any way subjected to treatment that could interfere with the operation of your computer. Copyright Lenovo 2015 v Protect your computer and data when moving it. Before moving a computer equipped with a hard disk drive or hybrid drive, do one of the following:

Turn it off. Put it in sleep mode. Put it in hibernation mode. This will help to prevent damage to the computer, and possible loss of data. Handle your computer gently. Carry your computer carefully. Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices. Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag. Before putting your computer in a carrying case, make sure that it is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. Do not put a computer in a carrying case while it is turned on. Important safety information Note: Read the important safety information first. This information can help you safely use your notebook computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Lenovo Limited Warranty. For more information, see Warranty Information in the Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide that comes with your computer. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition to notebook computers, some products (such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, computer products contain a coin-cell battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged, so the battery safety information applies to all computer products. vi User Guide Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. Or you might hear sounds like popping, cracking or hissing. These conditions might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. However, do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance. For a list of Service and Support phone numbers, see the following Web site:

http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance. Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken, or damaged. Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire. Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery. A cracking, hissing or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product. Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord or power adapter. The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water. The product has been dropped or damaged in any way. The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or your documentation. Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product. Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Upgrades typically are referred to as options. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord, always make sure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. If you have any questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center. Copyright Lenovo 2015 vii Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the following warnings are required for your safety. CAUTION:

Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away. CAUTION:

Before you open the computer cover, turn off the computer and wait several minutes until the computer is cool. Power cords and power adapters DANGER Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly. Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. Protect power cords and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating. Always connect power cords and signal cables in the correct order and ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input pins or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way. viii User Guide Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings. Plugs and outlets DANGER If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices. Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet. Power supply statement DANGER Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached. Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician. Copyright Lenovo 2015 ix External devices CAUTION:

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB and 1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices. General battery notice DANGER Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause overheat, liquid leakage, or an explosion. To avoid possible injury, do the following:

Do not open, dissemble, or service any battery. Do not crush or puncture the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery, or expose it to water or other liquids. Keep the battery away from children Keep the battery away from fire. Stop using the battery if it is damaged, or if you notice any discharge or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads. Store the rechargeable batteries or products containing the rechargeable batteries at room temperature, charged to approximately 30 to 50% of capacity. We recommend that the batteries be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge. Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations. Notice for built-in rechargeable battery DANGER Do not attempt to replace the built-in rechargeable battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. x User Guide Notice for non-rechargeable coin-cell battery DANGER If the coin-cell battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery contains a small amount of harmful substance. Do not heat to more than 100C (212F). The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A. California Perchlorate Information:

Products containing manganese dioxide lithium coin-cell batteries may contain perchlorate. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate Heat and product ventilation DANGER Computers, ac power adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:

When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you use the keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time. Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time. Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments. Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the ac power adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:

Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in. Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation. Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas. Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings. Copyright Lenovo 2015 xi Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating. Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35C (95F). Electrical current safety information DANGER Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:

Do not use your computer during a lightning storm. Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this product. Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Disconnect the attached power cords, battery, and all the cables before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. Do not use your computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place. Never use the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed. DANGER Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To connect:

To disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, attach all cables to devices. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlets. 5. Turn devices ON. 1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, remove power cords from outlets. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors. 4. Remove all cables from devices. The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the computer. The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer. DANGER During electrical storms, do not perform any replacement and do not connect the telephone cable to or disconnect it from the telephone outlet on the wall. xii User Guide Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice CAUTION:

The LCD is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care. Note: For products with mercury-containing fluorescent lamps (for example, non-LED), the fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury; dispose of according to local, state, or federal laws. Using headphones or earphones CAUTION:

Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of the equalizer to maximum increases the earphone and headphone output voltage and the sound pressure level. Therefore, to protect your hearing, adjust the equalizer to an appropriate level. Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification limits the computers maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7 limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, the combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1. If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1 (Clause 6.5 Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. Additional safety information Plastic bag notice DANGER Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation. Glass parts notice CAUTION:

Some parts of your product may be made of glass. This glass could break if the product is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your product until the glass is replaced by trained service personnel. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) cable and cord notice Many personal computer products and accessories contain cords, cables or wires, such as power cords or cords to connect the accessory to a personal computer. If this product has such a cord, cable or wire, then the following warning applies:

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Copyright Lenovo 2015 xiii Save these instructions. xiv User Guide Chapter 1. Product overview This chapter provides information about connector locations, important product labels, computer features, specifications, operating environment, and preinstalled programs. This chapter contains the following topics:

Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators on page 1 Locating important product information on page 8 Features on page 9 Specifications on page 10 Operating environment on page 11 Lenovo programs on page 11 Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators This section introduces the computer hardware features to give you the basic information you need to start using the computer. Front view Figure 1. ThinkPad E460 and E465 front view 1 Microphones 3 Power button 5 System-status indicator 7 ThinkPad trackpad 9 Media-card slot Copyright Lenovo 2015 2 Camera 4 TrackPoint pointing stick 6 Fingerprint reader (available on some models) 8 TrackPoint buttons (available on some models) 1 1 Microphones The built-in microphones capture sound and voice when used with a program capable of handling audio. Depending on your model, your computer might come with one microphone. 2 Camera Use the camera to take pictures or hold a video conference. For more information, see Using the camera on page 31. 3 Power button Press the power button to turn on the computer or put the computer into sleep mode. For how to turn off the computer, see Frequently asked questions on page 15. If your computer is completely unresponsive, you can turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for four or more seconds. If the computer cannot be turned off, see Computer stops responding on page 81 for more information. You also can define what the power button does. For example, by pressing the power button, you can turn off the computer or put the computer into sleep or hibernation mode. To change what the power button does, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, then change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Power Options Choose what the power buttons do. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. ThinkPad pointing device 4 TrackPoint pointing stick 7 ThinkPad trackpad 8 TrackPoint buttons (available on some models) The keyboard contains the ThinkPad pointing device. Pointing, selecting, and dragging are all part of a single process that you can perform without moving your fingers from a typing position. For more information, see ThinkPad pointing device on page 19. 5 System-status indicator The illuminated dot in the ThinkPad logo functions as a system-status indicator. For the detailed information about the indicator, see Status indicators on page 6. 6 Fingerprint reader (available on some models) Some models have a fingerprint reader. Fingerprint authentication technology provides a simple and secure user access by associating your fingerprint with a password. For more information about the fingerprint reader, see Using the fingerprint reader on page 51. 9 Media-card slot Your computer is equipped with a media card reader, which provides a media-card slot. Insert your flash media card into the media-card slot to read the data on the card. For more information about the supported cards, see Using a flash media card on page 32. 2 User Guide Right-side view Figure 2. ThinkPad E460 and E465 right-side view 1 USB 3.0 connectors 3 Ethernet connector 5 Lenovo OneLink connector 2 High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) connector 4 ac power connector 1 USB 3.0 connectors The Universal Serial Bus (USB) 3.0 connectors are used for connecting USB-compatible devices, such as a USB keyboard or a USB mouse. Note: When you attach a USB cable to this USB connector, ensure that the USB mark is facing upward. Otherwise the connector might get damaged. 2 HDMI connector Use the high-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) connector to connect the computer to an HDMI-compatible audio device or video monitor, such as a high-definition television (HDTV). Note: If you connect the computer to a supported ThinkPad OneLink Dock, use the HMDI connector on the dock, not the one on the computer. 3 Ethernet connector Connect the computer to a local area network (LAN) with the Ethernet connector. DANGER To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector. You can only connect an Ethernet cable to this connector. Chapter 1. Product overview 3 The Ethernet connector has two indicators that show the status of the network connection. When the green indicator is on, the computer is connected to a LAN. When the yellow indicator blinks, data is being transmitted. Note: If the computer is connected to the ThinkPad OneLink Dock or ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock, use the Ethernet connector on the docking station instead of the one on the computer. 4 ac power connector 5 Lenovo OneLink connector When the ac power adapter is connected to the ac power connector, it provides power to the computer and charges the battery. When a supported ThinkPad OneLink Dock or ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock is connected to the Lenovo OneLink connector, it can not only extend the computer capabilities but also provide ac power to the computer and charge the battery. To use the Lenovo OneLink connector, you need to remove the connector cover from the Lenovo OneLink connector first. Note: Ensure that you keep the connector cover. Reattach it to the Lenovo OneLink connector when you are not using the Lenovo OneLink connector. Left-side view Figure 3. ThinkPad E460 and E465 left-side view 1 Security-lock slot 3 Always On USB connector 2 Fan louvers 4 Combo audio connector 1 Security-lock slot To protect your computer from theft, purchase a security cable lock that fits this security-lock slot to lock your computer to a stationary object. 4 User Guide 2 Fan louvers The fan louvers and the internal fan enable air to circulate in the computer to ensure proper cooling, especially the cooling of the microprocessor. Note: To ensure proper airflow, do not place any obstacle in front of the fan louvers. 3 Always On USB connector (USB 3.0) By default, the Always On USB connector enables you to charge some mobile digital devices and smartphones in the following situations:

When your computer is on or in sleep mode When your computer is in hibernation mode or is turned off, but connected to ac power If you want to charge these devices when the computer is in hibernation mode or is turned off, and the computer is not connected to ac power, do the following:

For Windows 7: Start the Power Manager program, click the Global Power Settings tab, and then follow the instructions on the screen. For Windows 10: Start the Lenovo Settings program, click Power, and then follow the instructions on the screen. For instructions on how to start the programs, see Accessing Lenovo programs on page 11. Attention: When you attach a USB cable to this connector, ensure that the USB mark is facing upward. Otherwise the connector might get damaged. 4 Combo audio connector To listen to the sound from your computer, connect headphones or a headset that has a 3.5 mm, 4-pole plug to the combo audio connector. Notes:

If you are using a headset with a function switch, do not press this switch while using the headset. If you press it, the headset microphone will be disabled, and the integrated microphones on the computer will be enabled instead. The combo audio connector does not support a conventional microphone. For more information, see Using audio features on page 31. Chapter 1. Product overview 5 Bottom view Figure 4. ThinkPad E460 and E465 bottom view 1 Wireless-LAN-card slot 3 Speakers 5 Internal storage drive 2 Memory-upgrade slots 4 Built-in battery 1 Wireless LAN card slot Your computer might have a wireless LAN card installed for you to establish wireless LAN connections. 2 Memory-upgrade slot You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a memory module in the memory-upgrade slot. Memory modules are available as options from Lenovo. 3 Speakers Your computer is equipped with a pair of stereo speakers. 4 Battery Use your computer with the battery power whenever ac power is unavailable. 5 Internal storage drive Your computer has a large-capacity, customer-upgradable internal storage drive installed. Depending on the model, the internal storage drive can be a hard disk drive, solid-state drive, or hybrid drive to meet various storage demands. Note: The hidden service partition is the reason why there is less free space than expected on your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. Status indicators Your computer has several status indicators showing the status of your computer. Note: Your computer keyboard might look different from the following illustration. 6 User Guide 1 Fn Lock indicator The Fn Lock indicator shows the status of Fn Lock function. For more information, see Special keys on page 17. 2 Speaker-mute indicator When the speaker-mute indicator is on, the speakers are muted. 3 Microphone-mute indicator When the microphone-mute indicator is on, the microphones are muted. 4 Camera-status indicator When the camera-status indicator is on, the camera is in use. 5 6 System-status indicators There are two ThinkPad logos on your computer, one on the palm rest and the other on the outer lid. The illuminated dot in each ThinkPad logo works as a system-status indicator and helps you identify the status of your computer. Blinks for three times: The computer is initially connected to the power. Blinks fast: The computer is entering hibernation mode. Blinks slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. Chapter 1. Product overview 7 Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. On: The computer is on (in normal mode). Locating important product information This section provides information to help you locate the machine type and model label, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ID and IC Certification label, the Windows Certificate of Authenticity label, and the Genuine Microsoft label. Machine type and model information The machine type and model label identifies your computer. When you contact Lenovo for help, the machine type and model information helps support technicians to identify your computer and provide faster service. The following figure shows the location of the machine type and model of your computer:

FCC ID and IC Certification information The FCC and IC Certification information is identified by a label located on the computer base cover as shown in the following figure. For a preinstalled wireless module, this label identifies the actual FCC ID and IC certification number for the wireless module installed by Lenovo. 8 User Guide Note: Do not remove or replace a preinstalled wireless module by yourself. For module replacement, you must contact Lenovo service first. Lenovo is not responsible for any damage caused by unauthorized replacement. Labels for the Windows operating systems Windows 7 Certificate of Authenticity: Computer models preinstalled with the Windows 7 operating system have a Certificate of Authenticity label affixed to the computer cover or inside the battery compartment. The Certificate of Authenticity is your indication that the computer is licensed for a Windows 7 product and is preinstalled with a Windows 7 genuine version. In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 7 Professional license downgrade rights. Printed on the Certificate of Authenticity is the Windows 7 version for which the computer is licensed and the Product ID. The Product ID is important in case you need to reinstall the Windows 7 operating system from a source other than a Lenovo product recovery disc set. Windows 10 Genuine Microsoft label: Depending on your geographic location, the date when your computer was manufactured, and the Windows 10 version that is preinstalled, your computer might have a Genuine Microsoft label affixed to its cover. See http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/Hardware.aspx for illustrations of the various types of Genuine Microsoft labels. In the Peoples Republic of China, the Genuine Microsoft label is required on all computer models preinstalled with any Windows 10 version. In other countries and regions, the Genuine Microsoft label is required only on computer models licensed for Windows 10 Pro. The absence of a Genuine Microsoft label does not indicate that the preinstalled Windows version is not genuine. For details on how to tell whether your preinstalled Windows product is genuine, refer to the information provided by Microsoft at http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/default.aspx. Unlike Windows 7 products, there are no external, visual indicators of the Product ID or Windows version for which the computer is licensed. Instead, the Product ID is recorded in the computer firmware. Whenever a Windows 10 product is installed, the installation program checks the computer firmware for a valid, matching Product ID to complete the activation. In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 10 Pro license downgrade rights. Features This topic lists the features of your computer. To view the system properties of your computer, do the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, right-click Computer, and then click Properties. For Windows 10: do either of the following:

Open the Start menu, and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings System About. Right-click the Start button

. Then select System. Memory Double data rate 3 low voltage synchronous dynamic random access memory modules (DDR3 LV SDRAM) Storage device Chapter 1. Product overview 9 2.5-inch form factor, 7-mm height hard disk drive 2.5-inch form factor, 7-mm height solid-state drive 2.5-inch form factor, 7-mm height hybrid drive Display The color display uses the Thin Film Transistor (TFT) technology. Size: 14.0 inches (355.6 mm) Resolution:

LCD: Up to 1366 x 768 or 1600 x 900, depending on the model External monitor: Up to 2048 x 1536 Brightness control Camera Microphones Keyboard 6-row keyboard ThinkPad pointing device Function keys Interface External monitor connector (HDMI connector) Combo audio connector Two USB 3.0 connectors One Always On USB connector (USB 3.0) RJ45 Ethernet connector 4-in-1 media-card slot Lenovo OneLink connector ac power connector Wireless features Integrated wireless LAN Integrated Bluetooth Security features Fingerprint reader (available on some models) Specifications This section lists the physical specifications for your computer. Size Width: 339 mm (13.35 inches) Depth: 239 mm (9.41 inches) Height: 24.4 mm (0.96 inches) 10 User Guide Heat output 47W (160 Btu/hr) or 65 W (222 Btu/hr) maximum (depending on the model) Power source (ac power adapter) Sine-wave input at 50 to 60 Hz Input rating of the ac power adapter: 100 to 240 V ac, 50 to 60 Hz Operating environment This section provides information about the operating environment of your computer. Environment:

Maximum altitude without pressurization: 3048 m (10 000 ft) Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft) Operating: 5.0C to 35.0C (41F to 95F) Storage: 5.0C to 43.0C (41F to 109F) At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft) Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition: 31.3C (88F) Note: When you charge the battery, its temperature must be at least 10C (50F). Relative humidity:

Operating: 8% to 80%

Storage: 5% to 95%

If possible, place your computer in a well-ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine. Attention:

Keep electrical appliances such as an electric fan, radio, air conditioner, and microwave oven away from the computer. The strong magnetic fields generated by these appliances can damage the monitor and data on the hard disk drive or hybrid drive. Do not place any beverages on top of or beside the computer or other attached devices. If liquid is spilled on or in the computer or an attached device, a short circuit or other damage might occur. Do not eat or smoke over your keyboard. Particles that fall into your keyboard can cause damage. Lenovo programs Your computer comes with Lenovo programs to help you work easily and securely. Note: The available programs are subject to change without notice. To learn more about the programs and other computing solutions offered by Lenovo, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/support Accessing Lenovo programs To access Lenovo programs on your computer, do the following:

For Windows 7 and Windows 10:

Chapter 1. Product overview 11 1. Click the Start button to open the Start menu. Locate a program by the program name. 2. If the program is not displayed on the Start menu, click All programs or All apps to display all programs. 3. If you still do not find the program in the program list, search for the program in the search box. Some Lenovo programs are ready to be installed. You cannot find these programs through the above methods unless you have installed them first. To install these Lenovo programs, go to Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools and follow the instructions on the screen. An introduction to Lenovo programs This topic provides a brief introduction to Lenovo programs. Depending on your computer model, some of the programs might not be available. The Access Connections program is a connectivity assistant program for creating and managing location profiles. Each location profile stores all the network and Internet configuration settings needed for connecting to a network infrastructure from a specific location such as a home or an office. By switching between location profiles as you move your computer from place to place, you can quickly and easily connect to a network with no need to manually reconfigure your settings and restart the computer each time. The Active Protection System program protects your internal storage drive (such as hard disk drive) when the shock sensor inside your computer detects a condition that could damage the drive, such as system tilt, excessive vibration, or shock. The internal storage drive is less vulnerable to damage when it is not operating. This is because when the internal storage drive is not operating, the system stops it from spinning, and might also move the read and write heads of the drive to areas that do not contain data. As soon as the shock sensor senses that the environment is stable again

(minimal change in system tilt, vibration, or shock), it turns on the internal storage drive. This program enhances your experience with window operation. The window position of a foreground application is automatically adjusted. The Communications Utility program enables you to configure settings for the integrated camera and audio devices. If your computer comes with a fingerprint reader, the Fingerprint Manager Pro program, Lenovo Fingerprint Manager program, or Touch Fingerprint Manager program enables you to enroll your fingerprint and associate it with your passwords. As a result, fingerprint authentication can replace your passwords and enable simple and secure user access. Hotkey Features Integration is a utility package that enables you to select and install utility programs specifically for the special keys and buttons on your computer. The special keys and buttons are designed to meet accessibility and usability requirements. Installing related utility programs enables full functionality of the special keys and buttons. Access Connections

(Windows 7) Active Protection System

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Auto Scroll Utility

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Communications Utility

(Windows 7) Fingerprint Manager Pro, Lenovo Fingerprint Manager, or Touch Fingerprint Manager

(Windows 7) Hotkey Features Integration

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) 12 User Guide Lenovo Companion

(Windows 10) Your computers best features and capabilities should be easy to access and understand. With Lenovo Companion, they are. User Companion to do the following:

Optimize your computers performance, monitor your computers health, and manage updates. Access your user guide, check warranty status, and view accessories customized for your computer. Read how-to articles, explore Lenovo forums, and stay up-to-date on technology news with articles and blogs from trusted sources. The Companion app is filled with exclusive Lenovo content to help you learn more about what you can do with your Lenovo computer. Lenovo PC Experience

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) The Lenovo PC Experience program helps you work more easily and securely by providing easy access to various programs, such as Active Protection System and Lenovo Solution Center. Lenovo Settings

(Windows 10) Lenovo Solution Center

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Mobile Broadband Connect

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Message Center Plus

(Windows 7) Password Manager

(Windows 7) Power Manager

(Windows 7) REACHit

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Recovery Media

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Rescue and Recovery

(Windows 7) SHAREit

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) The Lenovo Settings program enables you to enhance your computing experience by turning your computer into a portable hotspot, configuring camera and audio settings, optimizing your power settings, and creating and managing multiple network profiles. The Lenovo Solution Center program enables you to troubleshoot and resolve computer problems. It combines diagnostic tests, system information collection, security status, and support information, along with hints and tips for optimal system performance. The Mobile Broadband Connect program enables you to connect the computer to the mobile broadband network through a supported wireless WAN card. The Message Center Plus program automatically displays messages to inform you about important notices from Lenovo, such as alerts on system updates and alerts on conditions that require your attention. The Password Manager program automatically captures and fills in authentication information for Windows programs and Web sites. The Power Manager program provides convenient, flexible, and complete power management for the computer. It enables you to adjust your computer power settings to achieve the best balance between performance and power saving. REACHit enables you to manage all your files, no matter where they are stored, inside one single app. Connect your devices along with multiple cloud storage accounts for an easier and faster way to access your stuff. The Recovery Media program enables you to restore the contents of the hard disk drive to the factory default settings. The Rescue and Recovery program is a one-button recovery and restore solution. It includes a set of self-recovery tools to help you diagnose computer problems, get help, and recover from system crashes, even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. The SHAREit program enables you to share files easily and rapidly across devices such as computers and smartphones, even without any Internet connection. You can connect to your friends and send photos, folders, and other files through SHAREit. Every sharing is quick and simple. Chapter 1. Product overview 13 System Update

(Windows 7) WRITEit

(Windows 10) The System Update program enables you to keep the software on the computer up-to-date by downloading and installing software packages, including device drivers, Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) basic input/output system

(BIOS) updates, and other third-party programs. WRITEit gives you instant handwriting input wherever you need it. You can write directly in any app and text field, edit text in real-time, see your full screen, and convert your handwriting into digital text. 14 User Guide Chapter 2. Using your computer This chapter provides information on using some of the computer components. This chapter contains the following topics:

Registering your computer on page 15 Frequently asked questions on page 15 Special keys on page 17 ThinkPad pointing device on page 19 Power management on page 23 Connecting to the network on page 27 Using an external display on page 29 Using audio features on page 31 Using the camera on page 31 Using a flash media card on page 32 Registering your computer When you register your computer, information is entered into a database, which enables Lenovo to contact you in case of a recall or other severe problem. In addition, some locations offer extended privileges and services to registered users. When you register your computer with Lenovo, you also will receive the following benefits:

Quicker service when you call Lenovo for help Automatic notification of free software and special promotional offers To register your computer with Lenovo, go to http://www.lenovo.com/register and follow the instructions on the screen to register your computer. If you are using a Windows 7 operating system, you also can register your computer through the preinstalled Lenovo Product Registration program. The program launches automatically after you have used your computer for a period of time. Follow the instructions on the screen to register your computer. Frequently asked questions The following are a few tips that will help you optimize the use of your computer. To ensure that you receive the best performance from your computer, go to the following Web page to find information such as aids for troubleshooting and answers to frequently asked questions:

http://www.lenovo.com/support/faq Can I get my user guide in another language?

To download the user guide in another language, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support. Then follow the instructions on the screen. How to turn off my computer?

Copyright Lenovo 2015 15 For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, then click Shut down. For Windows 10: Open the Start menu, click Power, and then click Shut down. Note: You also can open the Settings charm by pressing the settings key

. How do I access Control Panel?

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, then click Control Panel. For Windows 10: Right-click the Start button, then click Control Panel. How do I use battery power more effectively when I am on the go?

To conserve power, or to suspend operation without exiting programs or saving files, see Power-saving modes on page 25. To achieve the best balance between performance and power saving, create and apply power plans. See Managing the battery power on page 25 If your computer will be turned off for an extended period of time, you can prevent battery power from draining by removing the battery. Look for more information about using the battery in Power management on page 23. How do I securely dispose of data stored on the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive?

Study Chapter 5 Security on page 45 section to find out how you can protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. Use the Password Manager program to protect the data stored on your computer. For details, see the help information system of the program. Before you dispose of the data on the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, be sure to read Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive on page 54. How do I give presentations or attach an external display?

Ensure that you follow the procedure for Using an external display on page 29. With the Extend desktop function, you can display output on both the computer display and an external monitor. How do I attach or replace a device?

See Chapter 10 Replacing devices on page 109 for more information about replacing the devices of your computer. I have been using the computer for some time already, and it is getting slower. What should I do?

Follow the General tips for preventing problems on page 75. Diagnose problems yourself by using the preinstalled diagnostic software. Check for recovery solutions in Chapter 9 Recovery overview on page 101. Print the following sections and keep them with your computer in case you are unable to access this online user guide when necessary. Installing a new operating system on page 57 Computer stops responding on page 81 Power problems on page 96 16 User Guide Getting help about the Windows operating system The Windows help information system provides you with detailed information about using the Windows operating system to help you get the most of your computer. To access the Windows help information system, do one of the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, and then click Help and Support. For Windows 10: Open the Start menu, and then click Get started from the right panel. Additionally, you can search from the taskbar to find help, apps, files, settings, and so on. Special keys Your computer has several special keys to help you work more easily and effectively. Function keys and key combinations The keyboard has several special keys, which consist of the Fn key and the function keys 1 . You can configure the Fn key and function keys in the Keyboard Properties window by doing the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, then change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Keyboard. In the Keyboard Properties window, click the Fn and function keys or ThinkPad F1F12 keys tab. 3. Select the options of your preference.

+

Enables or disables the Fn Lock function. When the Fn Lock function is enabled: The Fn Lock indicator is on. To input F1F12, press the function keys directly. To initiate the special function printed as an icon on each key, press the Fn key and the corresponding function key. When the Fn Lock function is disabled: The Fn Lock indicator is off (default mode). To initiate the special function printed as an icon on each key, press the function keys directly. To input F1F12, press the Fn key and the corresponding function key.

: Mutes or unmutes the speakers. When the speakers are muted, the speaker mute indicator turns on. Chapter 2. Using your computer 17 If you mute the sound and turn off your computer, the sound will remain muted when you turn on your computer again. To turn on the sound, press the speaker mute key key

, or the speaker volume-up key

, the speaker volume-down

.

: Decreases the speaker volume.

: Increases the speaker volume.

: Mutes or unmutes the microphones. When the microphones are muted, the microphone-mute indicator turns on.

: Darkens the display.

: Brightens the display. You can temporarily change the computer display brightness by pressing the two keys. To change the default brightness level, right-click the battery status icon in the Windows notification area. Then click Adjust screen brightness and make changes as desired.

: Manages external displays. For more information, refer to Using an external display on page 29. Note: To switch between the computer display and an external monitor, the Windows+P key combination also is available.

: Enables or disables wireless features. For more information on the wireless features, refer to Wireless connections on page 27. Windows 7: Opens Control Panel. Windows 10: Opens the Settings window. Windows 7: Opens Windows Search. Windows 10: Opens the Cortana search box. Views all the programs that you have opened. Windows 7: Opens Computer. Windows 10: Views all the programs. Fn+B: Has the same function as the Break key. Fn+P: Has the same function as the Pause key. Fn+S: Has the same function as the SysRq key. Fn+K: Has the same function as the ScrLK key. Windows key Press the Windows key 2 to open the Start menu. You also can use the Windows key together with another key to achieve other functions. For details, refer to the help information system of the Windows operating system. 18 User Guide ThinkPad pointing device The ThinkPad pointing device enables you to perform all the functions of a traditional mouse, such as moving the pointer, left-clicking, right-clicking, and scrolling. With the ThinkPad pointing device, you also can perform a variety of touch gestures, such as rotating and zooming in or out. ThinkPad pointing device The ThinkPad pointing device enables you to perform all the functions of a traditional mouse, such as pointing, clicking, and scrolling. With the ThinkPad pointing device, you also can perform a variety of touch gestures, such as rotating and zooming in or out. The ThinkPad pointing device consists of the following components:

1 TrackPoint pointing device 2 Trackpad By default, both the TrackPoint pointing device and the trackpad are active with the touch gestures enabled. To change the settings, see Customizing the ThinkPad pointing device on page 22. TrackPoint pointing device The TrackPoint pointing device enables you to perform all the functions of a traditional mouse, such as pointing, clicking, and scrolling. Chapter 2. Using your computer 19 The TrackPoint pointing device consists of a TrackPoint pointing stick and a set of TrackPoint buttons:

1 TrackPoint pointing stick 2 Left-click button (Primary-click button) 3 Right-click button (Secondary-click button) 4 Scroll bar To use the TrackPoint pointing device, refer to the following instructions:

Note: Place your hands in the typing position and use your index finger or middle finger to apply pressure to the pointing-stick nonslip cap. Use either thumb to press the left-click button or right-click button. Point Use the TrackPoint pointing stick 1 to move the pointer on the screen. To use the pointing stick, apply pressure to the pointing-stick nonslip cap in any direction parallel to the keyboard. The pointer moves accordingly but the pointing stick itself does not move. The speed at which the pointer moves depends on the amount of pressure you apply to the pointing stick. Left-click Press the left-click button 2 to select or open an item. Right-click Press the right-click button 3 to display a shortcut menu. Scroll Press and hold the dotted scroll bar 4 while applying pressure to the pointing stick in the vertical or horizontal direction. Then you can scroll through the document, Web site, or apps. Trackpad The entire trackpad is sensitive to finger touch and movement. You can use the trackpad to perform all the pointing, clicking, and scrolling functions of a traditional mouse. 20 User Guide The trackpad can be divided into two zones by its function:

1 Left-click zone (Primary-click zone) 2 Right-click zone (Secondary-click zone) To use the trackpad, refer to the following instructions:

Point Slide one finger across the surface of the trackpad to move the pointer accordingly. Left-click Press the left-click zone 1 to select or open an item. You also can tap anywhere on the surface of the trackpad with one finger to perform the left-click action. Right-click Press the right-click zone 2 to display a shortcut menu. You also can tap anywhere on the surface of the trackpad with two fingers to perform the right-click action. Scroll Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them in the vertical or horizontal direction. This action enables you to scroll through the document, Web site, or apps. Ensure that you position your two fingers slightly apart from each other. With the trackpad, you also can perform a variety of touch gestures. For information about using the touch gestures, see Trackpad touch gestures on page 21. Trackpad touch gestures The entire trackpad surface is sensitive to finger touch and movement. You can use the trackpad to perform the same point and click actions as you would using a traditional mouse. You also can use the trackpad to perform a variety of touch gestures. The following section introduces some frequently used touch gestures such as tapping, dragging, and scrolling. For more gestures, see the help information system of the ThinkPad pointing device. Notes:

When using two or more fingers, ensure that you position your fingers slightly apart. Some gestures are not available if the last action was done from the TrackPoint pointing device. Some gestures are only available when you are using certain apps. Chapter 2. Using your computer 21 Tap Tap anywhere on the trackpad with one finger to select or open an item. Two-finger scroll Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them in the vertical or horizontal direction. This action enables you to scroll through the document, Web site, or apps. Two-finger zoom in Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them farther apart to zoom in. Two-finger tap Tap anywhere on the trackpad with two fingers to display a shortcut menu. Two-finger zoom out Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them closer together to zoom out. The following section introduces some touch gestures on the Windows 10 operating system. Swipe three fingers up Put three fingers on the trackpad and move them up to open the task view to see all your open windows. Swipe three fingers down Put three fingers on the trackpad and move them down to show the desktop. Customizing the ThinkPad pointing device You can customize the ThinkPad pointing device so you can use it more comfortably and efficiently. For example, you can choose to enable the TrackPoint pointing device, the trackpad, or both. You also can disable or enable the touch gestures. To customize the ThinkPad pointing device, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Mouse. The Mouse Properties window is displayed. 3. In the Mouse Properties window, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the customization. Replacing the cap of the TrackPoint pointing stick The cap 1 on the end of the TrackPoint pointing stick is removable. After you use the cap for a period of time, you might consider replacing the cap with a new one. To get a new cap, contact Lenovo. For information about contacting Lenovo, see Chapter 11 Getting support on page 127. Note: Ensure that you use a cap with grooves a as shown in the following illustration. 22 User Guide Power management When you use your computer away from electrical outlets, you depend on battery power to keep your computer running. Different computer components consume power at different rates. The more you use the power-intensive components, the faster you consume battery power. Spend more time unplugged with ThinkPad batteries. Mobility has revolutionized business by enabling you to take your work wherever you go. With ThinkPad batteries, you will be able to work longer without being tied to an electrical outlet. Using the ac power The power to run your computer can come either from the battery or from ac power. While you use ac power, the batteries charge automatically. Your computer comes with an ac power adapter and a power cord. ac power adapter: Converts ac power for notebook computer use. Power cord: Connects the ac outlet and the ac power adapter. Connecting to ac power To connect the computer to ac power, do the following:

Attention: Using an improper power cord might cause severe damage to your computer. Note: Ensure that you perform the actions in the order in which they are listed. 1. Connect the power cord to the ac power adapter. 2. Connect the ac power adapter to the power connector of the computer. 3. Connect the power cord into an electrical outlet. Tips on using the ac power adapter When the ac power adapter is not in use, disconnect it from the electrical outlet. Do not bind the power cord tightly around the ac power adapter transformer pack when it is connected to the transformer. Before you charge the battery, make sure that its temperature is at least 10C (50F). You can charge the battery when the ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the battery is installed. You need to charge the battery in any of the following conditions:

Chapter 2. Using your computer 23 A new battery is installed. The percentage of power remaining is low. The battery has not been used for a long time. Checking the battery status Move your pointer to the battery-status icon in the Windows notification area to check the battery status. The battery-status icon displays the percentage of battery power remaining and how long you can use your computer before you must charge the battery. The rate at which you use battery power determines how long you can use the batteries of your computer between charges. Because of different user habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:

How much energy is stored in the battery when you begin to work. The way you use your computer. For example:

How often you access the storage drive. How bright you make the computer display. How often you use the wireless features. Enabling the battery alarm on the Windows 7 operating system For the Windows 7 operating system, you can program your computer so that when the battery power falls below a certain level, three events occur: the alarm goes off, a message is displayed, and the LCD is turned off. To enable the battery alarm, do the following:

1. Start the Power Manager program. 2. Click the Global Power Settings tab. 3. For Low battery alarm or Critically low battery alarm, set the percentage of the power level and set the action. Note: If your computer enters sleep or hibernation mode when the battery is low, but the alarm message has not yet been displayed, the message will be displayed when the computer resumes. To resume normal operation, when the message is displayed, click OK. Charging the battery When you find that the percentage of power remaining is low or when the power alarm alerts you that the remaining power is low, you need to charge your battery or replace it with a charged battery. If an ac outlet is convenient, plug the ac power adapter into it, and then insert the connector into the computer. The battery will be fully charged in about three to six hours. This is affected by the battery size and the physical environment. You can check the battery charging status at any time through the battery status icon in the Windows notification area. Note: To maximize the life of the battery, the computer does not start recharging the battery if the remaining power is greater than 95%. Maximizing the battery life To maximize the life of the battery, do the following:

Use the battery until the charge is completely depleted. 24 User Guide Recharge the battery completely before using it. You can see whether the battery is fully charged from the battery status icon in the Windows notification area. Always use power management features such as power-saving modes. Managing the battery power To achieve the best balance between performance and power saving, adjust your power plan settings. To adjust power plan settings, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, then change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Power Options. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. For more information, refer to the help information system of the program. Power-saving modes There are several modes that you can use at any time to conserve power. This section introduces each mode and gives tips on the effective use of battery power. Screen blank mode (for Windows 7 only) The computer display requires considerable battery power. To turn off the power to the display and make the computer enter screen blank mode, right-click the battery gauge icon in the Windows notification area and select Power off display. Sleep mode In sleep mode, your work is saved to memory, and then the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive and the computer display are turned off. When your computer wakes up, your work is restored within seconds. To put your computer into sleep mode, press Fn+4. You also can put the computer into sleep mode by doing the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, then click the arrow next to the Shut down button. Click Sleep from the menu displayed. For Windows 10: Open the Start menu, click Power, and then click Sleep. Hibernation mode By using this mode, you can turn off your computer completely without saving files or exiting any programs that are running. When the computer enters hibernation mode, all open programs, folders, and files are saved to the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, and then the computer turns off. To put the computer into hibernation mode, do the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, then click the arrow next to the Shut down button. Click Hibernate from the menu displayed. For Windows 10: Define what the power button does first, then press the power button to put the computer into hibernation mode. For more information, see Front view on page 1. If you put your computer into hibernation mode with the wake-up function disabled, the computer does not consume any power. The wake-up function is disabled by default. If you put your computer into hibernation mode with the wake-up function enabled, the computer consumes a small amount of power. To enable the wake-up function, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel and click System and Security. 2. Click Administrative Tools. 3. Click Task Scheduler. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. Chapter 2. Using your computer 25 4. From the left pane, select the task folder for which you want to enable the wake-up function. The scheduled tasks are displayed. 5. Click a scheduled task, and then click the Conditions tab. 6. Under Power, select the check box for Wake the computer to run this task. Wireless off When you are not using the wireless features, such as Bluetooth or wireless LAN, turn them off. This will help conserve power. To turn off the wireless features, press the wireless-switching key

. Handling the battery This system supports only batteries specially designed for this specific system and manufactured by Lenovo or an authorized builder. The system does not support unauthorized batteries or batteries designed for other systems. If an unauthorized battery or a battery designed for another system is installed, the system will not charge. Attention: Lenovo has no responsibility for the performance or safety of unauthorized batteries, and provides no warranties for failures or damage arising out of their use. Note: If an unauthorized battery is installed, the following message will be displayed: The battery installed is not supported by this system and will not charge. Please replace the battery with the correct Lenovo battery for this system. DANGER Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the battery. Attempting to do so can cause an explosion, or liquid leakage from the battery. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. DANGER If the rechargeable battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:

Replace only with a coin-cell battery of the type recommended by Lenovo. Keep the battery away from fire. Do not expose it to excessive heat. Do not expose it to water or rain. Do not short-circuit it. Store it in a cool dry place. Keep it away from children. The battery is a consumable supply. If your battery begins to discharge too quickly, replace the battery with a new one of the type recommended by Lenovo. For more information about replacing the battery, contact your Customer Support Center. 26 User Guide DANGER Do not drop, crush, or puncture the battery, or make it subject to strong forces. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame to vent from the battery or coin-cell battery. If your battery is damaged, or if you notice any discharge from your battery or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads, stop using the battery and obtain a replacement from the battery manufacturer. DANGER Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. DANGER Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your company's safety standards. DANGER There is a danger of an explosion if the coin-cell battery is incorrectly placed. The lithium battery contains lithium and can explode if it is not properly handled, or disposed of. Replace only with a battery of the same type. To avoid possible injury or death, do not: (1) throw or immerse into water,

(2) allow it to heat to more than 100C (212F), or (3) attempt to repair or disassemble it. Dispose of it as required by local ordinances or regulations and your company's safety standards. Connecting to the network Your computer has one or more network cards that enable you to connect your computer to the Internet and other network connections. Ethernet connections You can connect your computer to a local network or a broadband connection by using the built-in Ethernet feature of the computer. DANGER Your computer has an Ethernet connector. To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector. Wireless connections Wireless connection is the transfer of data without the use of cables but by means of radio waves only. In Airplane mode, all wireless features are disabled. To disable Airplane mode, open the Start menu, and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. Slide the control for Airplane mode to the left. Depending on the wireless devices installed on your computer, you might be able to use the following wireless networks:

Chapter 2. Using your computer 27 Wireless LAN connection Bluetooth connection Using the wireless LAN connection A wireless local area network (LAN) covers a relatively small geographic area, such as an office building or a house. Devices based on the 802.11 standards can connect to this type of network. Your computer comes with a built-in wireless network card and a configuration utility to help you establish wireless connections and monitor the connection status. This enables you to stay connected to your network while you are at the office, in a meeting room, or at home, with no need for a wired connection. To establish a wireless-LAN connection, do the following:

1. Click the wireless-network-connection-status icon in the Windows notification area. A list of available wireless networks is displayed. 2. Double-click a network to connect to it. Provide required information if needed. The computer automatically connects to an available wireless network when the location changes. Open Network and Sharing Center to manage multiple network profiles. For more information, refer to the Windows help information system. Tips for using the wireless LAN feature To achieve the best connection, use the following guidelines:

Place your computer so that there are as few obstacles as possible between the wireless LAN access point and the computer. Open your computer lid to an angle of slightly more than 90 degrees. If you use the wireless feature (the 802.11 standards) of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth option, the data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be degraded. Checking the wireless-LAN connection status You can check the wireless-LAN connection status through the wireless-network-connection-status icon in the Windows notification area. The more bars encompassed, the better the signal is. For the Windows 7 operating system, you also can check the Access Connections gauge, the Access Connections status icon, or the Access Connections wireless status icon in the Windows notification area. Access Connections gauge:

Power to the wireless radio is off or no signal. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is poor. To improve signal strength, move your computer closer to the wireless access point. is marginal. is excellent. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection Access Connections status icon:

No location profile is active or none exists. Current location profile is disconnected. 28 User Guide Current location profile is connected. Access Connections wireless status icon Power to the wireless radio is off. Power to the wireless radio is on. No association. Power to the wireless radio is on. No signal. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is excellent. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is marginal. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is poor. To improve signal strength, move your computer closer to the wireless access point. Using Bluetooth Bluetooth can connect devices a short distance from one another, and is commonly used for connecting peripheral devices to a computer, transferring data between hand-held devices and a personal computer, or remotely controlling and communicating with devices such as mobile phones. Depending on the model, your computer might support the Bluetooth feature. To transfer data through the Bluetooth feature, do the following:

Note: If you use the wireless feature (the 802.11 standards) of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth option, the data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be degraded. 1. Ensure that the Bluetooth feature is enabled. For Windows 7: Press the wireless-radios control key For Windows 10: Do one of the following:

and turn on the Bluetooth feature. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth. Turn on the Bluetooth feature. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. Turn on the Bluetooth feature. 2. Right-click the data that you want to send. 3. Select Send To Bluetooth Devices. 4. Select a Bluetooth device, and then follow the instructions on the screen. For more information, refer to the Windows help information system and the Bluetooth help information system. Using an external display You can use an external display such as a projector or a monitor to give presentations or to expand your workspace. This topic introduces how to connect an external display, choose display modes, and change display settings. Your computer supports the following video resolution, provided that the external monitor also supports that resolution. Up to 1920 x 1200, with an external display connected to the VGA connector Up to 2560 x 1600, with an external display connected to the mini DisplayPort connector Chapter 2. Using your computer 29 For more information about the external display, refer to the manuals provided with it. Connecting an external display You can use either a wired display or a wireless display. The wired display can be connected to the HDMI, VGA, or mini DisplayPort connector by a cable. The wireless display can be added through the Wi-Di or Miracast function. Connecting a wired display Note: When you connect an external monitor, a video interface cable with a ferrite core is required. 1. Connect the external display to an appropriate video connector on your computer, such as the VGA connector, mini DisplayPort connector, or HDMI connector. 2. Connect the external display to an electrical outlet. 3. Turn on the external display. If your computer cannot detect the external display, right-click on the desktop, then click Screen resolution Detect. Connecting a wireless display Note: To use a wireless display, ensure that both your computer and the external display support the Wi-Di or Miracast feature. For Windows 7 Open the Start menu and click Devices and Printers Add a device For Windows 10 Do one of the following:

Open the Start menu, and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Devices Connected devices Add a device. Click the action center icon on the taskbar. Click Connect. Select the desired wireless display and follow the instructions on the screen. For more information, refer to the Windows help information system. Choosing a display mode You can display your desktop and apps on the computer display, the external display, or both. To choose how to display the video output, press the display-mode switching key mode you prefer. and then select a display There are four display modes:

Disconnect: Displays the video output only on your computer screen. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Disconnect, PC screen only, Computer only, or Disconnect projector. Duplicate: Displays the same video output on both your computer screen and an external display. Extend: Extends the video output from your computer display to an external display. You can drag and move items between the two displays. Projector only: Shows the video output only on an external display. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Projector only or Second screen only. 30 User Guide Note: If you show DOS or programs using DirectDraw or Direct3D in full-screen mode, only the main display shows the video output. Changing display settings You can change the display settings, such as the display resolution, font size, and so on. To change the display settings, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel and click Appearance and Personalization. 2. Click Display for further configuration. 3. Click Apply. The change will take effect after you log off. Using audio features Your computer is equipped with the following items:

Speakers Microphones Combo audio connector, 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) in diameter Your computer also has an audio chip that enables you to enjoy various multimedia audio features, such as the following:

Compliant with Intel High Definition Audio Playback of Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) and Moving Picture Experts Group Audio Layer-3

(MP3) files Recording and playback of pulse-code modulation (PCM) and Waveform Audio File Format (WAV) files Recording from various sound sources, such as a headset attached The following table shows the supported functions of the audio devices attached to the computer, the ThinkPad OneLink Dock, or ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock. Table 1. Audio feature list Connector Combo audio connector Combo audio connector of the supported ThinkPad OneLink Dock or ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock Headset with a 3.5mm, 4-pole plug Headphone and microphone functions supported Headphone and microphone functions supported Conventional headphone Conventional microphone Headphone function supported Headphone function supported Not supported Not supported Configuring for sound recording To configure the microphone for optimal sound recording, use the SmartAudio program. To start the program, go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound SmartAudio. Using the camera Depending on the model, your computer comes with a camera. Use the camera to take pictures or hold a video conference. Chapter 2. Using your computer 31 To start the camera and configure the camera settings, do the following:

For Windows 7: Start the Communications Utility program. See Accessing Lenovo programs on page 11. For Windows 10: Open the Start menu, and click Camera from the all apps list. When the camera is started, the green camera-in-use indicator turns on. You also can use the integrated camera with other programs that provide features such as photographing, video capturing, and video conferencing. To use the camera with other programs, open one of the programs and start the photographing, video capturing, or video conferencing function. Then, the camera starts automatically and the green camera-in-use indicator turns on. For more information about using the camera with a program, refer to the help information system of the program. Configuring camera settings You can configure the camera settings to meet your needs, such as adjusting the quality of the video output. To configure the camera settings, do the following:

For Windows 7: Start the Communications Utility program and configure the camera settings as desired. For Windows 10: Do one of the following:

Open the Camera app, click the settings icon in the upper-right corner. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the camera settings as desired. Click Lenovo Settings from the Start menu. Then click Camera. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the camera settings as desired. Using a flash media card Your computer has a media-card-reader slot. It supports the following cards:

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital eXtended-Capacity (SDXC) card Secure Digital (SD) card Secure Digital High-Capacity (SDHC) card Note: Your computer does not support the content protection for recordable media (CPRM) feature for the SD card. Attention: While transferring data to or from a flash media card, do not put your computer into sleep or hibernation mode before the data transfer is completed; otherwise, your data could get damaged. Installing a flash media card Attention: Before you start installing a card, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the card. To install a card, do the following:

1. Ensure that the card is correctly oriented. 2. Insert the card firmly into the 4-in-1 media card reader slot. If the plug-and-play feature is not enabled for the installed flash media card, do the following to enable the feature:

1. Open Control Panel. 32 User Guide 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 4. From the Action menu, select Add legacy hardware. The Add Hardware Wizard starts. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen. Removing a flash media card Attention:

Before removing a card, stop the card first. Otherwise, data on the card might get damaged or lost. Do not remove a card while the computer is in sleep mode or hibernation mode. Otherwise, the system might not respond when you try to resume operation. To remove a flash media card, do the following:

1. Click the triangular icon in the Windows notification area to show hidden icons. Then, right-click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon. 2. Select the item you want to remove to stop the card. 3. Press the card to eject it from your computer. 4. Remove the card and store it safely for future use. Note: If you do not remove the card from your computer after you eject the card from the Windows operating system, the card can no longer be accessed. To access the card, you must remove it first, then insert it again. Chapter 2. Using your computer 33 34 User Guide Chapter 3. Enhancing your computer This chapter provides instructions on how to use hardware devices to expand your computer capabilities. Finding ThinkPad options on page 35 ThinkPad OneLink Dock on page 35 ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock on page 36 Finding ThinkPad options If you want to expand the capabilities of your computer, Lenovo has a number of hardware accessories and upgrades to meet your needs. Options include memory modules, storage devices, network cards, port replicators, batteries, power adapters, printers, scanners, keyboards, mice, and more. You can shop at Lenovo 24 hours a day, 7 days a week directly over the World Wide Web. All you need is an Internet connection and a credit card. To shop at Lenovo, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/accessories/services/index.html ThinkPad OneLink Dock Depending on the model, your computer might support the ThinkPad OneLink Dock (hereafter referred to as the dock). Attach your computer to the dock to expand the working capability. This topic provides basic information about the dock. For detailed information about using the dock, refer to the documentation that comes with the dock. Note: Depending on the model, your dock might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic. Front view 1 Security-lock slot: To protect your dock from theft, you can purchase a security cable lock, such as a Kensington-style cable lock, that fits this security-lock slot to lock your dock to a desk, table, or other non-permanent fixture. Copyright Lenovo 2015 35 2 USB 3.0 connector: Used to connect devices that are compatible with USB 3.0 and USB 2.0. 3 Always on USB connector: By default, the Always on USB connector enables you to charge some mobile digital devices and smartphones no matter when your computer is in sleep mode, hibernation mode, or is off. For more information, refer to the documentation that comes with the dock. 4 Combo audio connector: Used to connect headphones or a headset that has a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch), 4-pole plug. 5 System-status indicator: The indicator on the illuminated ThinkPad logo functions the same as the ones on the computer. For details, see Status indicators on page 6. 6 Power button: The power button on the dock functions the same as the one on the computer. Rear view 1 USB 2.0 connector: Used to connect devices that are compatible with USB 2.0. 2 Ethernet connector: Used to connect the dock to an Ethernet LAN. The indicators on this connector have the same function as the ones on the computer. 3 HDMI connector: Used to connect a digital audio device or video monitor that is compatible with HDMI. 4 Power connector: Used to connect the ac power adapter. 5 Lenovo OneLink connector: Connect the Lenovo OneLink connector to the computer. ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock Depending on the model, your computer might support the ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock (hereafter referred to as the dock). Attach your computer to the dock to expand the working capability. This topic provides basic information about the dock. For detailed information about using the dock, refer to the documentation that comes with the dock. Note: Depending on the model, your dock might look slightly different from the illustrations in this topic. 36 User Guide Front view 1 Security-lock slot: To protect your dock from theft, you can purchase a security cable lock, such as a Kensington-style cable lock, that fits this security-lock slot to lock your dock to a desk, table, or other non-permanent fixture. 2 USB 3.0 connector: Used to connect devices that are compatible with USB 3.0 and USB 2.0. 3 Always on USB connector: By default, the Always on USB connector enables you to charge some mobile digital devices and smartphones no matter when your computer is in sleep mode, hibernation mode, or is off. For more information, refer to the documentation that comes with the dock. 4 Combo audio connector: Used to connect headphones or a headset that has a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch), 4-pole plug. 5 System-status indicator: The indicator on the illuminated ThinkPad logo functions the same as the ones on the computer. For details, see Status indicators on page 6. 6 Power button: The power button on the dock functions the same as the one on the computer. Rear view Chapter 3. Enhancing your computer 37 1 USB 2.0 connectors: Used to connect devices that are compatible with USB 2.0. 2 USB 3.0 connectors: Used to connect devices that are compatible with USB 3.0 and USB 2.0. 3 Ethernet connector: Used to connect the dock to an Ethernet LAN. The indicators on this connector have the same function as the ones on the computer. 4 DisplayPort connector: Used to attach a high-performance monitor, a direct-drive monitor, or other devices that use a DisplayPort connector. 5 Power connector: Used to connect the ac power adapter. 6 DVI connector: Used to connect a monitor that supports Digital Visual Interface (DVI) connection. 7 Lenovo OneLink connector: Connect the Lenovo OneLink connector to the computer. 38 User Guide Chapter 4. You and your computer This chapter provides information about accessibility, comfort, and travelling with your computer. Accessibility and comfort Good ergonomic practice is important to get the most from your personal computer and to avoid discomfort. Arrange your workplace and the equipment you use to suit your individual needs and the kind of work that you perform. In addition, use healthy work habits to maximize your performance and comfort while using your computer. The following topics provide information about arranging your work area, setting up your computer equipment, and establishing healthy work habits. Lenovo is committed to providing the latest information and technology to our customers with disabilities. Refer to the accessibility information that outlines our efforts in this area. See Accessibility information on page 40. Ergonomic information Working in the virtual office might mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. For example, adapting to the surrounding lighting sources, proper seating, and the placement of your computer hardware, can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort. The following example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even when not in such a setting, you can follow many of these tips. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well. General posture: Make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort caused by long periods of working in the same position. Frequent, short breaks from your work also help to prevent minor discomfort associated with your working posture. Display: Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510-760 mm (20-30 inches). Avoid glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light. Keep the display screen clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly. Head position: Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral (vertical, or upright) position. Chair: Use a chair that gives you good back support and seat height adjustment. Use chair adjustments to best suit your desired posture. Arm and hand position: Keep your forearms, wrists, and hands in a relaxed and neutral (horizontal) position. Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys. Copyright Lenovo 2015 39 Leg position: Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest. What if you are traveling?

It might not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, will help you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance. Questions about vision?

The visual display screens of ThinkPad notebook computers are designed to meet the highest standards and to provide you with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Of course, any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a vision-care specialist for advice. Comfort Observe the following guidelines to achieve greater comfort and improve performance. Active sitting and rest breaks: The longer you sit and work with your computer, the more important it is to observe your working posture. Follow Ergonomic information on page 39 and practice active sitting to avoid discomfort associated with your working postures. Making minor voluntary postural changes and taking short frequent work breaks are the key ingredients for healthy computing. Your computer is light and mobile; you can easily reposition your working surface to accommodate many posture modifications. Work area setup options: Familiarize yourself with all of your office furniture so that you know how to adjust your work surface, seat, and other work tools to accommodate your preferences for comfort. If your work area is not in an office setting, be sure to take special note of employing active sitting and taking work breaks. Many ThinkPad product solutions are available to help you modify and expand your computer to best suit your needs. You can find some of these options at http://www.lenovo.com/essentials. Explore your options for docking solutions and external products that provide the adjustability and features that you want. Accessibility information Lenovo is committed to providing users who have hearing, vision, and mobility limitations with greater access to information and technology. This section provides information about the ways to help these users get the most out of their computer experience. You also can get the most up-to-date accessibility information from the following Web site:

http://www.lenovo.com/accessibility Keyboard shortcuts The following table contains keyboard shortcuts that can help make your computer easier to use. Note: Depending on your keyboard, some of the following keyboard shortcuts might not be available. Keyboard shortcut Windows logo key + U Right Shift for eight seconds Shift five times Num Lock for five seconds Left Alt+Left Shift+Num Lock Function Open Ease of Access Center Turn on or turn off Filter Keys Turn on or turn off Sticky Keys Turn on or turn off Toggle Keys Turn on or turn off Mouse Keys Left Alt+Left Shift+PrtScn (or PrtSc) Turn on or turn off High Contrast 40 User Guide For more information, go to http://windows.microsoft.com/, and then type any of the following keywords for searching: keyboard shortcuts, key combinations, shortcut keys. Ease of Access Center Ease of Access Center on the Windows operating system enables users to configure their computers to suit their physical and cognitive needs. To use Ease of Access Center, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and ensure that you view Control Panel by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Ease of Access Center. 3. Use the tools by following the instructions on the screen. Ease of Access Center mainly includes the following tools:

Magnifier Magnifier is a useful utility that enlarges the entire screen or part of the screen so that you can see the items better. Narrator Narrator is a screen reader that reads what is displayed on the screen aloud and describes events like error messages. On-Screen Keyboard If you prefer to type or enter data into your computer without using a physical keyboard, you can use On-Screen Keyboard. On-Screen Keyboard displays a visual keyboard with all the standard keys. You can select keys using the mouse or another pointing device, or you can tap to select the keys if your computer supports multi-touch screen. High Contrast High Contrast is a feature that heightens the color contrast of some text and images on your screen. As a result, those items are more distinct and easier to identify. Personalized keyboard Adjust keyboard settings to make your keyboard easier to use. For example, you can use your keyboard to control the pointer and make the keyboard easier to type certain key combinations. Personalized mouse Adjust mouse settings to make your mouse easier to use. For example, you can change the pointer appearance and make your mouse easier to manage windows. Speech Recognition Speech Recognition enables you to control your computer by voice. Using only your voice, you can start programs, open menus, click objects on the screen, dictate text into documents, and write and send e-mails. Everything you do with the keyboard and mouse can be done with only your voice. To use Speech Recognition, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and ensure that you view Control Panel by Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Speech Recognition. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Chapter 4. You and your computer 41 Screen-reader technologies Screen-reader technologies are primarily focused on software program interfaces, help information systems, and various online documents. For additional information about screen readers, see the following:

Using PDFs with screen readers:

http://www.adobe.com/accessibility.html?promoid=DJGVE Using the JAWS screen reader:

http://www.freedomscientific.com/jaws-hq.asp Using the NVDA screen reader:

http://www.nvaccess.org/

Screen resolution You can make the text and images on your screen easier to read by adjusting the screen resolution of your computer. To adjust the screen resolution, do the following:

1. Right-click an empty area of the desktop and select Screen resolution. 2. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note: Setting a resolution too low might prevent some items from fitting on the screen. Customizable item size You can make the items on your screen easier to read by changing the item size. To change the item size temporarily, use the Magnifier tool in Ease of Access Center. See Ease of Access Center on page 41. To change the item size permanently, do the following:

Change the size of all the items on your screen. 1. Go to Control Panel, and ensure that you view Control Panel by Category. 2. Click Appearance and Personalization Display. 3. Change the item size by following the instructions on the screen. 4. Click Apply. This change will take effect the next time you log in to the operating system. Change the size of the items on a Web page. Press and hold Ctrl, and then press the plus-sign key (+) to enlarge or the minus-sign key (-) to reduce the text size. Change the size of the items on the desktop or a window. Note: This function might not work on some windows. If your mouse has a wheel, press and hold Ctrl, and then scroll the wheel to change the item size. Industry-standard connectors Your computer provides industry-standard connectors that enable you to connect assistive devices. For more information about the location and function of the connectors, see Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators on page 1. Documentation in accessible formats Lenovo provides electronic documentation in accessible formats, such as properly tagged PDF files or HyperText Markup Language (HTML) files. Lenovo electronic documentation is developed to ensure 42 User Guide that visually impaired users can read the documentation through a screen reader. Each image in the documentation also includes adequate alternative text so that visually impaired users can understand the image when they use a screen reader. Traveling with your computer This topic provides information to help you work with your computer when you are travelling. Travel tips Use the following travel tips to travel more confidently and efficiently with your computer. Although it is safe to allow your computer to go through the x-ray machines at airport security stations, it is important to keep your eyes on the computer at all times to prevent theft. Consider bringing an electrical adapter for use in an airplane or automobile. If you carry an ac power adapter, detach the ac cord from it to avoid damaging the cord. Travel tips on airplanes If you carry your computer into an airplane, take note of the following tips:

If you intend to use your computer or wireless services (such as Internet and Bluetooth), check with the airline for restrictions and availability of services before boarding the airplane. If there are restrictions on the use of computers with wireless features on the airplane, you must abide by those restrictions. If necessary, enable the Airplane mode before boarding. In the Airplane mode, all wireless features are disabled. To enable the Airplane mode, open the Start menu, and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode, and then slide the control for Airplane mode to the right. Be careful about the seat in front of you on airplanes. Angle your computer display so that it does not get caught when the person in front of you leans back. When taking off, remember to turn off your computer or put it into hibernation mode. Travel accessories The following is a checklist of items to consider packing when you are going to travel:

ThinkPad ac power adapter ThinkPad AC/DC Combo Adapter External mouse, if you are accustomed to using one Ethernet cable Extra battery, charged A quality carrying case that provides adequate cushion and protection External storage device If you are traveling to another country, you might also want to consider the following items:

An ac power adapter for the country to which you are travelling An adapter to connect to a phone line in that country (for models equipped with a modem) To purchase travel accessories, go to http://www.lenovo.com/essentials. Chapter 4. You and your computer 43 44 User Guide Chapter 5. Security This chapter provides information about how to protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. Attaching a mechanical lock on page 45 Using passwords on page 45 Hard disk security on page 50 Setting the security chip on page 50 Using the fingerprint reader on page 51 Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive on page 54 Using firewalls on page 54 Protecting data against viruses on page 54 Attaching a mechanical lock You can attach a mechanical lock to your computer, to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. Attach a mechanical lock to the keyhole of the computer; then secure the chain on the lock to a stationary object. Refer to the instructions shipped with the mechanical lock. Note: You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking device and security feature. Lenovo makes no comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance of the locking device and security feature. Using passwords You can help prevent your computer from unauthorized use by using passwords. Once you set a password, a prompt is displayed on the screen each time you turn on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. You cannot use the computer unless you type the correct password. If you have set a power-on password, a supervisor password, or a hard disk password, it unlocks automatically when the computer resumes from sleep mode. Note: If a Windows password has been set, you will be prompted to enter it. Typing passwords When this icon is displayed, type a power-on password or a supervisor password. When this icon is displayed, type a user hard disk password. To type a master hard disk password, press F1. When the icon changes to

, type the master hard disk password Note: To return to the icon

, press F1 again. Copyright Lenovo 2015 45 Power-on password You can set a power-on password to help protect your computer against unauthorized access. If you set a power-on password, the password prompt is displayed on the screen whenever you turn on the computer. You must enter the correct password to start using the computer. Setting, changing, or removing a power-on password Before you start, print these instructions. To set, change, or remove a power-on password, do the following:

1. Turn off your computer. Wait for about five seconds, and then turn on the computer again. 2. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to start the ThinkPad Setup program. 3. Select Security Password Power-on Password by using the directional keys. 4. Depending on your need, do one of the following:

To set a password, do the following:

a. b. In the Enter New Password field, type a desired password and press Enter. In the Confirm New Password field, retype the password and press Enter. To change a password, do the following:

a. b. In the Enter Current Password field, type the current power-on password and press Enter. In the Enter New Password field, type the new power-on password and press Enter; then retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and Press Enter. To remove a password, do the following:

In the Enter Current Password field, type the current power-on password and press Enter. a. b. Leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank. Press Enter twice. 5. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter to continue. 6. Press F10. A Setup Confirmation window is displayed. Select Yes to save the configuration changes and exit. Note: You might want to record your password and store it in a safe place. Otherwise, if you forget the password, you have to take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the password canceled. Supervisor password The supervisor password protects the system information stored in the ThinkPad Setup program. If you have set a supervisor password, no one can change the configuration of the computer without the password. It provides the following security features:

If only a supervisor password is set, a password prompt is displayed when you try to start the ThinkPad Setup program. Unauthorized users cannot access the ThinkPad Setup program without the password. The system administrator can use the supervisor password to access a computer even if the user of that computer has set a power-on password. The supervisor password overrides the power-on password. If both a supervisor password and a power-on password are set, you can do the following only if you have the supervisor password:

Changing or deleting the power-on password Changing or deleting the supervisor password Changing date and time 46 User Guide Specifying the minimum length for power-on password and hard disk password Erasing the fingerprint data Enabling or disabling the following features:

Wake on LAN and Flash over LAN Lock UEFI BIOS Settings Password at unattended boot Boot Device List F12 Option Boot Order Lock Flash BIOS Updating by End-Users Internal network device Internal wireless device Internal Bluetooth device Internal Network Option ROM Security mode Fingerprint reader priority Notes:

The system administrator can set the same supervisor password on many ThinkPad notebook computers to make administration easier. When Lock UEFI BIOS Settings option is enabled, all BIOS settings cannot be changed. To change the settings, a supervisor password is required. Setting, changing, or removing a supervisor password Before you start, print these instructions. Only a system administrator can set, change, or remove a supervisor password. To set, change, or remove a supervisor password, do the following:

1. Turn off your computer. Wait for about five seconds, and then turn on the computer again. 2. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to start the ThinkPad Setup program. 3. Select Security Password Supervisor Password by using the directional keys. 4. Depending on your needs, do one of the following:

To set a password, do the following:

a. b. In the Enter New Password field, type a desired password and press Enter. In the Confirm New Password field, retype the password and press Enter. To change a password, do the following:

a. b. In the Enter Current Password field, type the current supervisor password and press Enter. In the Enter New Password field, type the new supervisor password and press Enter; then retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. To remove a password, do the following:

In the Enter Current Password field, type the current supervisor password and press Enter. a. b. Leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank. Press Enter twice. 5. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter to continue. Chapter 5. Security 47 6. Press F10. A Setup Confirmation window is displayed. Select Yes to save the configuration changes and exit. Note: You might want to record your password and store it in a safe place. The next time you open the ThinkPad Setup program, you will be prompted to type your supervisor password to proceed. If you forget your supervisor password, Lenovo cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a Lenovo marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Hard disk passwords The following two types of hard disk passwords can help protect the information stored on the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive:

User hard disk password If a user hard disk password has been set, but no master hard disk password has been, the user must enter the user hard disk password to access files and applications on the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. Master hard disk password The master hard disk password also requires a user hard disk password. The master hard disk password is usually set and used by a system administrator. It enables the administrator to access any hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive in a system like a master key. The administrator sets the master password; then assigns a user password for each computer in the network. The user can then change the user password as desired, but the administrator still can get access by using the master password. When a master hard disk password is set, only the administrator can remove the user hard disk password. Setting a hard disk password Before you start, print these instructions. To set a hard disk password, do the following:

1. Turn off your computer. Wait for about five seconds, and then turn on the computer again. 2. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to start the ThinkPad Setup program. 3. Select Security Password Hard disk 1 Password by using the directional keys. 4. A password window is displayed. You are prompted to select User or User + Master. Select User if you want to set only one hard disk password. Select User + Master if you want to set a user hard disk password and a master hard disk password, for example if you are an administrator or a supervisor. If you select User, do the following:

a. When a window for typing the new password opens, type your new password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter. In the Confirm New Password field, retype the password you just entered and press Enter. b. If you select User + Master, do the following:

a. First, set a user hard disk password. When a message window prompts you to set the user hard disk password, press Enter to continue. Type your new user hard disk password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter. Retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. b. Then, set a master hard disk password. When a message window prompts you to set the master hard disk password. Press Enter to continue. Type your new master hard disk password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter. Retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. 5. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter to continue. 48 User Guide 6. Press F10. A Setup Confirmation window is displayed. Select Yes to save the configuration changes and exit. The next time you turn on your computer, type the user or master hard disk password to start your computer and access the operating system. Changing or removing a hard disk password To change or remove the hard disk password, do the following:

If you are in User + Master hard disk mode, you can select either User HDP or Master HDP to change the password, depending on your needs. If you select User HDP mode, follow the following steps to change the user hard disk password:

1. Type the current user hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field and press Enter. 2. Type the new password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter; then retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. 3. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter again to continue. The user hard disk password is changed. Note: The hard disk password cannot be removed in User HDP mode. If you select Master HDP mode, follow the following steps to change the master hard disk password:

1. Type the current master hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field and press Enter. 2. Type the new master hard disk password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter; then retype the new password you just entered in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. 3. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter to continue. The master hard disk password is changed. Note: If you leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank and press Enter twice, both the user and master hard disk passwords are removed. If you are in User hard disk mode, follow the following steps to change the user hard disk password:

1. Follow steps 1 through 7 in Setting a hard disk password on page 48, typing your password to get access to the ThinkPad Setup program. 2. Type the current user hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field and press Enter. 3. Type the new password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter; then retype the new password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. 4. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter again to continue. The user hard disk password is changed. Note: If you leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank and press Enter twice, the user hard disk password is removed. Tips on using the hard disk passwords You can set the minimum length of a hard disk password through the Security menu. If you set a hard disk password of over seven characters, the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive can be used only with a computer that can recognize a hard disk password of over seven characters. If you then install the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive in a computer that cannot recognize a hard disk password that contains more than seven characters, you cannot access the drive. Record your password and store it in a safe place. If you forget the user hard disk password, or both user and master hard disk passwords, Lenovo cannot reset your passwords or recover data from the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. You must take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Chapter 5. Security 49 Notes: The eDrive storage drives or Trusted Computing Group (TCG) Opal-compliant storage drives provide self-encryption capabilities to secure your data. If a TCG Opal-compliant storage drive and a TCG Opal management software program are installed, and the TCG Opal management software program is activated, the hard disk password is not available. If an eDrive storage drive is installed in your computer, and your computer is preinstalled with the Windows 10 operating system, the hard disk password is not available. Hard disk security To protect passwords from unauthorized security attacks, refer to the following tips to maximize security:

Set a power-on password as well as a hard disk password for your internal hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. Refer to the procedures in Power-on password on page 46 and Hard disk passwords on page 48. For security, a longer password is recommended. If a Disk Encryption storage drive is installed in your computer, be sure to protect the contents of your computer memory from unauthorized accesses by use of drive encryption software, such as Microsoft Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption. See Using Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption on page 50. Before you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer, delete the data stored on it. For more information, refer to Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive on page 54. The hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive built into your computer can be protected by UEFI BIOS. Using Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption To help protect your computer against unauthorized access, use the drive encryption software, such as Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption. Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption is an integral security feature of some editions of the Windows operating system. It can help you protect the operating system and data stored on your computer, even if your computer is lost or stolen. BitLocker works by encrypting all user and system files, including the swap and hibernation files. BitLocker uses a Trusted Platform Module to provide enhanced protection for your data and to ensure early boot component integrity. A compatible TPM is defined as a V1.2 TPM. To check the BitLocker status, go to Control Panel, and click System and Security BitLocker Drive Encryption. For more information about Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption, see the help information system of the Windows operating system, or search for Microsoft Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption Step-by-Step Guide on the Microsoft Web site. Disk Encryption hard disk drive, Disk Encryption hybrid drive, and Encryption solid-state drive Some models contain the Disk Encryption hard disk drive, Disk Encryption hybrid drive, or Encryption solid-state drive. This feature helps to protect your computer against security attacks on media, NAND flash, or device controllers by use of a hardware encryption chip. For the efficient use of the encryption feature, set a hard disk password for the internal storage device. Setting the security chip Strict security requirements are imposed on network client computers that transfer confidential information electronically. Depending on the options you ordered, your computer might have an embedded security chip, a cryptographic microprocessor. With the security chip and Client Security Solution, you can do the following:

50 User Guide Protect your data and system Strengthen access controls Secure communications Setting the security chip Before you start, print these instructions. To set an item on the Security Chip submenu, do the following:

1. Turn off your computer. Wait for about five seconds, and then turn on the computer again. 2. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to start the ThinkPad Setup program. 3. Select Security Security Chip by using the directional keys. 4. Press Enter. The Security Chip submenu opens. 5. Move to an item you want to set by using the directional keys. When the item is highlighted, press Enter. 6. Set other items that you want to set. 7. Press F10. A Setup Confirmation window is displayed. Select Yes to save the configuration changes and exit. To set the security chip in the Windows 7 operating system, you can start the Client Security Solution program, and follow the instructions on the screen. If Client Security Solution is not preinstalled on your computer, download and install it from http://www.lenovo.com/support. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Tips on using the security chip Ensure that the supervisor password has been set in ThinkPad Setup. Otherwise anyone can change the settings for the security chip. If you are using Client Security Solution, handle the security chip by doing the following:

Do not clear the security chip. If you do, the functions assigned to the keys will be erased. Do not disable the security chip. If you do, Client Security Solution will not work. If the security chip is removed or replaced, or a new one has been added, the computer will not start. You will hear four cycles of four beeps each, or you will see error message 0176 or 0192. If the security chip is inactive or disabled, the Clear Security Chip option will not be displayed. When you clear the security chip, turn off your computer and then turn it on again after you set the security chip to Active. Otherwise, the Clear Security Chip option is not displayed. Using the fingerprint reader Depending on the model, your computer might have a fingerprint reader. Fingerprint authentication can replace your Windows password. In this way, you can log in to your computer simply and securely. To enable fingerprint authentication, enroll your fingerprints first. Enrolling your fingerprint To enroll your fingerprints, do the following:

For Windows 7:

1. Start the Lenovo Fingerprint Manager program. For instructions on how to start the Lenovo Fingerprint Manager program, see Lenovo programs on page 11. 2. Enter the Windows password as required. Chapter 5. Security 51 3. Click the icon for the finger that you want to enroll, and constantly swipe your corresponding finger across the fingerprint reader until the enrollment completes. For more information, see Swiping your finger over the fingerprint reader on page 52. 4. Click Finish. Your fingerprint is enrolled successfully. For more information on how to use the fingerprint reader, refer to the help system of the Lenovo Fingerprint Manager program. For Windows 10:

1. Ensure that you have set a Windows password first. 2. Open the Start menu, and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Accounts Sign-in options. 3. Click Add under the Fingerprint section. Follow the instructions on the screen to swipe your finger across the fingerprint reader until the enrollment completes. 4. Click Finish. Your fingerprint is enrolled successfully. Note: It is recommended that you enroll more than one fingerprint in case of any injuries to your fingers. Swiping your finger over the fingerprint reader To swipe your finger over the reader, do the following:

1. Place the top joint of your finger on the sensor. 52 User Guide 2. Apply light pressure and swipe your finger toward you across the reader in one smooth motion. Do not lift your finger when you are swiping it. Maintaining the fingerprint reader The following actions could damage the fingerprint reader or cause it not to work properly:

Scratching the surface of the reader with a hard, pointed object. Scraping the surface of the reader with your fingernail or anything hard. Using or touching the reader with a dirty finger. If you notice any of the following conditions, gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth:

The surface of the reader is dirty or stained. The surface of the reader is wet. The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint. If your finger has any of the following conditions, you might not be able to register or authenticate it:

Your finger is wrinkled. Your finger is rough, dry, or injured. Your finger is stained with dirt, mud, or oil. The surface of your finger is different from when you enrolled your fingerprint. Your finger is wet. A finger is used that has not been enrolled. To improve the situation, try the following:

Clean or wipe your hands to remove any excess dirt or moisture from the fingers. Enroll and use a different finger for authentication. If your hands are dry, apply lotion to them. For more information on how to use the fingerprint reader, refer to the help system of the Lenovo Fingerprint Manager program. Chapter 5. Security 53 Notice on deleting data from your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive Some of the data stored on the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive might be sensitive. Handing your computer over to someone else without deleting the loaded software, such as operating systems and application software, might even violate license agreements. Be sure to delete data stored on the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive before you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer. You can use the following methods to delete data from the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive:

Move the data to the Recycle Bin, and then empty the Recycle Bin. Delete the data. Format your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, using the software for initializing it. Use the recovery program provided by Lenovo to bring the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive back to the factory default settings. These operations, however, only change the file location of the data; they do not delete the data itself. In other words, the data retrieval processing is disabled under an operating system such as Windows. The data is still there, even though it seems to be lost. Thus, it is sometimes possible to read the data by use of special software for data recovery. There is a risk that people of bad faith might read and misuse the critical data on hard disk drives, hybrid drives, or solid-state drives for unexpected purposes. To prevent leakage of data, it is important that you delete all the data from the hard disk drive or hybrid drive when you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer. You can destroy the data physically by smashing the hard disk drive or hybrid drive with a hammer, or magnetically by means of strong magnetic power, thus making the data unreadable. But it is recommended that you use the software (payware) or service (pay service) developed for that purpose. The process might take several hours. For disposing of data on the solid-state drive, Lenovo provides the Drive Erase Utility for Resetting the Cryptographic Key and Erasing the Solid State Drive tool. For disposing of data on the hard disk drive, Lenovo provides the Secure Data Disposal tool. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support to download these tools. If a Disk Encryption hard disk drive, a Disk Encryption hybrid drive, or an Encryption solid-state drive or is supported and installed in your computer, you can logically dispose of all the data on the drive in a short time by erasing the cryptographic key. The data encrypted with the old key is not physically erased but remains on the drive; however, it cannot be decrypted without the old key. This feature is also available with the Drive Erase Utility for Resetting the Cryptographic Key and Erasing the Solid State Drive tool. Using firewalls If your system is preinstalled with a firewall program, it protects against computer Internet security threats, unauthorized access, intrusions, and Internet attacks. It also protects your privacy. For more information about how to use the firewall program, refer to the help information system that comes with the program. Protecting data against viruses Your computer is preinstalled with an antivirus program so you can detect and eliminate viruses. The antivirus program is designed to help you detect and eliminate viruses. Lenovo provides a full version of antivirus software on your computer with a free 30-day subscription. After 30 days, you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus software updates. 54 User Guide For more information about how to use your antivirus software, refer to the help information system of your antivirus software. Chapter 5. Security 55 56 User Guide Chapter 6. Advanced configuration This chapter provides the following information to help you configure the computer:

Installing a new operating system on page 57 Installing device drivers on page 59 Using the ThinkPad Setup program on page 59 Installing a new operating system In some situations, you might need to install a new operating system. This topic provides instructions on how to install a new operating system. Installing the Windows 7 operating system Before you start, print these instructions. Attention: The process of installing a new operating system deletes all the data on your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, including the data that were stored in a hidden folder. To install the Windows 7 operating system, do the following:

1. Copy all the subdirectories and files in the C:\SWTOOLS directory to a removable storage device. The supplement files for the Windows 7 operating system are in the C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES directory. The device drivers are in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory. The preinstalled programs are in the C:\SWTOOLS\APPS directory. 2. Start the ThinkPad Setup program. See Using the ThinkPad Setup program on page 59. 3. Select Startup UEFI/Legacy Boot. Then do one of the following:

To install the Windows 7 (32-bit) operating system, select Legacy Only or Both. To install the Windows 7 (64-bit) operating system in Legacy mode, select Legacy Only. To install the Windows 7 (64-bit) operating system in UEFI mode, select UEFI Only. 4. Press the F10 key to exit the ThinkPad Setup program. 5. Insert the Windows 7 operating system installation DVD into the external optical drive, and restart the computer. 6. Restore the C:\SWTOOLS directory that you backed up before installing the Windows 7 operating system. 7. Install the device drivers. See Installing device drivers on page 59. 8. Install the Windows 7 fix modules. You can find the Windows 7 fix modules in the C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES\

directory. For more information, go to the Microsoft Knowledge Base home page at:

http://support.microsoft.com/

9. Install the registry patches, for example the Enabling Wake on LAN from Standby for ENERGY STAR patch. To download and install the registry patches, go to the Lenovo Support Web site at:

http://www.lenovo.com/support Note: After installing the operating system, do not change the initial UEFI/Legacy Boot setting in the ThinkPad Setup program. Otherwise the operating system will not start correctly. When you install the Windows 7 operating system, you might need one of the following country or region codes:

Copyright Lenovo 2015 57 Country or region Code China Denmark Finland France Germany Italy Japan SC DK FI FR GR IT JP Country or region Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden Taiwan and Hong Kong United States Code NL NO SP SV TC US Installing Windows 10 operating system Before you start, print these instructions. Attention:

The process of installing a new operating system deletes all the data on your internal storage drive, including the data that were stored in a hidden folder. If your computer is equipped with both a hard disk drive and an M.2 solid-state drive, do not use the M.2 solid-state drive as a bootable device. The M.2 solid-state drive is used for cache function and to support the Intel Rapid Start Technology. To install the Windows 10 operating system, do the following:

1. Start the ThinkPad Setup program. See Using the ThinkPad Setup program on page 59. 2. Select Startup Boot to display the Boot Priority Order submenu. 3. Select the drive that contains the operating system installation program, for example USB HDD. 4. Press the F10 key to exit the ThinkPad Setup program. 5. Connect the drive that contains the operating system installation program to the computer, and restart the computer. 6. Install the device drivers and necessary programs. See Installing device drivers on page 59. 7. After installing the device drivers, apply Windows Update to get the latest modules, for example the security patches. 8. Depending on your preference, install Lenovo programs. For information about Lenovo programs, see Lenovo programs on page 11. Note: After installing the operating system, do not change the initial UEFI/Legacy Boot setting in the ThinkPad Setup program. Otherwise, the operating system will not start correctly. When you install the Windows 10 operating system, you might need one of the following country or region codes:

Country or region Code SC DK FI FR GR China Denmark Finland France Germany 58 User Guide Country or region Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden Taiwan and Hong Kong Code NL NO SP SV TC Italy Japan IT JP United States US Installing device drivers Device driver is the program that operates a particular hardware device of the computer. If a device does not perform well or you install a new device, you need to install or update the corresponding device driver. For example, if you use the Windows 7 operating system, to use the USB 3.0 connector, you need to download and install the USB 3.0 driver. To download the latest device drivers, do the following:

1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers. 2. Select your product name to view all the device drivers for your computer. 3. Select the device drivers you that you need, and follow the instructions on the screen. Attention: Do not download the device drivers from the Windows Update Web. Always download the device drivers from:

http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers If you use the Windows 7 operating system, you also can find the device drivers in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory on your hard disk drive or solid-state drive. For more information, see Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device drivers on page 105. Using the ThinkPad Setup program The ThinkPad Setup program enables you to select various setup configurations for your computer through configuring the BIOS. To configure the BIOS of your computer, do the following:

1. Turn on the computer. When the ThinkPad logo is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup program starts. If you are required to enter the supervisor password, enter the correct password. You also can press Enter to skip the password prompt and start the ThinkPad Setup program. If you do not enter the password, you cannot change the configurations that are protected by the supervisor password. For more information, refer to Using passwords on page 45. 2. Use the cursor keys to select a tab; or use the cursor keys to locate an item and press Enter to select it. Then a submenu is displayed. Note: Some menu items are displayed only if the computer supports the corresponding features. 3. Set the value of an item by doing one of the following:

Press the F6 key to change to a higher value. Press the F5 key to change to a lower value. Note: Default values are in boldface. 4. To change other configurations, press the Esc key to exit the submenu and return to the parent menu. 5. When you complete the configuration, press the F10 key to save and exit. You also can select the Restart tab in the ThinkPad Setup menu, and restart your computer with one of the provided options. Note: You can press the F9 key to restore to the default settings. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 59 Main menu When you enter the ThinkPad Setup program, you will first see the Main menu as follows:

UEFI BIOS Version UEFI BIOS Date (Year-Month-Day) Embedded Controller Version ME Firmware Version (available on models with the Intel CPU) Machine Type Model System-unit serial number System board serial number Asset Tag CPU Type CPU Speed Installed memory UUID MAC address (Internal LAN) Preinstalled OS License UEFI Secure Boot OA3 ID OA2 Config menu To change the configuration of your computer, select the Config tab from the ThinkPad Setup menu. The following table lists the Config menu items. Default values are in boldface. The menu items might change without notice. Depending on the model, the default value might vary. Attention: The default configurations are already optimized for you. Improper change of the configurations might cause unexpected results. Table 2. Config menu items Menu item Network Submenu item Wake On LAN Selection Disabled AC Only AC and Battery Comments Enable the computer to power on when the Ethernet controller receives a magic packet (a special network message). If you select AC Only, Wake on LAN is enabled only when the ac power adapter is attached. If you select AC and Battery, Wake on LAN is enabled with any power sources. Notes:

60 User Guide Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Comments USB Ethernet LAN Option ROM

(for Legacy Only boot mode or Both with Legacy first) UEFI IPv4 Network Stack

(for UEFI Only boot mode or Both with UEFI first) UEFI IPv6 Network Stack

(for UEFI Only boot mode or Both with UEFI first) UEFI PXE Boot Priority

(for Both with UEFI first boot mode, and IPv6 and IPv4 stacks are both enabled.) USB UEFI BIOS Support Always On USB Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled IPv6 First IPv4 First Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Always On USB Charge in battery mode Disabled Enabled USB 3.0 Mode Disabled Enabled Auto The magic packet type Wake on LAN requires ac power. The Wake on LAN function does not work when a hard disk password is set. Loads the Ethernet LAN Option ROM to enable startup from an integrated network device. Enable or disable Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4) network stack for the UEFI environment. Enable or disable Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) network stack for UEFI environment. Select network stack priority for UEFI PXE boot. Enables or disables boot support for USB storage devices. If you select Disabled, the external USB devices cannot be charged through USB connectors. If you select Enabled, the Always On USB connector enables you to charge some mobile digital devices and smartphones when the computer is powered off or in hibernation mode on the condition that the ac power adapter is connected. Set the USB 3.0 controller mode for the ports shared between USB 2.0 and USB 3.0 controllers. If you select Auto, it enables you to connect and route appropriate USB 3.0 or USB 2.0 connectors. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 61 Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Comments If you select Enabled, it enables USB 3.0 mode and allows USB 3.0 to be supported in the operating system. If you select Disabled, it disables and hides the USB 3.0 controller, and USB 3.0 connectors will work as USB 2.0 connectors. Enable or disable the built-in TrackPoint pointing device. Note: If you want to use an external mouse, select Disabled. Enable or disable the built-in trackpad. Note: If you want to use an external mouse, select Disabled. Enable exchanges of Fn and Ctrl key action at the bottom-left of the keyboard. Disabled: Fn key and Ctrl key behavior is as printed on the keyboard. Enabled: Fn key works as Ctrl key. Ctrl key works as Fn key. Enable the F1-F12 function or the special function printed as an icon on each key as the primary function. Enabled: Executes the F1-F12 function. Disabled: Executes the special function. To temporarily switch the above two options, press Fn+Esc to enable FnLock. The FnLock indicator is on when FnLock is enabled. When the option is enabled, you can press the Fn key to keep it in a pressed Keyboard/Mouse TrackPoint Trackpad Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Fn and Ctrl Key swap Disabled Enabled F1F12 as primary function Disabled Enabled Fn Sticky key Disabled Enabled 62 User Guide Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Display Boot Display Device Total Graphics Memory ThinkPad LCD Analog (VGA) HDMI Display on Dock 256 MB 512 MB Boot Time Extension Disabled 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds Power Intel SpeedStep technology Disabled Enabled Mode for AC Maximum Performance Battery Optimized Mode for Battery Maximum Performance Battery Optimized Scheme for AC Maximize Performance Adaptive Thermal Management Comments condition; then press the desired function key. The action is equivalent to pressing the required key simultaneously with the Fn key. When you press the Fn key twice, the state is locked until you press the Fn key again. Select the display device that is to be activated at boot time. This selection is effective for boot time, password prompt, and ThinkPad Setup. Allocate total memory which Intel internal graphics device shares. Notes:

If you select 512 MB, the maximum usable memory may be reduced on the 32-bit operating system. This sub-menu is available on models with an Intel CPU. This option defines the amount of time to extend the boot process, in seconds. The system cannot detect some external monitors during boot because they need a few seconds to be ready. Try this option if the monitor being used does not display the boot screen. Select the mode of Intel SpeedStep technology at runtime. Maximum Performance: Always highest speed Battery Optimized:

Always lowest speed Note: This sub-menu is available on models with an Intel CPU. If you select Maximize Performance, it reduces Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 63 Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Balanced Scheme for Battery Maximize Performance Balanced CPU Power Management Disabled Enabled Intel (R) Rapid Start Technology Disable Built-in Battery Disabled Enabled Enter after:

Immediately 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour 2 hours 3 hours Yes No Intel(R) Hyper-Threading Technology Disabled Enabled Comments CPU throttling. If you select Balanced, it balances the fan sound, the computer temperature, and the computer performance. Note: This sub-menu is available on models with an Intel CPU. Enable or disable the power-saving feature that stops the microprocessor clock automatically when there are no computer activities. Normally, it is not necessary to change the setting. To use this feature, a special partition on the solid-state drive is required. When enabled, the computer enters a lower power state after the specified time in sleep state. And it takes only seconds to resume normal operation. Note: This sub-menu is available on models with an Intel CPU. Temporary disable battery for servicing the system. After selecting this item, the system will be automatically powered off, then ready to be serviced. Note: the battery will be automatically enabled when the AC adapter is reconected. f you select Enabled, additional microprocessor threads are enabled. These threads appear as additional processors but share some resources with the other threads within a microprocessor. If you select Disabled, only one thread within 64 User Guide Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Beep and Alarm Password Beep Keyboard Beep Intel NFF Intel NFF control Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Comments each execution core unit is enabled. Note: This sub-menu is available on models with an Intel CPU. Enable this option to have a beep sound when the system is waiting for a power-on, hard disk, or supervisor password. Different beeps will sound when the entered password matches or does not match the configured password. Enable this option to have a beep sound when unmanageable key combination is pressed. This option enables or disables the Intel Network Frame Forwarder (NFF) function. Date and Time menu To change the date or time of your computer, select the Date/Time tab from the ThinkPad Setup menu. Then do the following:

1. Use the cursor keys to select System Date or System Time. 2. Type a date or time. Security menu To change the security settings of your computer, select the Security tab from the ThinkPad Setup menu. The following table lists the Security menu items. Default values are in boldface. The menu items might change without notice. Depending on the model, the default value might vary. Attention: The default configurations are already optimized for you. Improper change of the configurations might cause unexpected results. Table 3. Security menu items Menu item Password Submenu item Supervisor Password Lock UEFI BIOS Settings Selection Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Comments Refer to Supervisor password on page 46. Enable or disable the function that protects items in ThinkPad Setup from being changed by a user who does not have the supervisor password. By default, this is set to Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 65 Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Password at Unattended Boot Disabled Enabled Password at Restart Disabled Enabled Password at Boot Device List Disabled Enabled Password Count Exceeded Error Disabled Enabled Set Minimum Length Disabled Password length options 66 User Guide Comments Disabled. If you set the supervisor password and enable this function, no one but you can change items in the ThinkPad Setup program. If you select and enable Password at unattended boot, a password prompt is displayed when the computer is turned on, from either a power-off state or hibernation state. If you select Disabled, no password prompt is displayed; the computer goes ahead and loads the operating system. To prevent unauthorized access, set the user authentication on the operating system. If you select and enable Password at restart, a password prompt is displayed when you restart the computer. If you select Disabled, no password prompt is displayed; the computer goes ahead and loads the operating system. To prevent unauthorized access, set the user authentication on the operating system. If the Security password is set, this option is used to specify whether the Security password must be entered to display the F12 boot device list. Select Enabled to prompt for the Security password. Select Disabled to proceed without any user action required. Select Enabled to show the POST 0199 error and prompt for the Security password. Select Disabled to hide the POST 0199 error and proceed without any user action required. Specify a minimum length for the power-on password and hard disk password. Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Power-On Password Hard Disk1 Password Security Chip Security Chip Selection Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Discrete TPM Intel PTT Security Chip Active Inactive Disabled Enabled Comments By default, this is set to Disabled. If you set the supervisor password and specify a minimum length for passwords, no one but you can change the length. Refer to Power-on password on page 46. Refer to Hard disk passwords on page 48. If you select Discrete TPM, you can use a discrete TPM chip with TPM 1.2 mode. If you select Intel PTT, you can use Intel Platform Trusted technology (PTT) with TPM 2.0 mode. If you change from Intel PTT to Discrete TPM, a message pops up that all encryption keys will be cleared in the security chip. If you want to continue, select Yes. If you change from Discrete TPM to Intel PTT, a message pops up that all encryption keys will be cleared in the security chip. Intel AMT and Intel TXT are disabled when the security chip is set to Intel PTT. If you want to continue, select Yes. Note: Intel PTT can be used with the Windows 8 or later operating system. If you select Active, the security chip is functional. If you select Inactive, the security chip is visible, but it is not functional. If you select Disabled, the security chip is hidden and it is not functional. Note: This item is displayed when Security Chip Selection is set to Discrete TPM. If you select Enabled, the security chip is functional. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 67 Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Disabled

(For Intel PTT) Security Reporting Options Comments If you select Disabled, the security chip is hidden and it is not functional. Note: This item is displayed when Security Chip Selection is set to Intel PTT. Enable or disable the following security reporting options:

BIOS ROM String Reporting: BIOS text string. SMBIOS Reporting:

SMBIOS data. CMOS Reporting and NVRAM Reporting are always enabled to enhance system security. Notes:

These items are displayed only if you have selected Active or Enabled for the Security Chip option. Clear Security Chip Enter Clear the encryption key. Intel TXT Feature

* Unselectable when Intel PTT is enabled. Disabled Enabled Physical Presence for Provisioning Disabled Enabled Note: This item is displayed only if you have selected Active or Enabled for the Security Chip option. Enable or disable Intel Trusted Execution Technology. Notes:

This item is displayed only if you have selected Active or Enabled for the Security Chip option. This item is set to Disabled when Intel PTT is enabled. This option enables or disables the confirmation message when you change the settings of the security chip. 68 User Guide Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Physical Presence for Clear Selection Disabled Enabled UEFI BIOS Update Option Flash BIOS Updating by End-Users Disabled Enabled Secure RollBack Prevention Disabled Enabled Memory Protection Execution Prevention Disabled Enabled Virtualization Intel Virtualization Technology Disabled Enabled Intel VT-d Feature Disabled Enabled Comments This option enables or disables the confirmation message when you clear the security chip. If you select Enabled, all users can update the UEFI BIOS. If you select Disabled, only the person who knows the supervisor password can update the UEFI BIOS. Disabled is the default value when OS Optimisezd is set toDisabled. Enabled is the default value when OS Optimisezd is set toEnabled. If you select Disabled, you can flash the older version UEFI BIOS. If the Some computer viruses and worms cause memory buffers to overflow by running code where only data is allowed. Data Execution Prevention feature can be used with your operating system, then by selecting Enabled you can protect your computer against attacks by such viruses and worms. If after choosing Enabled you find that a program does not run correctly, select Disabled and reset the setting. If you select Enabled, a Virtual Machine Monitor

(VMM) can utilize the additional hardware capabilities provided by Virtualization Technology. Note: This sub-menu is available on models with an Intel CPU. Intel VT-d is Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O. When enabled, a VMM can utilize the platform infrastructure for I/O virtualization. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 69 Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Comments AMD-V Technology Disabled Enabled I/O Port Access Ethernet LAN Wireless LAN Bluetooth USB Port Memory Card Slot Integrated Camera Microphone Fingerprint Reader Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Note: This sub-menu is available on models with an Intel CPU. If you select Disable, a VMM can utilize the additional hardware capabilities provided by AMD Virtualization technology. Note: This sub-menu is available on models with an AMD CPU. If you select Enabled, you can use the Ethernet LAN device. If you select Enabled, you can use wireless LAN devices. If you select Enabled, you can use Bluetooth devices. If you select Enabled, you can use USB connectors. If you select Enabled, you can use the memory card slots. If you select Enabled, you can use the integrated camera. If you select Enabled, you can use the microphones

(internal, external, or line-in). If you select Enabled, you can use the fingerprint reader. Note: This sub-menu is available on models with a fingerprint reader. 70 User Guide Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Anti-Theft Computrace Module Activation Selection Disabled Enabled Permanently Disabled Secure Boot Secure Boot Disabled Enabled Platform Mode Secure Boot Mode Reset to Setup Mode Setup Mode User Mode Standard Mode Custom Mode Yes No Restore Factory keys Yes No Comments Enable or disable the UEFI BIOS interface to activate the computrace module. Computrace is an optional monitoring service from Absolute Software. Note:

If you set the Computrace module activation to Permanently Disabled, you will be unable to enable this setting again. Disabled is the default value when OS Optimisezd is set toDisabled. Enabled is the default value when OS Optimisezd is set toEnabled. Enable or disable the UEFI Secure Boot feature. Select Enable to prevent unauthorized operating systems from running at boot time. Select Disabled to allow any operating systems to run at boot time. Note: To enable Secure Boot, you need to set the startup setting as UEFI Only and set CSM Support as No. Specify the system operating mode. Specify the system operating mode. This option is used to clear the current platform key and put the system into Setup Mode. You can install your own platform key and customize the Secure Boot signature databases in Setup Mode. Secure Boot mode will be set to Custom Mode. This option is used to restore all keys and certificates in Secure Boot databases to factory defaults. Any customized Secure Boot settings will be erased, and the Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 71 Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Clear All Secure Boot Keys Yes No Comments default platform key will be re-established along with the original signature databases including certificate for Windows 10 operating systems. This option is used to clear all keys and certificates in Secure Boot databases. You can install your own keys and certificates after selecting this option. Startup menu To change the startup settings of your computer, select the Startup tab from the ThinkPad Setup menu. Attention:

After you change the startup sequence, ensure that you select a correct device during a copy, a save, or a format operation. Otherwise your data might be erased or overwritten. If you are using the BitLocker drive encryption, do not change the startup sequence. BitLocker drive encryption locks the computer from starting once detects the change of startup sequence. To change the startup sequence temporarily so that the computer starts from a desired drive, do the following:

1. Turn off the computer. 2. Turn on the computer. When the ThinkPad logo is displayed, press the F12 key. 3. Select the device that you want the computer to start from. Note: The Boot menu will be displayed if the computer cannot start from any devices or the operating system cannot be found. The following table lists the Startup menu items. Default values are in boldface. The menu items might change without notice. Depending on the model, the default value might vary. Note: Some items are displayed on the menu only if the computer supports the corresponding features. Selection Comments Select the boot device when you press the power button to turn on the computer. Select the boot device when the computer wakes from LAN. If Wake On LAN is enabled, a network administrator can turn on all of the computers in a LAN remotely by use of network management software. Table 4. Startup menu items Menu item Boot Network Boot 72 User Guide Table 4. Startup menu items (continued) Menu item UEFI/Legacy Boot Selection Both UEFI Only Legacy Only UEFI/Legacy Boot Priority UEFI First Legacy First CSM Support (for UEFI Only) No Yes Boot Mode Quick Diagnostics Option Key Display Boot Device List F12 Option Boot Order Lock Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Comments Select system boot capability. Both: Select priority of boot options between UEFI and Legacy. UEFI Only: The computer will start from the UEFI-enabled operating system. Legacy Only: The computer will boot from any operating system other than the UEFI-enabled one. Note: If you select UEFI Only, the computer cannot start from the bootable devices that do not have the UEFI-enabled operating system. Compatibility Support Module (CSM) is required for starting the legacy operating system. If you select UEFI Only, CSM Support is selectable. For Both or Legacy Only mode, CSM Support is not selectable. Screen during the POST:

Quick: The ThinkPad Logo screen is displayed. Diagnostics: Test messages are displayed. Note: You can also enter Diagnostic mode by pressing Esc during POST. If you select Disabled, then the message To interrupt normal startup, press Enter is not displayed during the POST. If you select Enabled, the F12 key is recognized and the Boot Menu window is displayed. If you select Disabled, your computer will boot using the default priority. If you select Enabled, your computer will boot using the priority you have customized. Restart menu To exit the ThinkPad Setup program and restart the computer, select Restart from the ThinkPad Setup menu. The following submenu items are displayed:

Exit Saving Changes: Save the changes and restart the computer. Exit Discarding Changes: Discard the changes and restart the computer. Load Setup Defaults: Restore to the factory default settings. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 73 Note: Enable OS Optimized Defaults to meet the Windows 10 certification requirement. When you change this setting, some other settings are changed automatically, such as CSM Support, UEFI/Legacy Boot, Secure Boot, and Secure RollBack Prevention. Discard Changes: Discard the changes. Save Changes: Save the changes. Updating your system UEFI BIOS The UEFI BIOS is the first program that the computer runs when the computer is turned on. The UEFI BIOS initializes the hardware components, and loads the operating system and other programs. You can update the UEFI BIOS by starting your computer from a flash update optical disc or a flash update program running in the Windows environment. When you install a new program, a device driver, or hardware, you might be informed to update the UEFI BIOS. For instructions on how to update the UEFI BIOS, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers 74 User Guide Chapter 7. Preventing problems An important part of owning a ThinkPad notebook computer is maintenance. With proper care, you can avoid common problems. The chapter provides information that can help you keep your computer running smoothly. General tips for preventing problems on page 75 Making sure device drivers are current on page 76 Taking care of your computer on page 77 General tips for preventing problems Check the capacity of your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive from time to time. If the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive gets too full, the Windows operating system will slow down and might produce errors. To check the capacity of the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Start Computer. For Windows 10: Open the File Explorer and click This PC. Empty your recycle bin on a regular basis. Use disk defragment tool regularly on your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to improve data seek and read times. To free up disk space, uninstall unused application programs. Note: You also might want to look for program duplication or overlapping versions. Clean out your Inbox, Sent, and Trash folders from your e-mail client program. Back up your data at least once a week. If critical data is present, it is a good idea to perform a daily backup operation. Lenovo has many backup options available for your computer. Rewritable external optical drives are available for most machines and are easily installed. Schedule system restore operations to take a system snapshot periodically. For more information about system restore, see Chapter 9 Recovery overview on page 101. Update device drivers and the UEFI BIOS when needed. Profile your machine at http://www.lenovo.com/support to keep up to date with current drivers and revisions. Keep up to date for device drivers on other non-Lenovo hardware. You might want to read the device driver information release notes prior to updating for compatibility or known issues. Keep a log book. Entries might include major hardware or software changes, driver updates, minor issues you have experienced, and how you resolved the minor issues. If you ever need to run a recovery on your computer to return the preinstalled contents onto the machine, the following tips might help along the way:

Remove all external devices such as the printer, keyboard, and so on. Make sure that your battery is charged and your computer has the ac power connected. Access ThinkPad Setup and load the default settings. Restart the computer and start the recovery operation. If your computer uses discs as the recovery media, do not remove the disc from the drive until prompted to do so. Copyright Lenovo 2015 75 For suspected hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive issues, refer to Diagnosing problems on page 81 and run a diagnostic test for the drive before you call the Customer Support Center. If your computer does not start up, download the files to create a bootable self-test medium from http://www.lenovo.com/hddtest. Run the test and record any messages or error codes. If the test returns any failing error codes or messages, call the Customer Support Center with the codes or messages and the computer in front of you. A technician will assist you further. If required, you can find the contact information about the Customer Support Center for your country or region at http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone. When calling the Customer Support Center, make sure that you have your machine model type, serial number, and the computer in front of you. Also, if the computer is producing error codes, it is helpful to have the error screen on or the messages written down. Making sure device drivers are current Device drivers are programs that contain instructions for the operating system about how to operate or drive a certain piece of hardware. Each hardware component on your computer has its own specific driver. If you add a new component, the operating system needs to be instructed on how to operate that piece of hardware. After you install the driver, the operating system can recognize the hardware component and understand how to use it. Note: Because drivers are programs, like any other file on your computer, they are susceptible to corruption and might not perform correctly if corruption occurs. It is not always necessary to download the latest drivers. However, you should download the latest driver for a component if you notice poor performance from that component or if you added a new component. This might eliminate the driver as the potential cause of a problem. Getting the latest drivers from the Web site You can download and install updated device drivers from the Lenovo Web site by doing the following:

1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers. 2. Select the entry for your computer and then follow the instructions on the screen to download and install necessary software. Getting the latest drivers using System Update The System Update program helps you keep the software on your computer up-to-date. Update packages are stored on Lenovo servers and can be downloaded from the Lenovo Support Web site. Update packages can contain applications, device drivers, UEFI BIOS flashes, or software updates. When the System Update program connects to the Lenovo Support Web site, the System Update program automatically recognizes the machine type and model of your computer, the installed operating system, and the language of the operating system to determine what updates are available for your computer. The System Update program then displays a list of update packages and categorizes each update as critical, recommended, or optional to help you understand the importance. You have complete control of which updates to download and install. After you select the update packages you want, the System Update program automatically downloads and installs the updates without any further intervention from you. The System Update program is preinstalled on your computer and is ready to run. The only prerequisite is an active Internet connection. You can start the program manually, or you can use the schedule feature to enable the program to search for updates automatically at specified intervals. You also can predefine scheduled updates to search by severity (critical updates, critical and recommended updates, or all updates) so the list you choose from contains only those update types that are of interest to you. For more information about how to use the System Update program, refer to the help information system of the program. 76 User Guide Taking care of your computer Although your computer is designed to function reliably in normal work environments, you need to use common sense in handling it. By following the important tips in this topic, you will get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Be careful about where and how you work Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags. Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers

(more than 13 cm or 5 inches). Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F). Some appliances, such as certain portable desktop fans or air purifiers, can produce negative ions. If a computer is close to such an appliance, and is exposed for an extended time to air containing negative ions, it might become electrostatically charged. Such a charge might be discharged through your hands when you touch the keyboard or other parts of the computer, or through connectors on I/O devices connected to it. Even though this kind of electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the opposite of a discharge from your body or clothing to the computer, it poses the same risk of a computer malfunction. Your computer is designed and manufactured to minimize any effects of electrostatic charge. An electrostatic charge above a certain limit, however, can increase the risk of ESD. Therefore, when using the computer close to an appliance that can produce negative ions, give special attention to the following:

Avoid directly exposing your computer to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions. Keep your computer and peripherals as far as possible from such an appliance. Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge. Note: Not all such appliances cause a significant electrostatic charge. Be gentle with your computer Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest. Your computer display is designed to be opened and used at an angle slightly greater than 90 degrees. Do not open the display beyond 135 degrees, as this might damage the computer hinge. Do not turn your computer over while the ac power adapter is plugged in. This could break the adapter plug. Carry your computer properly Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect cords and cables. When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display. Handle storage media and drives properly When installing the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, follow the instructions shipped with your hardware, and apply pressure only where needed on the device. After you replace the primary hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, reattach the cover of the drive slot. When replacing the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive reattach the cover of the drive slot. Store your external and removable hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive in the appropriate containers or packaging when they are not being used. Chapter 7. Preventing problems 77 Before you install any of the following devices, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the device. Note: Not all listed devices are included in your computer. Memory module Mini-PCI card Memory card, such as an SD card, SDHC card, SDXC card, and a MultiMediaCard This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the device. When transferring data to or from a flash media card, such as an SD card, do not put your computer in sleep or hibernation mode before the data transfer is complete. To do so might cause damage to your data. Taking care when setting passwords Remember your passwords. If you forget a supervisor or hard disk password, Lenovo will not reset it, and you might have to replace your system board, hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. Taking care of the fingerprint reader The following actions could damage the fingerprint reader or cause it not to work properly:

Scratching the surface of the fingerprint reader with a hard, pointed object. Scraping the surface of the fingerprint reader with your fingernail or anything hard. Using or touching the fingerprint reader with a dirty finger. If you notice any of the following conditions, gently clean the surface of the fingerprint reader with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth:

The surface of the fingerprint reader is dirty or stained. The surface of the fingerprint reader is wet. The fingerprint reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint. Registering your computer Register your ThinkPad computer with Lenovo at http://www.lenovo.com/register. For more information, see Registering your computer on page 15. Be sure not to modify your computer Only an authorized ThinkPad repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer. Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed. Cleaning the cover of your computer Occasionally clean your computer by doing the following:

1. Prepare a mixture of a gentle kitchen-use detergent. The detergent must not contain abrasive powder or strong chemicals such as acid or alkaline. Use five parts water to one part detergent. 2. Absorb the diluted detergent into a sponge. 3. Squeeze excess liquid from the sponge. 4. Wipe the cover with the sponge, using a circular motion and taking care not to let any excess liquid drip. 5. Wipe the surface to remove the detergent. 6. Rinse the sponge with clean running water. 7. Wipe the cover with the clean sponge. 78 User Guide 8. Wipe the surface again with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth. 9. Wait for the surface to dry completely and remove any fibers from the cloth. Cleaning your computer keyboard To clean the computer keyboard, do the following:

1. Apply some isopropyl rubbing alcohol to a soft, dust-free cloth. Note: Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. 2. Wipe each keytop surface with the cloth. Wipe the keys one by one; if you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth might hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Make sure that no liquid drips onto or between the keys. 3. Allow to dry. 4. To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or cool air from a hair dryer. Cleaning your computer display To clean the computer display, do the following:

1. Gently wipe the display with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. If you see a scratchlike mark on your display, it might be a stain transferred from the keyboard or the TrackPoint pointing stick when the cover was pressed from the outside. 2. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. 3. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or a 50-50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water that does not contain impurities. Note: Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. 4. Wring out as much of the liquid as you can. 5. Wipe the display again; do not let any liquid drip into the computer. 6. Be sure to dry the display before closing it. Chapter 7. Preventing problems 79 80 User Guide Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems This chapter provides information on what to do if you experience a problem with your computer. Diagnosing problems on page 81 Troubleshooting on page 81 Diagnosing problems If you experience problems with your computer, use the Lenovo Solution Center program as a starting point for solving them. The Lenovo Solution Center program enables you to troubleshoot and resolve computer problems. It combines diagnostic tests, system information collection, security status, and support information, along with hints and tips for optimal system performance. Notes:

The Lenovo Solution Center program also is available for downloaded at:

http://www.lenovo.com/diags If you are using a Windows operating system other than Windows 7 or Windows 10, you can find the latest information about diagnostics for your computer at:

http://www.lenovo.com/diagnose When you are setting up your computer, the Lenovo Solution Center program prompts you to create recovery media. You can use the recovery media to restore the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to the factory default state. For more information, see Creating and using a recovery media on page 101. To run the Lenovo Solution Center program, see Accessing Lenovo programs on page 11. For additional information, refer to the Lenovo Solution Center help system. Note: If you are unable to isolate and repair the problem yourself after running Lenovo Solution Center program, save and print the log files created by the program. You will need the log files when you speak to a Lenovo technical support representative. Troubleshooting If your computer has an error, it typically displays a message or an error code, or makes a beep when you turn it on. When you experience a problem, refer to the corresponding sections in this topic to try to solve the problem by yourself. Computer stops responding Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later. If your computer is completely unresponsive (you cannot use the ThinkPad pointing device or the keyboard), do the following:

1. Press and hold the power button either your computer or the connected ThinkPad OneLink Dock or ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock (hereinafter called the dock) until the computer turns off. After the computer is turned off, restart by pressing the power button. If the computer does not turn on, continue with step 2. Copyright Lenovo 2015 81 Note: Do not remove the battery connector and the ac power adapter or the battery connector and the dock to reset the computer. 2. While the computer is turned off, remove all power sources from the computer (battery connector and the ac power adapter or battery connector and the dock). Hold down the power button for 10 seconds. Plug in the ac power adapter or the dock while keeping the battery out of the computer. If the computer does not turn back on, continue with step 3. Note: Once the computer starts up and enters the Windows environment, use the proper shutdown procedure to turn the computer off. Once the computer is off, reattach the battery and restart the computer. If the computer does not start with the battery reattached, remove the battery and again start with step 2. If the computer starts with ac power but does not start when the battery is attached, call the Customer Support Center for support. 3. While the computer is off, remove all sources of power (battery and the ac power adapter). Remove all external devices that are attached to your computer (keyboard, mouse, printer, scanner, and so on). Repeat step 2. If step 2 is unsuccessful, continue with step 4. Note: The following steps involve removing static sensitive components from your computer. Make sure that you are properly grounded and remove all sources of power attached to the computer. If you are uncomfortable or unsure about removing components, call the Customer Support Center for assistance. 4. While the computer is off, remove all sources of power and external hardware. Remove any non-original memory module added to your computer. After removing the extra memory module and reinstalling the original memory module, repeat step 2. If the computer still does not turn on, consult the user manual for other customer-replaceable components that are attached to your computer. If the computer still does not start up, call the Customer Support Center and a Customer Support Specialist will assist you. Spills on the keyboard With a mobile computer, there are increased chances of spilling liquids on the keyboard. Because most liquids conduct electricity, liquid spilled on the keyboard could create numerous short circuits, potentially causing irreparable damage to your computer. If you spill something on your computer:

Attention: Be sure that no liquid creates a short circuit between you and the ac power adapter (if in use). Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately, leaving the computer on might make your computer unusable. 1. Carefully unplug the ac power adapter immediately. 2. Turn off the computer immediately. If the computer does not turn off, remove the battery. The more quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you will reduce damage from short circuits. 3. Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer. Note: If you want to replace your keyboard, you can purchase a new one. Error messages Message: 0177: Bad SVP data, stop POST task. Solution: Checksum of the supervisor password in the EEPROM is not correct. The system board should be replaced. Have the computer serviced. Message: 0183: Bad CRC of Security Settings in EFI Variable. Enter ThinkPad Setup. 82 User Guide Solution: Checksum of the Security settings in the EFI Variable is not correct. Enter ThinkPad Setup to check security settings, Press F10 and then press Enter to restart the system. If you still have a problem, have the computer serviced. Message: 0187: EAIA data access error. Solution: The access to EEPROM is failed. Have the computer serviced. Message: 0188: Invalid RFID Serialization Information Area. Solution: The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block # 0 and 1). The system board should be replaced, and the box serial number needs to be reinstalled. Have the computer serviced. Message: 0189: Invalid RFID configuration information area. Solution: The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block # 4 and 5). The system board should be replaced, and the UUID needs to be reinstalled. Have the computer serviced. Message: 0190: Critical low-battery error. Solution: The computer turns off, because the battery is low. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and charge the battery, or replace the battery with a fully charged one. Message: 0191: System Security - Invalid remote change requested. Solution: The system configuration change has failed. Confirm the operation and try again. To clear the error, enter the ThinkPad Setup program. Message: 0199: System Security - Security password retry count exceeded. Solution: This message is displayed if you enter a wrong supervisor password more than three times. Confirm the supervisor password and try again. To clear the error, enter the ThinkPad Setup program. Message: 0251: System CMOS checksum bad. Solution: The system CMOS might have been corrupted by a program. The computer uses the default settings. Run ThinkPad Setup to reconfigure the settings. If you still see the same error code, have the computer serviced. Message: 0253: EFI Variable Block Data was destroyed. Solution: The system EFI Variable Block Data might have been corrupted. The computer uses the default settings. Run ThinkPad Setup to reconfigure the settings. If you still see the same error code, have the computer serviced. Message: 0271: Real time clock error. Solution: Have the computer serviced. Message: 1802: Unauthorized network card is plugged in. Solution: The network card is not supported on this computer. Remove it. Message: 1820: More than one external fingerprint readers are attached. Solution: Power off and remove all but the reader that you set up within your main operating system. Message: 2100: Detection error on HDD0 (Main HDD). Solution: The hard disk drive or hybrid drive is not working. Have the hard disk drive or hybrid drive serviced. Message: 2101: Detection error on HDD1 (Ultrabay HDD)). Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 83 Solution: The hard disk drive or hybrid drive is not working. Have the hard disk drive or hybrid drive serviced. Message: 2102: Detection error on HDD2 (Mini SATA). Solution: The Mini SATA device is not working. Have the Mini SATA device serviced. Message: 2110: Read error on HDD0 (Main HDD). Solution: The hard disk drive or hybrid drive is not working. Have the hard disk drive or hybrid drive serviced. Message: 2111: Read error on HDD1 (Ultrabay HDD) Solution: The hard disk drive or hybrid drive is not working. Have the hard disk drive or hybrid drive serviced. Message: 2112: Read error on HDD2 (Mini SATA) Solution: The Mini SATA device is not working. Have the Mini SATA device serviced. Message: 2200: Machine Type and Serial Number are invalid. Solution: Machine Type and Serial Number are invalid. Have the computer serviced. Message: 2201: Machine UUID is invalid. Solution: Machine UUID is invalid. Have the computer serviced. Message: Fan error Solution: Cooling fan has failed. Shut down the computer immediately and have the computer serviced. Message: Thermal sensing error Solution: The thermal sensor is not functioning correctly. Shut down the computer immediately and have the computer serviced. Message: This system does not support batteries that are not genuine Lenovo-made or authorized. The system will continue to boot, but may not charge unauthorized batteries. Press the ESC key to continue. Attention: Lenovo has no responsibility for the performance or safety of unauthorized batteries, and provides no warranties for failures or damage arising out of their use. Solution: Replace the battery with the correct Lenovo battery for this computer. If you still see the same error message, contact Lenovo service to have the computer serviced. Message: The battery installed is not supported by this system and will not charge. Please replace the battery with the correct Lenovo battery for this system. Press the ESC key to continue. Solution: Replace the battery with the correct Lenovo battery for this computer. If you still see the same error message, contact Lenovo service to have the computer serviced. Errors without messages Problem: My screen keeps blanking when I do not want it to. Solution: If your computer is preinstalled with the Windows 7 operating system, you can disable any system timers, such as the LCD turn-off timer or the blank timer by doing the following:

1. Start Power Manager. 2. Click the Power plan tab, and then select Maximum Performance from the predefined power plans. 84 User Guide Problem: When I turn on the computer, nothing is displayed on the screen and the computer does not beep while starting up. Note: If you are not sure whether you heard any beeps, turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for four seconds or more. Then turn on the computer and listen again. Solution: Make sure that:

The battery is installed correctly. The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet. The computer is turned on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.) The brightness level of the screen is appropriately set. If a power-on password is set, press any key to display the prompt for the power-on password and then type the correct password and press Enter. If these items are correctly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Problem: When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor is displayed on a blank screen. Solution: If you have modified a partition on your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive by using partition software, information about that partition, or the master boot record might have been destroyed. 1. Turn off the computer, and then turn it on again. 2. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, do the following:

If you have used the partition software, examine the partition on the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive by using the software, and recover the partition if required. Use the recovery solutions to restore the system to the factory default state. If the problem persists, have the computer serviced. Problem: My screen goes blank while the computer is on. Solution: Your screen saver or power management might have been enabled. Do either of the following:

Touch the TrackPoint pointing device or the ThinkPad trackpad, or press a key to exit the screen saver. Press the power button to resume the computer from sleep or hibernation mode. Beep errors Table 5. Beep errors Problem One short beep, pause, three short beeps, pause, three more short beeps, and one short beep Three short beeps, pause, one short beep, pause, one more short beep, and three short beeps One long and two short beeps Five short beeps Solution Make sure that memory modules are installed correctly. If they are, and you still hear the beeps, have the computer serviced. PCI resource allocation failure. Power off the computer and remove the device from the ExpressCard Slot. If the beeps persist, have the computer serviced. The video function has a problem. Have the computer serviced. The system board has a problem. Have the computer serviced. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 85 Memory module problems Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later. If your memory module is not operating properly, check the following items:

1. Verify that the memory module is installed and seated correctly in your computer. It might be necessary to remove all added memory modules to test the computer with only the factory-installed memory modules, and then reinstall the memory module one at a time to ensure a proper connection. 2. Check for error messages during startup. Follow the appropriate corrective actions for power-on self-test (POST) error messages. 3. Verify that the latest UEFI BIOS for your model has been installed. 4. Verify the proper memory configuration and compatibility including the maximum memory size and the memory speed. 5. Run diagnostic programs. See Diagnosing problems on page 81. Networking problems The following are the most common networking problems:

Ethernet problems Problem: Your computer cannot connect to the network. Solution: Make sure that:

The cable is installed correctly. The network cable must be securely connected both to the Ethernet connector of your computer and to the RJ45 connector of the hub. The maximum allowable distance from the computer to hub is 100 meters. If the cable is connected and the distance is within acceptable limits but the problem persists, try a different cable. You are using the correct device driver. To install the correct driver, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 2. If the exclamation mark ! is displayed next to the adapter name under Network adapters, you might not be using the correct driver or the driver might have been disabled. To update the driver, right-click the highlighted adapter. 3. Click Update Driver Software, and then follow the instructions on the screen. The switch port and the adapter have the same duplex setting. If you configured the adapter for full duplex, make sure that the switch port also is configured for full duplex. Setting wrong duplex mode can degrade performance, cause data loss, or result in lost connections. You have installed all networking software that is necessary for your network environment. Check with your LAN administrator for the necessary networking software. Problem: The adapter stops working for no apparent reason. Solution: The network driver files might be corrupt or missing. Update the driver by referring to the above solution for the procedure to make sure that the correct device driver is installed. Problem: If your computer is a Gigabit Ethernet model and you use a speed of 1000 Mbps, the connection fails or errors occur. 86 User Guide Solution:

Use Category 5 wiring and make sure that the network cable is securely connected. Connect to a 1000 BASE-T hub/switch (not 1000 BASE-X). Problem: The Wake on LAN feature is not working. Solution:

Make sure that Wake on LAN is enabled in ThinkPad Setup. If it is, check with your LAN administrator for the necessary settings. Problem: If your computer is a Gigabit Ethernet model, it cannot connect to the network at 1000 Mbps. Instead, it connects at 100 Mbps. Solution:

Try another cable. Make sure that the link partner is set to auto-negotiate. Make sure that the switch is 802.3ab-compliant (gigabit over copper). A wireless LAN problem Problem: I cannot connect to the network using the built-in wireless network card. Solution: Make sure that:

The Airplane mode is off. Your wireless LAN driver is the latest version. Your computer is within range of a wireless access point. The wireless radio is enabled. Note: If you are using the Windows 7 operating system, click Show hidden icons on the Windows notification area. The Access Connections icon is displayed. For more information about the icon, refer to the Access Connections help information system. For the Windows 7 operating system, check the Network Name (SSID) and your encryption information. Use the Access Connections program to verify this case-sensitive information. Bluetooth problems Note: Check your connection anytime and make sure that no other Bluetooth-enabled device is searching for the device to which you want to connect. Simultaneous searching is not allowed in the Bluetooth connection. Problem: Sound does not come from the Bluetooth headset/headphone but comes from the local speaker even though the Bluetooth headset/headphone is connected using a Headset profile or AV profile. Solution: Do the following:

1. Exit the application that uses the sound device (for example, Windows Media Player). 2. Go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Sound Playback. 3. If you are using a Headset profile, select Bluetooth Hands-free Audio and click the Set Default button. If you are using an AV profile, select Stereo Audio and click the Set Default button. 4. Click OK to close the Sound window. Problem: PIM items sent from the Windows 7 operating systems cannot be received correctly into the address book of any other Bluetooth-enabled device. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 87 Solution: The Windows 7 operating system sends PIM items in XML format, but most Bluetooth-enabled devices handle PIM items in vCard format. If another Bluetooth-enabled device can receive a file through Bluetooth, a PIM item sent from the Windows 7 might be saved as a file with the extension .contact. Problems with the keyboard and other pointing devices The following are the most common problems with keyboards and other pointing devices. ThinkPad pointing device problems Problem: The pointer drifts when the computer is turned on or after it resumes normal operation. Solution: The pointer might drift when you are not using the TrackPoint pointing device during normal operation. This is a normal characteristic of the TrackPoint pointing device and is not a defect. Pointer drifting might occur for several seconds under the following conditions:

When the computer is turned on When the computer resumes normal operation When the TrackPoint pointing device is kept pressed for a long time When the temperature changes Problem: The TrackPoint pointing device or ThinkPad trackpad does not work. Solution: Make sure that the TrackPoint pointing device or ThinkPad trackpad is enabled in the ThinkPad pointing device setting window. Note: To open the ThinkPad pointing device window, go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Mouse, and then click the ThinkPad tab. Keyboard problems Problem: All or some keys on the keyboard do not work. Solution: If an external numeric keypad is connected:

1. Turn off the computer. 2. Remove the external numeric keypad. 3. Turn on the computer and try using the keyboard again. If the keyboard problem is resolved, carefully reconnect the external numeric keypad and the external keyboard. Make sure that you have seated the connectors correctly. If the problem persists, make sure that the correct device driver is installed by doing the following:

1. Open Control Panel. Change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Keyboard. 3. Select the Hardware tab. In the Device Properties pane, make sure that you see this message:

Device Status: This device is working properly. If keys on the keyboard still do not work, have the computer serviced. Problem: A number is displayed when you type a letter. Solution: The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press Fn+NumLock. Problem: All or some keys on the external numeric keypad do not work. Solution: Make sure that the external numeric keypad is correctly connected to the computer. 88 User Guide Problems with the display and multimedia devices This topic includes the most common problems with displays and multimedia devices, including the computer display, the external monitor, and audio devices. Computer screen problems Problem: My screen keeps blanking when I do not want it to. Solution: If your computer is preinstalled with the Windows 7 operating system, you can disable any system timers, such as the LCD turn-off timer or the blank timer by doing the following:

1. Start Power Manager. 2. Click the Power plan tab, and then select Maximum Performance from the predefined power plans. If your computer is preinstalled with the Windows 10 operating system, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and ensure that you view Control Panel by Category. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Power Options High performance. 3. Show the additional plans, then choose High performance. Problem: When I turn on the computer, nothing is displayed on the screen and the computer does not beep while starting up. Note: If you are not sure whether you heard any beeps, turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for four seconds or more. Then turn on the computer and listen again. Solution: Make sure that:

The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet. The computer is turned on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.) The brightness level of the screen is appropriately set. If a power-on password is set, press any key to display the prompt for the power-on password and then type the correct password and press Enter. If these items are correctly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Problem: When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor is displayed on a blank screen. Solution: If you have modified a partition on your storage drive by using partition software, information about that partition, or the master boot record might have been destroyed. Do the following to try to solve the problem:

1. Turn off the computer, and then turn it on again. 2. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, do the following:

If you have used partition software, examine the partition on the storage drive by using the software, and recover the partition if required. Use the recovery solutions to restore the system to the factory default state. If the problem persists, have the computer serviced. Problem: My screen goes blank while the computer is on. Solution: Your screen saver or power management might have been enabled. Do one of the following:

Touch the TrackPoint pointing device or the touch pad, or press a key to exit the screen saver. Press the power button to resume the computer from sleep or hibernation mode. Problem: The screen is blank. Solution: Do the following:

Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 89 Press the brightness-up key If you are using the ac power adapter, or using the battery and the battery gauge shows that the battery to bring up the image. is not depleted, press the brightness-up key to make the screen brighter. If your computer is in sleep mode, press Fn to resume from the sleep mode. If the problem persists, follow the solution for the following problem. Problem: The screen is unreadable or distorted. Solution: Make sure that:

The display device driver is installed correctly. The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set. The monitor type is correct. To check these settings, do the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to your computer, and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet. 2. Turn on the external monitor. 3. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 4. Select the external monitor and set Resolution. 5. Click Advanced Settings. 6. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information to make sure that the monitor type is correct. If the monitor type is correct, click OK to close the window; otherwise proceed with the following steps. 1. If more than two monitor types are displayed, select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non-PnP Monitor. 2. Click Properties. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 3. Click the Driver tab. 4. Click Update Driver. 5. Click Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer. 6. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box. 7. Select the correct manufacturer and model for the external monitor. If you cannot find your monitor on the list, stop the installation of this driver and use the driver shipped with your monitor. 8. After updating the driver, click Close. 9. For the Windows 7 operating system, to change the color settings, right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Click Advanced Settings, select the Monitor tab, then set Colors. 10. Click OK. Problem: Incorrect characters are displayed on the screen. Solution: Did you install the operating system or program correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Problem: The screen stays on even after you turn off your computer. Solution: Press and hold the power button for four seconds or more to turn off your computer; then turn it on again. 90 User Guide Problem: Missing, discolored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time you turn on your computer. Solution: This is an intrinsic characteristic of the TFT technology. Your computer display contains multiple thin-film transistors (TFTs). A small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots on the screen might exist all the time. External monitor problems Problem: The external monitor is blank. Solution: To bring up the image, press the display mode-switching key monitor. If the problem persists, do the following:

: and select the desired 1. Connect the external monitor to another computer to make sure that it works. 2. Reconnect the external monitor to your computer. 3. Refer to the manual shipped with the external monitor to check the resolutions and refresh rates that are supported. If the external monitor supports the same resolution as the computer display or a higher resolution, view output on the external monitor or on both the external monitor and the computer display. If the external monitor supports a lower resolution than the computer display, view output on the external monitor only. (If you view output on both the computer display and the external monitor, the external monitor screen will be blank or distorted.) Problem: You cannot set a higher resolution than the present one on your external monitor. Solution: Make sure that the monitor information is correct. Do the following:

1. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 2. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor). 3. Click Advanced Settings. 4. Click the Adapter tab. 5. Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window. Note: The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer. 6. Click OK. If the information is incorrect, reinstall the device driver. Check the monitor type and, if necessary, update the driver by doing the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet. 2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer. 3. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 4. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor). 5. Click Advanced Settings. 6. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is correct. If it is, click OK to close the window; otherwise do the following. 7. If more than one monitor type is displayed, select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non-PnP Monitor. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 91 8. Click Properties. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 9. Click the Driver tab. 10. Click Update Driver. 11. Click Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer. 12. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box. 13. Select your monitor manufacturer and model. 14. After updating the driver, click Close. 15. Set Resolution. Note: To change the color settings, select the Monitor tab, then set Colors. 16. Click OK. Problem: The screen is unreadable or distorted. Solution: Make sure that:

The monitor information is correct and the appropriate monitor type is selected. Refer to the solution to the above problem. Make sure that an appropriate refresh rate is selected by doing the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet. 2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer. 3. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 4. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor). 5. Click Advanced Settings. 6. Click the Monitor tab. 7. Select the correct screen refresh rate. Problem: Wrong characters are displayed on the screen. Solution: Did you follow the correct procedure when installing the operating system or program? If you did, have the external monitor serviced. Problem: The Extend desktop function does not work. Solution: Enable the Extend desktop function by doing the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet. 2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer. 3. Right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. 4. Click the Monitor-2 icon. 5. Select Extend these displays for multiple displays. 6. Click the Monitor-1 icon (for the primary display, the computer display). 7. Set the resolution for the primary display. 8. Click the Monitor-2 icon (for the external monitor). 92 User Guide 9. Set the screen resolution for the secondary display. 10. Set the relative position of each monitor by dragging its icon. You can set the monitors in any relative position, but the icons must touch each other. 11. Click OK to apply the changes. Note: To change the color settings, right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Click Advanced Settings, select the Monitor tab, then set Colors. Problem: If you use the Extend desktop function, you cannot set a higher resolution or higher refresh rate on the secondary display. Solution: Change the resolution and the color depth to lower settings for the primary display. Refer to the solution to the above problem. Problem: Display switching does not work. Solution: If you use the Extend desktop function, disable it, and change the display output location. If a DVD movie or a video clip is playing, stop the playback, close the program, and then change the display output location. Problem: The screen position on the external monitor is incorrect when that monitor is set for a high resolution. Solution: Sometimes, when you use a high resolution such as 1600x1200, the image is shifted to left or right on the screen. To correct this, first make sure that your external monitor supports the display mode

(the resolution and the refresh rate) that you have set. If it does not, set a display mode that the monitor supports. If it does support the display mode you have set, go to the setup menu for the monitor itself and adjust the settings there. Usually the external monitor has buttons for access to the setup menu. For details, see the documentation that comes with the monitor. Audio problems Problem: Wave or MIDI sound does not play correctly. Solution: Make sure that the built-in audio device is configured correctly. 1. Open Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 4. Double-click Sound, video and game controllers. 5. Make sure that the following device is enabled and configured correctly:

Conexant CX20672 SmartAudio HD Problem: Recordings made using the microphone input are not loud enough. Solution: Make sure that the Microphone Boost function is turned on and set by doing the following:

1. Open Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. Click the Recording tab in the Sound window. 5. Select Microphone, and click the Properties button. 6. Click the Levels tab, and move the Microphone Boost slider upwards. 7. Click OK. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 93 Note: For details about controlling volume, refer to your Windows online help. Problem: A volume or balance slider cannot be moved. Solution: The slider might be grayed out. This means that its position is fixed by the hardware and cannot be changed. Problem: The volume sliders do not stay in place when some audio programs are used. Solution: It is normal for the sliders to change position when certain sound applications are used. The applications are aware of the settings in the Volume Mixer window and are allowed to change the settings themselves. An example is the Windows Media Player. Usually the program has sliders available to control the sound from within the program. Problem: The balance slider cannot completely mute one channel. Solution: The control is designed to compensate for minor differences in balance and does not completely mute either channel. Problem: There is no volume control for MIDI sound in the Volume Mixer window. Solution: Use the hardware volume control. This is because the built-in synthesizer software does not support the control. Problem: The sound cannot be turned off even if you set the Master volume control at minimum. Solution: You still can hear some sound even though you have set the Master volume control at minimum. To turn off the sound completely, go to the Master volume control and select Mute speakers. Problem: When you connect a headphone to your computer while playing sound, a speaker does not produce sound. Solution: Once the headphone is attached, the streaming is automatically redirected to it. If you want to listen to sound from the speakers again, be sure to set those speakers as the default device. The procedure is as follows:

1. Open Control Panel. 2. Click All Control Panel Items. 3. Click the SmartAudio icon. The SmartAudio window opens. 4. Look at the playback devices. If you have attached a headphone, the headphone will be automatically set as the default device, and the icon for that headphone will be checked. 5. To set a different device as the default, double-click the icon for those speakers. That icon will now have a check mark. 6. Play any sound by use of a music program such as Windows Media Player. Make sure that sound comes from the speakers. For details, refer to the help information system for SmartAudio. Fingerprint reader problems Problem: The surface of the reader is dirty, stained, or wet. Solution: Gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth. Problem: The reader often fails to enroll or authenticate your fingerprint. Solution: If the surface of the reader is dirty, stained, or wet, gently clean the surface of the reader with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth. For tips on how to maintain the fingerprint reader, refer to Maintaining the fingerprint reader. 94 User Guide Battery and power problems This topic contains instructions on troubleshooting battery and power problems. Battery problems Problem: The battery cannot be fully charged in the standard charge time when the computer is powered off. Solution: The battery might be over-discharged. Do the following:

1. Turn off the computer. 2. Make sure that the over-discharged battery is in the computer. 3. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and let it charge. If a quick charger is available, use it to charge the over-discharged battery. If the battery cannot be fully charged in 24 hours, use a new battery. Problem: Your computer shuts down before the battery status icon in the Windows notification area shows empty, or your computer operates after the battery status icon in the Windows notification area shows empty. Solution: Discharge and recharge the battery. Problem: The operating time for a fully charged battery is short. Solution: Discharge and recharge the battery. If your battery operating time is still short, use a new battery. Problem: The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. Solution: The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. Problem: The battery cannot be charged. Solution: You cannot charge the battery when it is too hot. If the battery feels hot, remove it from the computer and allow it to cool to room temperature. After it cools, reinstall it and recharge the battery. If it still cannot be charged, have it serviced. An ac power adapter problem Problem: The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the working electrical outlet, but the power adapter (power plug) icon is not displayed in the Windows notification area. Solution: Do the following:

1. Make sure that the connection of the ac power adapter is correct. For instructions on connecting the ac power adapter, see Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide that comes with your computer. 2. If the connection of the ac power adapter is correct, turn off the computer, then disconnect the ac power adapter and remove the main battery. 3. Reinstall the battery and reconnect the ac power adapter, then turn on the computer. 4. If the power adapter icon still is not displayed in the Windows notification area and the system-status indicator does not blink three times when an ac power source is connected, have the ac power adapter and your computer serviced. Note: If you are using the Windows 7 operating system, to display the power adapter (power plug) icon, click Show hidden icons in the Windows notification area. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 95 Power problems Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later. If your computer is getting no power at all, check the following items:

1. Verify the power button. The power button is lit whenever the computer is on. 2. Check all power connections. Remove any power strips and surge protectors to connect the ac power adapter directly to the ac power outlet. 3. Inspect the ac power adapter. Check for any physical damage, and make sure that the power cable is firmly attached to the adapter brick and the computer. 4. Verify the ac power source is working by attaching another device to the outlet. 5. Remove all devices and then test for system power with minimal devices attached. a. Disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. b. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. c. Remove the bottom cover and disconnect the battery cable. Refer to Replacing the internal storage drive on page 112. d. Remove the memory module. Refer to Replacing the memory module on page 116. e. Remove the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. Refer to Replacing the internal storage drive on page 112. f. Wait for 30 seconds, and then reinstall the memory module and the known good battery or the ac power adapter to test the computer with minimal devices attached first. g. Reinstall each device one at a time that you have removed in the earlier steps. If your computer does not run on battery power, disconnect and reconnect the battery cable. Refer to Replacing the internal storage drive on page 112 A power button problem Problem: The system does not respond, and you cannot turn off the computer. Solution: Turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the system is still not reset, remove the ac power adapter and the battery. Boot problems Print these instructions now and keep them with your computer for reference later. If you receive an error message before the operating system loads, follow the appropriate corrective actions for POST error messages. If you receive an error message while the operating system is loading the desktop configuration after the POST is completed, check the following items:

1. Go to the Lenovo Support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support and search for the error message. 2. Go to the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http://support.microsoft.com/ and search for the error message. Sleep and hibernation problems Problem: The computer enters sleep mode unexpectedly. Solution: If the microprocessor overheats, the computer automatically enters sleep mode to allow the computer to cool and to protect the microprocessor and other internal components. Check the settings for sleep mode. 96 User Guide Problem: The computer enters sleep mode (the system-status indicator blinks slowly immediately after the power-on self-test. Solution: Make sure that:

The battery is charged. The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. Refer to Operating environment on page 11. If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. Problem: A critical low-battery error occurs, and the computer immediately turns off. Solution: The battery power is getting low. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and plug it into an electrical outlet, or replace the battery with a charged one. Problem: The computer display remains blank after you press Fn to return from sleep mode. Solution: Check whether an external monitor was disconnected or turned off while the computer was in sleep mode. If you disconnected or turned off the external monitor, connect it or turn it on before resuming the computer from the sleep mode. When resuming the computer from the sleep mode without attaching the external monitor or turning it on, and the computer display remains blank, press the brightness-up key to bring up the computer display. Problem: The computer does not return from sleep mode, or the system-status indicator blinks slowly and the computer does not work. Solution: If the system does not return from sleep mode, it might have entered sleep or hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the system-status indicator. If the system-status indicator blinks slowly, your computer is in sleep mode. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer; then press Fn. If the system-status indicator is off, your computer is in power-off state or hibernation mode. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer; then press the power button to resume operation. If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system might stop responding and you might not be able to turn off the computer. In this case, you need to reset the computer. If you have not saved your data, it might be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the system is still not reset, remove the ac power adapter and the battery. Problem: Your computer does not enter sleep or hibernation mode. Solution: Check whether any option has been selected to disable your computer from entering sleep or hibernation mode. If your computer tries to enter sleep mode but the request is rejected, the device attached to the USB connector might have been disabled. If this occurs, do a hot-unplug-and-plug operation for the USB device. Problem: The battery discharges slightly while the computer is in hibernation mode. Solution: If the wakeup function is enabled, the computer consumes a small amount of power. This is not a defect. For details, refer to Power-saving modes on page 25. Problems with drives and other storage devices This section includes hard disk drive problems, hybrid drive problems, solid-state drive problems. Hard disk drive and hybrid drive problems Problem: The hard disk drive or hybrid drive makes a rattling noise intermittently. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 97 Solution: The rattling noise might be heard:

When the hard disk drive or hybrid drive begins or finishes getting access to data. When you carry the hard disk drive or hybrid drive. When you carry your computer. This is a normal characteristic of a hard disk drive or hybrid drive and is not a defect. Problem: The hard disk drive or hybrid drive does not work. Solution: On the Boot menu of ThinkPad Setup, make sure that the hard disk drive or hybrid drive is on the Boot priority order list. If it is on the Excluded from boot order list, it is disabled. Select the entry for it on the list and press the Shift+1 key. This moves the entry to the Boot priority order list. Problem: After setting a hard disk password on the hard disk drive or hybrid drive of the computer, you moved the drive to another computer. Now you cannot unlock the hard disk password. Solution: Your computer supports an enhanced password algorithm. Computers older than yours might not support such a security function. A solid-state drive problem Problem: When you compress files or folders by use of the data compression function in Windows, and then decompress them, the process of writing to or reading from the files or folders is slow. Solution: Apply the disk defragmentation tool in Windows for faster access to the data. A software problem Problem: An application does not run correctly. Solution: Make sure that the problem is not being caused by the application. Check that your computer has the minimum required memory to run the application. Refer to the manuals supplied with the application. Check the following:

The application is designed to operate with your operating system. Other applications run correctly on your computer. The necessary device drivers are installed. The application works when it is run on some other computer. If an error message is displayed while you are using the application, refer to the manuals supplied with the application. If the application still does not run correctly, contact your place of purchase or a service representative for help. Problems with ports and connectors The following are the most common problems with ports and connectors. A USB problem Problem: A device connected to the USB connector does not work. 98 User Guide Solution: Open the Device Manager window. Make sure that the USB device setup is correct, and that the assignment of computer resource and the installation of the device driver are correct. To open the Device Manager window, go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. A dock problem Problem: The computer does not start when you try to turn it on, and does not respond when you try to resume operation. Solution: Make sure that:

The ThinkPad OneLink Dock or ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock is connected to power. The computer is correctly connected to the ThinkPad OneLink Dock or ThinkPad OneLink Pro Dock. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 99 100 User Guide Chapter 9. Recovery overview This chapter provides information about the recovery solutions provided by Lenovo. Recovery overview for the Windows 7 operating system on page 101 Recovery overview for the Windows 10 operating system on page 106 Recovery overview for the Windows 7 operating system This section provides information about the recovery solutions provided by Lenovo on the Windows 7 operating system. Notes:

There are a variety of methods to choose from when considering how to recover in the event of a software-

or hardware-related problem. Some methods vary depending on the type of your operating system. The product on the recovery media might be used only for the following purposes:

Restore the product preinstalled on your computer Reinstall the product Modify the product using the Additional Files To prevent potential performance risks or unexpected behavior that might be caused by the new hard disk drive technology, it is recommended that you use one of the following software programs for backup:

Rescue and Recovery version 4.52 or later Acronis True Image 2010 or later Paragon Backup & Recovery 10 Suit or later, Paragon Backup & Recovery 10 Home or later Creating and using a recovery media You can use recovery media to restore the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to the factory default settings. Recovery media are useful if you transfer the computer to another area, sell the computer, recycle the computer, or put the computer in an operational state after all other methods of recovery have failed. As a precautionary measure, it is important to create recovery media as early as possible. Note: The recovery operations you can perform using recovery media vary depending on the operating system from which the recovery media were created. The recovery media might contain a boot medium and a data medium. Your Microsoft Windows license permits you to create only one data medium, so it is important that you store the recovery media in a safe place after you have made them. Creating recovery media This section provides instructions on how to create recovery media. Note: You can create recovery media using discs or external USB storage devices. To create recovery media, click Start All Programs Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools Factory Recovery Disks. Then, follow the instructions on the screen. Using recovery media This section provides instructions on how to use recovery media on different operating systems. Copyright Lenovo 2015 101 You can use recovery media to restore the computer to the factory default settings only. You can use recovery media to put the computer in an operational state after all other methods of recovery have failed. Attention: When you use recovery media to restore the computer to the factory default settings, all the files currently on the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive will be deleted and replaced by the factory default settings. To use recovery media, do the following:

1. Depending on the type of your recovery media, connect the boot medium (memory key or other USB storage device) to the computer, or insert the boot disc into the external optical drive. 2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Boot Menu window opens, release the F12 key. 3. Select the desired startup device and press Enter. The restore process begins. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the operation. Notes:

1. After restoring your computer to the factory default settings, you might have to reinstall device drivers for some devices. See Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device drivers on page 105. 2. Some computers come with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works preinstalled. If you need to recover or reinstall your Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works programs, you must use the Microsoft Office CD or Microsoft Works CD. These discs are provided only with computers preinstalled with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works. Performing backup and recovery operations The Rescue and Recovery program enables you to back up all your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive contents including the operating system, data files, software programs, and personal settings. You can designate where the Rescue and Recovery program stores the backup:

In a protected area of your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive On the secondary hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive if a secondary hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive is installed in your computer On an attached external USB hard disk drive or solid-state drive On a network drive On recordable discs (a recordable external optical drive is required for this option) After you have backed up the contents on the hard disk drive, you can restore the complete contents of the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive restore only the selected files, or restore only the Windows operating system and applications. Performing a backup operation This section provides instructions on how to perform a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery program. 1. From the Windows desktop, click Start All Programs Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens. 2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow. 3. Click Back up your hard drive and select backup operation options. Then, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the backup operation. 102 User Guide Performing a recovery operation This section provides instructions on how to perform a recovery operation using the Rescue and Recovery program. 1. From the Windows desktop, click Start All Programs Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens. 2. In the Rescue and Recovery program main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow. 3. Click the Restore your system from a backup icon. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the recovery operation. For more information about performing a recovery operation from the Rescue and Recovery workspace, see Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace on page 103. Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace The Rescue and Recovery workspace resides in a protected, hidden area of your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive that operates independently from the Windows operating system. This enables you to perform recovery operations even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. You can perform the following recovery operations from the Rescue and Recovery workspace:

Rescue files from your hard disk drive or from a backup The Rescue and Recovery workspace enables you to locate files on your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive and transfer them to a network drive or other recordable media, such as a USB device or a disc. This solution is available even if you did not back up your files or if changes were made to the files since your last backup operation. You also can rescue individual files from a Rescue and Recovery backup located on your local hard disk drive, a USB device, or a network drive. Restore your hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup If you have backed up your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive using the Rescue and Recovery program, you can restore the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup, even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. Restore your hard disk drive to the factory default settings The Rescue and Recovery workspace enables you to restore the complete contents of your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to the factory default settings. If you have multiple partitions on your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive you have the option to restore the factory default settings to the C: partition and leave the other partitions intact. Because the Rescue and Recovery workspace operates independently from the Windows operating system, you can restore the factory default settings even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. Attention: If you restore the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup or restore the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to the factory default settings, all files on the primary hard disk drive partition (usually drive C:) will be deleted in the recovery process. If possible, make copies of important files. If you are unable to start the Windows operating system, you can use the rescue files feature of the Rescue and Recovery workspace to copy files from your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to other media. To start the Rescue and Recovery workspace, do the following:

1. Make sure that the computer is turned off. 2. Repeatedly press and release the F11 key when turning on the computer. When you hear beeps or see a logo screen, release the F11 key. 3. If you have set a Rescue and Recovery password, type your password when prompted. The Rescue and Recovery workspace opens after a short delay. Chapter 9. Recovery overview 103 Note: If the Rescue and Recovery workspace fails to open, see Solving recovery problems on page 106. 4. Do one of the following:

To rescue files from your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive or from a backup, click Rescue files and follow the instructions on the screen. To restore your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup or to restore your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to the factory default settings, click Restore your system and follow the instructions on the screen. For more information about the features of the Rescue and Recovery workspace, click Help. Notes:

1. After restoring your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to the factory default settings, you might have to reinstall device drivers for some devices. See Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device drivers on page 105. 2. Some computers come with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works preinstalled. If you need to recover or reinstall your Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works programs, you must use the Microsoft Office CD or Microsoft Works CD. These discs are provided only with computers preinstalled with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works. Creating and using a rescue medium With a rescue medium, such as a disc or a USB hard disk drive, you can recover the computer from failures that prevent you from gaining access to the Rescue and Recovery workspace on your hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. Notes:

1. The recovery operations you can perform using a rescue medium vary depending on the operating system. 2. The rescue disc can be started in all types of optical drives. Creating a rescue medium This section provides instructions on how to create a rescue medium. 1. From the Windows desktop, click Start All Programs Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens. 2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow. 3. Click the Create Rescue Media icon. The Create Rescue and Recovery Media window opens. 4. In the Rescue Media area, select the type of the rescue medium you want to create. You can create a rescue medium using a disc, a USB hard disk drive, or a secondary internal hard disk drive. 5. Click OK and follow the instructions on the screen to create a rescue medium. Using a rescue medium This section provides instructions on how to use the rescue medium you have created. If you have created a rescue medium using a disc, use the following instructions to use the rescue medium:

1. Turn off your computer. 2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Boot Menu window opens, release the F12 key. 3. In the Boot Menu window, select the desired external optical drive as the first boot device. Then, insert the rescue disc into the external optical drive and press Enter. The rescue medium starts. 104 User Guide If you have created a rescue medium using a USB hard disk drive, use the following instructions to use the rescue medium:

1. Attach the USB hard disk drive to one of the USB connectors on your computer. 2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Boot Menu window opens, release the F12 key. 3. In the Boot Menu window, select the USB hard disk drive as the first boot device and press Enter. The rescue medium starts. When the rescue medium starts, the Rescue and Recovery workspace opens. The help information for each feature is available from the Rescue and Recovery workspace. Follow the instructions to complete the recovery process. Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device drivers Your computer has provisions that enable you to reinstall selected factory-installed programs and device drivers. Reinstalling preinstalled programs To reinstall some preinstalled application programs, do the following:

1. Turn on your computer. 2. Go to the C:\SWTOOLS directory. 3. Open the APPS folder. The folder contains several subfolders named for the various preinstalled applications. 4. Open the subfolder for the application you want to reinstall. 5. Double-click Setup, and then follow the on-screen steps to reinstall the application. Reinstalling preinstalled device drivers Attention: When you reinstall device drivers, you are changing the current configuration of your computer. Reinstall device drivers only when it is necessary to correct a problem with your computer. To reinstall a device driver for a factory-installed device, do the following:

1. Turn on your computer. 2. Go to the C:\SWTOOLS directory. 3. Open the DRIVERS folder. The folder contains several subfolders named for the various devices installed in your computer (for example, AUDIO and VIDEO). 4. Open the subfolder for the device. 5. Reinstall the device driver by one of the following methods:

In the subfolder for the device, look for a text file (a file with the extension .txt). The text file contains information on how to reinstall that device driver. If the subfolder for the device contains a file of setup information (a file with the extension .inf), you can use the Add New Hardware program (in the Windows Control Panel) to reinstall the device driver. Not all device drivers can be reinstalled by use of this program. In the Add New Hardware program, when prompted for the device driver you want to install, click Have Disk and Browse. Then select the device driver file from the device subfolder. In the subfolder for the device, look for the executable file (a file with the extension .exe). Double-click the file, and follow the instructions on the screen. Chapter 9. Recovery overview 105 Attention: If you need updated device drivers for your computer, do not download them from the Windows Update Web site. Obtain them from Lenovo. For more information, see Making sure device drivers are current on page 76. Solving recovery problems If you are unable to access the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the Windows environment, do one of the following:

Use a rescue medium to start the Rescue and Recovery workspace. See Creating and using a rescue medium on page 104. Use recovery media if all other methods of recovery have failed and you need to restore the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive to the factory default settings. See Creating and using a recovery media on page 101. Note: If you are unable to access the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the Windows environment from a rescue medium or recovery media, you might not have the rescue device (an internal hard disk drive, a disc, a USB hard disk drive, or other external devices) set as the first boot device in the startup device sequence. You must first make sure that your rescue device is set as the first boot device in the startup device sequence in the ThinkPad Setup program. For detailed information on how to temporarily or permanently change the startup device sequence, see Startup menu on page 72. It is important to create a rescue medium and a set of recovery media as early as possible and store them in a safe place for future use. Recovery overview for the Windows 10 operating system The Windows recovery programs enable you to reset your computer or use advanced startup options. It is recommended that you create a recovery USB drive as early as possible. Store the recovery USB drive as a backup or replacement for the Windows recovery programs. For more information, see Creating and using a recovery USB drive on page 107. Resetting your computer If your computer does not perform well, you might consider resetting your computer. In the resetting process, you can choose to keep your files or remove them, and then reinstall the Windows operating system. To reset your computer, do the following:

Note: The graphical user interface (GUI) items of the operating system might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Reset this PC section, click Get started. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen to reset your computer. Using advanced startup options With advanced startup options, you can change the firmware settings of the computer, change the startup settings of the Windows operating system, start the computer from an external device, or restore the Windows operating system from a system image. To use advanced startup options, do the following:

106 User Guide Note: The GUI items of the operating system might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Advanced startup section, click Restart now Troubleshoot Advanced options. 3. Select a desired startup option, then follow the instructions on the screen. Recovering your operating system if Windows 10 fails to start The Windows recovery environment on your computer is capable of operating independently from the Windows 10 operating system. This enables you to recover or repair the operating system even if the Windows 10 operating system fails to start. After two consecutive failed boot attempts, the Windows recovery environment starts automatically. Then you can choose repair and recovery options by following the instructions on the screen. Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the recovery process. Creating and using a recovery USB drive You can create a recovery USB drive as a backup for the Windows recovery programs. With the recovery USB drive, you can troubleshoot and fix the problems even if the preinstalled Windows recovery programs are damaged. Creating a recovery USB drive The USB drive that you use to create the recovery USB drive must be at least 16 GB of storage. The actual USB capacity that is required depends on the size of the recovery image. Attention: The creation process deletes anything stored on the USB drive. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. To create a recovery USB drive, do the following:

Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the following process. 1. Connect a proper USB drive (at least 16 GB of storage). 2. Type recovery in the search box on the taskbar. Then click Create a recovery drive. 3. Click Yes in the User Account Control window to allow the Recovery Media Creator program to start. 4. In the Recovery Drive window, follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery USB drive. Using the recovery USB drive If you cannot start your computer, refer to the corresponding information in the topic Troubleshooting on page 81 to try to solve the problem by yourself. If you still cannot start your computer, use the recovery USB drive to recover your computer. To use a recovery USB drive, do the following:

Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 1. Connect the recovery USB drive to the computer. 2. Turn on or restart the computer. Before the Windows operating system starts, repeatedly press the F12 key. The Boot Menu window opens. 3. Select the recovery USB drive as the boot device. 4. Select a preferred keyboard layout. Chapter 9. Recovery overview 107 5. Click Troubleshoot to display the optional recovery solutions. 6. Select a corresponding recovery solution according to your situation. Then follow the instructions on the screen to complete the process. 108 User Guide Chapter 10. Replacing devices This chapter provides instructions on how to install or replace hardware for your computer. Static electricity prevention on page 109 Replacing the coin-cell battery on page 109 Replacing the internal storage drive on page 112 Replacing the memory module on page 116 Replacing the keyboard on page 119 Static electricity prevention Static electricity, although harmless to you, can seriously damage computer components and options. Improper handling of static-sensitive parts can cause damage to the part. When you unpack an option or a CRU, do not open the static-protective package that contains the part until the instructions direct you to install the part. When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:

Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you. Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the edges. Never touch exposed circuitry. Prevent others from touching components. When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-protective package that contains the part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body. When possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-protective package and install the part without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective package on a smooth, level surface and place the part on the package. Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface. Replacing the coin-cell battery Before you start, print these instructions and read Important safety information on page vi. DANGER If the coin-cell battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The coin-cell battery contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:

Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo. Keep the battery away from fire. Do not expose it to excessive heat. Do not expose it to water or rain. Do not short-circuit it. Copyright Lenovo 2015 109 Do not drop, crush, or puncture the battery, or make it subject to strong forces. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame to vent from the battery or coin-cell battery. To replace the coin-cell battery, do the following:

1. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait several minutes to let the computer cool. 2. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. 3. Loosen the screws 1 and then remove the cover 2 . 4. Disconnect the main battery connector. 110 User Guide 5. Detach the connector 1 . Then remove the coin-cell battery 2 . 6. Install the coin-cell battery 1 . Then attach the connector 2 . 7. Connect the main battery cable. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 111 8. Attach the cover 1 and pivot it downwards 2 . Then tighten the screws 3 . 9. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and all cables. Replacing the internal storage drive Before you start, print these instructions and read Important safety information on page vi. Attention: The hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data. Observe the following guidelines:

Replace the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and slot of the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive are not designed for frequent changes or drive swapping. Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that absorbs any physical shocks. Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive. Do not touch the connector. Before removing the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, make a backup copy of all the information on it and then turn off the computer. Never remove the drive while the computer is operating, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. To replace the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive, do the following:

1. Turn off the computer. Then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait several minutes to let the computer cool. 2. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. 112 User Guide 3. Loosen the screws 1 and then remove the cover 2 . 4. Disconnect the battery connector. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 113 5. Lift the tab and remove the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. 6. Remove the rubber spacer. 114 User Guide 7. Install the rubber spacer to the new hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive. 8. Insert the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive into the slot 1 and position the hard disk drive, hybrid drive, or solid-state drive firmly into place 2 . Chapter 10. Replacing devices 115 9. Connect the battery cable. 10. Attach the cover 1 and pivot it downwards 2 . Then tighten the screws 3 . 11. Turn the computer over. Connect the ac power adapter and all cables. Replacing the memory module Before you start, print these instructions and read Important safety information on page vi. Increasing memory capacity is an effective way to make programs run faster. Note: The operating speed of the memory module has dependency on the system configuration. In some conditions, the memory module in your computer might not be able to operate at the maximum speed. Attention: Before you start installing a memory module, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the memory module. To replace the memory module, do the following:

116 User Guide 1. Turn off the computer. Then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait several minutes to let the computer cool. 2. Close the computer display and turn it over. 3. Loosen the screws 1 and then remove the cover 2 . 4. Disconnect the battery connector. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 117 5. Open the latches on both sides of the memory slot at the same time 1 and then remove the memory module 2 . 6. Place the notched end of the new memory module toward the contact edge side of the memory slot, and insert the memory module 1 into the slot at an angle of about 20 degrees. Pivot the memory module downward until it snaps into place 2 . Ensure that the memory module is firmly installed in the slot and cannot be moved easily. Attention: Do not touch the contact edge of the memory module. Otherwise the memory module might get damaged. 118 User Guide 7. Connect the battery cable. 8. Attach the cover 1 and pivot it downwards 2 . Then tighten the screws 3 . 9. Turn the computer over. Connect the ac power adapter and all cables. Replacing the keyboard Before you start, print these instructions and read Important safety information on page vi. Removing the keyboard To remove the keyboard, do the following:

1. Turn off the computer. Then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait several minutes to let the computer cool. 2. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 119 3. Loosen the screws 1 and then remove the cover 2 . 4. Disconnect the battery connector. 120 User Guide 5. Remove the screws that secure the keyboard. 6. Push hard in the direction shown to unlatch the keyboard. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 121 7. Pivot the keyboard slightly upward 1 until you can see the connectors on the bottom side of the keyboard. Then turn over the keyboard as shown 2 . 8. Gently put the keyboard on the palm rest and detach the connectors. Then remove the keyboard. Installing the keyboard To install the keyboard, do the following:

122 User Guide 1. Attach the connectors and then turn over the keyboard. 2. Insert the keyboard into the space under the keyboard-bezel frame as shown. Ensure that the edge of the keyboard is under the keyboard-bezel frame as shown. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 123 3. Slide the keyboard in the direction shown by the arrows. 4. Install the screws to secure the keyboard. 5. Connect the battery cable. 124 User Guide 6. Attach the cover 1 and pivot it downwards 2 . Then tighten the screws 3 . 7. Turn the computer over. Connect the ac power adapter and all cables. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 125 126 User Guide Chapter 11. Getting support This chapter provides information about getting help from Lenovo. Before you contact Lenovo on page 127 Getting help and service on page 127 Purchasing additional services on page 129 Before you contact Lenovo Often, you can solve your computer problems by referring to the information in the explanations of error codes, running diagnostic programs, or by consulting the Lenovo Web site. Registering your computer Register your computer with Lenovo. For more information, see Registering your computer on page 15. Downloading system updates Downloading updated software might resolve problems you experience with your computer. To download updated software, go to the following Web site and follow the instructions on the screen:

http://www.lenovo.com/support Recording information Before you talk to a Lenovo representative, record the following important information about your computer. Recording problem symptoms and details Collect the answers to the questions below before you call for help. Then, you will be able to get help as quickly as possible. What is the problem? Is it continuous or intermittent?

Is there an error message? What is the error code, if any?

What operating system are you using? Which version?

Which software programs were running at the time of the problem?

Can the problem be reproduced? If so, how?

Recording system information The serial number label is on the bottom of your computer. Record the machine type and the serial number. What is the name of your Lenovo product?

What is the machine type?

What is the serial number?

Getting help and service If you need help, service, technical assistance, or just want more information about Lenovo products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from Lenovo to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional information about Lenovo and our products, what to do if you experience a problem with your computer, and whom to call for service should it be necessary. Copyright Lenovo 2015 127 Information about your computer and preinstalled software, if any, is available in the documentation that comes with your computer. The documentation includes printed books, online books, readme files, and help files. In addition, information about Lenovo products is available on the World Wide Web. Microsoft Service Packs are the latest software source for Windows product updates. They are available through Web download (connection charges might apply) or through disc. For more specific information and links, go to http://www.microsoft.com. Lenovo offers technical assistance with installation of, or questions related to, Service Packs for your Lenovo-preinstalled Microsoft Windows product. For information, contact the Customer Support Center. Using diagnostic programs Many computer problems can be solved without outside assistance. If you experience a problem with your computer, the first place to start is the troubleshooting information in your computer documentation. If you suspect a software problem, see the documentation, including readme files and help information systems, that comes with the operating system or application program. ThinkPad notebook computers come with a set of diagnostic programs that you can use to help you identify hardware problems. See Diagnosing problems on page 81 for instructions on how to use the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device drivers or other software. You can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates from the Lenovo Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support. Lenovo Support Web site Technical support information is available on the Lenovo Support Web site at:

http://www.lenovo.com/support This Web site is updated with the latest support information such as the following:

Drivers and software Diagnostic solutions Product and service warranty Product and parts details User guides and manuals Knowledge base and frequently asked questions Calling Lenovo If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, during the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through the Customer Support Center. The following services are available during the warranty period:

Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem. Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service. Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes

(ECs) that apply to your hardware available. The following items are not covered:

128 User Guide Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Note: All warranted parts contain a 7-character or 10-character identification in the format FRU XXXXXXX or FRU XXXXXXXXXX. Identification of software problem sources Configuration of UEFI BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS) Installation and maintenance of application programs For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that applies to your Lenovo hardware product, see Warranty information in the Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide that comes with your computer. If possible, be near your computer when you make your call in case the technical assistance representative needs to help you resolve a computer problem. Ensure that you have downloaded the most current drivers and system updates, run diagnostics, and recorded information before you call. When calling for technical assistance, have the following information available:

Machine type and model Serial numbers of your computer, monitor, and other components, or your proof of purchase Description of the problem Exact wording of any error messages Hardware and software configuration information for your system Telephone numbers For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone or refer to the Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide that comes with your computer. Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. The latest phone numbers are available at http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone. If the number for your country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Purchasing additional services During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services, such as support for Lenovo and non-Lenovo hardware, operating systems, and application programs; network setup and configuration services; upgraded or extended hardware repair services; and custom installations services. Service availability and service name might vary by country. For more information about these services, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/accessories/services/index.html Chapter 11. Getting support 129 130 User Guide Appendix A. Regulatory information Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas ThinkPad notebook computers feature an integrated UltraConnect wireless antenna system for optimal reception, enabling wireless communication wherever you are. Antenna location 1 Wireless LAN antenna (auxiliary) 2 Wireless LAN antenna (main) Wireless related information Wireless interoperability Wireless LAN Card is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), Complementary Code Keying (CCK), and/or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:

The 802.11b/g Standard, 802.11a/b/g, 802.11n, or 802.11ac on Wireless LANs, as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. The Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance. A Bluetooth device is designed to be interoperable with any Bluetooth products that are compliant to Bluetooth Specification 4.0 as defined by the Bluetooth SIG. The following profiles are supported by Bluetooth devices:

Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Audio/Video Control Transport Protocol (AVCTP) Audio/Video Distribution Transport Protocol (AVDTP) A/V Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Basic Imaging Profile (BIP) Basic Printing Profile (BPP) Dial-Up Networking Profile (DUN) File Transfer Profile (FTP) Copyright Lenovo 2015 131 Generic Access Profile (GAP) Generic A/V Distribution Profile (GAVDP) Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP) Headset Profile (HSP) Hands-Free Profile (HFP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Message Access Profile (MAP) Object Exchange Protocol (OBEX) Object Push Profile (OPP) Personal Area Networking Profile (PAN) Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) Service Discovery Protocol (SDP) Synchronization Profile (SYNC) Video Distribution Profile (VDP) Generic Attribute Profile (GATT) Proximity Profile Find Me Profile Immediate Alert Profile Battery Status Profile Usage environment and your health Integrated wireless cards emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy like other radio devices. However, the level of energy emitted is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones. Due to the fact that integrated wireless cards operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, Lenovo believes they are safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situation or environment, the use of integrated wireless cards might be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations and areas might for example include:

Using the integrated wireless cards on board of airplanes, in hospitals or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization (such as airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use integrated wireless cards prior to turning on the computer. Wireless-radio compliance information Computer models equipped with wireless communications comply with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. 132 User Guide Brazil wireless-radio compliance information Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. This equipment is a secondary type device, that is, it is not protected against harmful interference, even if the interference is caused by a device of the same type, and it also cannot cause any interference to primary type devices. Mexico wireless-radio compliance information Advertencia: En Mexico la operacin de este equipo estsujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Locating wireless regulatory notices For more information about the wireless regulatory notices, refer to the Regulatory Notice shipped with your computer. If your computer is shipped without the Regulatory Notice, you can find it on the Web site at:

http://www.lenovo.com/UserManual Certification related information The following table contains information of the product name, compliance ID, and machine types. Product name ThinkPad E460 ThinkPad E465 Compliance ID TP00067C TP00067C Machine types 20ET (Tx), 20EU (Rx) 20EX (Tx) Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 5A992.c. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission Declaration of Conformity The following information refers to the ThinkPad E460, machine type 20ET (Tx) and 20EU (Rx); ThinkPad E465, machine type 20EX(Tx). This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Appendix A. Regulatory information 133 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than specified or recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Phone Number: 919-294-5900 Industry Canada Class B emission compliance statement CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. EU contact: Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia German Class B compliance statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. 134 User Guide Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Deutschland:

Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen

- CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo

(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:

Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B. Korea Class B compliance statement Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase Japan notice for ac power cord The ac power cord shipped with your product can be used only for this specific product. Do not use the ac power cord for other devices. Appendix A. Regulatory information 135 Lenovo product service information for Taiwan Eurasian compliance mark Brazil audio notice Ouvir sons com mais de 85 decibis por longos perodos pode provocar danos ao sistema auditivo. 136 User Guide Appendix B. WEEE and recycling statements Lenovo encourages owners of information technology equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on product recycling offerings can be found on Lenovo's Internet site at http://www.lenovo.com/social_responsibility/us/en/. Important WEEE information The WEEE marking on Lenovo products applies to countries with WEEE and e-waste regulations (for example, the European WEEE Directive, India E-Waste Management & Handling Rules, 2011). Appliances are labeled in accordance with local regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). These regulations determine the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable within each geography. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather put in the established collection systems for reclaiming these end of life products. Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, and recovery of WEEE and to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. For additional WEEE information, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/recycling Japan recycling statements Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details, visit the Lenovo Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan. Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, go to http://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan. Copyright Lenovo 2015 137 Disposing of Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor. Disposing of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers A button-shaped lithium battery is installed inside your Lenovo computer to provide power to the computer clock while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source. If you need to replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or an industrial-waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Disposal of a lithium battery must comply with local ordinances and regulations. Disposing of a disused battery from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery. If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that person's instructions. You also can refer to the instructions at http://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/. If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at http://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/. Recycling information for Brazil Declaraes de Reciclagem no Brasil Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso Equipamentos eltricos e eletrnicos no devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados pontos de coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas especializadas no manuseio de resduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgos ambientais, de acordo com a legislao local. A Lenovo possui um canal especfico para auxili-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso voc possua um produto Lenovo em situao de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para:

reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, nmero de srie e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instrues para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo. Battery recycling information for the European Union 138 User Guide Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU). Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment Battery recycling information for Taiwan Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada Recycling information for China Appendix B. WEEE and recycling statements 139 http://support.lenovo.com.cn/activity/551.htm 140 User Guide Appendix C. Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive

(RoHS) European Union RoHS Lenovo products sold in the European Union, on or after 3 January 2013 meet the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS recast or RoHS 2). For more information about Lenovo progress on RoHS, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/social_responsibility/us/en/RoHS_Communication.pdf Copyright Lenovo 2015 141 China RoHS India RoHS RoHS compliant as per E-Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011. 142 User Guide Turkish RoHS The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). Ukraine RoHS Appendix C. Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) 143 144 User Guide Appendix D. ENERGY STAR model information ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with the ENERGY STAR qualified designation. You might find an ENERGY STAR mark affixed on the computer or displayed on the power settings interface. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if carry an ENERGY STAR mark, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers. 20ET (Tx), 20EU (Rx), 20EX (Tx) By using ENERGY STAR qualified products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you can help reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption can contribute to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, go to:

http://www.energystar.gov Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified length of time:

By using ENERGY STAR qualified products and taking advantage of the power-management features of the computer, you can help reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption can contribute to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, go to:

http://www.energystar.gov Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when the computer has been inactive for a specified length of time:

Power plan: Default Turn off the display: After 10 minutes Put the computer into sleep: After 20 minutes To awaken the computer from sleep mode, press the Fn key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, see the Windows help information on the computer. Copyright Lenovo 2015 145 The Wake on LAN function is enabled when your Lenovo computer is shipped from the factory, and the setting remains valid even when the computer is in sleep mode. If you do not need to have Wake on LAN enabled while the computer is in sleep mode, you can reduce the power consumption and prolong the time in sleep mode, by disabling the setting of Wake on LAN for sleep mode. To disable the setting of Wake on LAN for sleep mode, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Device Manager. 2. In the Device Manager window, expand Network adapters. 3. Right-click your network adapter device, and click Properties. 4. Click the Power Management tab. 5. Clear the Allow this device to wake the computer check box. 6. Click OK. 146 User Guide Appendix E. Notices Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent programs covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the application(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. Copyright Lenovo 2015 147 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo Access Connections Active Protection System Secure Data Disposal ThinkPad ThinkPad logo TrackPoint UltraConnect Intel and Intel SpeedStep are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, Windows, Direct3D, BitLocker, and Cortana are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. AMD and AMD-V are trademarks or registered trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 148 User Guide

 

 

ThinkPad Regulatory Notice About this manual This manual contains regulatory information for the following ThinkPad products. ThinkPad notebook computer ThinkPad Yoga 14 and ThinkPad Yoga 460 ThinkPad E460 and E560 ThinkPad E465 and E565 8260NGW 3165NGW BCM943162ZP QCNFA34AC Read first regulatory information Read this document before using your computer. This computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Install and use your computer according to the following instructions. The latest Regulatory Notice manual is available on the Lenovo Web site. To download the manual, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support and then follow the on-screen instructions. Veuillez lire le prsent document avant d'utiliser votre ordinateur. Cet ordinateur est conforme aux normes de frquence radio et de scurit de tous les pays ou rgions dans lesquels son utilisation sans fil a t homologue. Installez et utilisez l'ordinateur en respectant les instructions qui suivent. La dernire version du manuel Regulatory Notice est disponible sur le site Web de Lenovo. Pour la tlcharger, rendez-vous sur http://www.lenovo.com/support et suivez les instructions l'cran. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. Approved wireless devices This section presents the FCC ID and model number of each wireless device. 1 Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module FCC ID: PD98260NG (Model: 8260NGW) FCC ID: PD93165NG (Model: 3165NGW) FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP) FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC) Notes:

The wireless LAN and the Bluetooth features operate at different frequencies exclusively, and transmit radio frequencies simultaneously. The wireless LAN modules marketed in the USA and Canada do not support or function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). II. Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module The wireless LAN and Bluetooth module in your computer is preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter nor remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. i) FCC ID location The FCC ID for the wireless LAN and Bluetooth module is shown on the enclosure of your computer. For the location of the FCC ID, see FCC ID and IC Certification information in User Guide. ii) FCC RF Exposure compliance The radiated output power of the wireless LAN module authorized to use for your computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

2 CAUTION:

For ThinkPad Yoga 14 and ThinkPad Yoga 460, ThinkPad E460 and E465:

The total radiated energy from the antennas connected to the installed wireless LAN module, conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement, regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093, when the computer was tested in either conventional notebook or tablet computer orientations. For ThinkPad E560 and E565:

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antennas connected to the installed wireless LAN module and all persons. If the distance cannot be maintained while the computer is closed, you must select sleep as the power mode when closing the display. The transmission antennas for the wireless LAN module are located in the LCD cover. See Locating the UltraConnect wireless antennas in User Guide. iii) Radio Frequency interference requirements Each device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 7. When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode, note that high power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. III. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your computer is approved for simultaneous use of one of the approved wireless LAN modules and the approved Bluetooth device. For a list of those transmitters, refer to I. Approved wireless devices on page 1. Make sure of the following conditions when you use any other external RF option device:

1. When you use any other RF option device, you are requested to confirm that the device conforms to the RF Safety requirement and is approved to use for your computer. 2. You must follow the RF Safety instructions of the RF option device that are included in the user manual of the RF option device. 3. If the RF option device is prohibited to use in conjunction with another transmitters, you must turn off all other wireless features in your computer. 3 Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number I. Approved wireless devices This section presents the IC Certification and model number of each wireless device. i) Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module IC: 1000M-8260NG (Model: 8260NGW) IC: 1000M-3165NG (Model: 3165NGW) IC: 4324A-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP) IC: 4104A-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC) Notes:

The wireless LAN and the Bluetooth features operate at different frequencies exclusively, and transmit radio frequencies simultaneously. The wireless LAN modules marketed in the USA and Canada does not support or function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). II. Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module The IC Certification number for the wireless LAN and Bluetooth module is shown on the enclosure of your computer. For the location of the IC Certification number, see FCC ID and IC Certification information in User Guide. Attention: The wireless LAN and Bluetooth module in your computer is preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter nor remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. III. Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices

(RSS-210) Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The transmitter devices have been designed to operate with the antennas integrated in the computer, and having a maximum gain of within 3 dBi. When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode:

4 The devices for the band 51505350 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 52505350 MHz and 56505850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN (Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. IV. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/. The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless modules conforms to the Canada Portable RF exposure limit regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 5, Section 4 set forth for an uncontrolled environment, and are safe for intended operation in the conventional setting. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Numro dhomologation IC I. Priphriques sans fil homologus Cette section prsente le numro dhomologation IC et le numro de modle de chaque priphrique sans fil. i) Module LAN sans fil et Bluetooth prinstall IC: 1000M-8260NG (Model: 8260NGW) IC: 1000M-3165NG (Model: 3165NGW) IC: 4324A-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP) IC: 4104A-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC) Remarques:

Les fonctions de rseau local sans fil, et Bluetooth sont oprationnelles des frquences diffrentes exclusivement et mettent des frquences radio simultanment. Les modules de rseau local sans fil commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. II. Module LAN sans fil et Bluetooth prinstall Le numro de certification IC pour le module LAN sans fil et Bluetooth est reprsente sur le botier de votre ordinateur. Pour connatre l'emplacement du 5 numro de certification IC, voir ID FCC et IC informations de certification dans le Guide de l'utilisateur. Attention: Le module sans fil LAN et Bluetooth sur votre ordinateur est prinstall par Lenovo, et il vous est interdit de le remplacer par un autre sans fil adaptateur ni le supprimer. Si l'appareil ncessite un remplacement en raison d'un problme pendant la garantie, il doit tre rpar par un technicien agr Lenovo. III. Appareils de radio-communication basse tension sans licence d'utilisation (CNR-210) Le fonctionnement de ce type d'appareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne peut pas causer de perturbations lectromagntiques. 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les perturbations reues, y compris celles susceptibles d'occasionner un fonctionnement indsirable. Les appareils metteurs ont t conus pour fonctionner avec les antennes intgres l'ordinateur et avoir un gain d'antenne maximal de 3 dBi. Lorsque vous utilisez une module de rseau local sans fil dans le mode de transmission 802.11 a/n, tenez compte des remarques suivantes:

Les appareils destins la bande 51505350 MHz devront tre exclusivement utiliss en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal. Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux

(c'est--dire qu'ils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz. Ils peuvent provoquer des perturbations lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LE-LAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. IV. Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) Les ordinateurs utilisent des antennes intgrales faible gain qui n'mettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Internet de Sant Canada l'adresse http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/

L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux modules sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences mises par les appareils portables au Canada telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la Section 4 du document CNR-102, version 5 pour un environnement non contrl et permet d'affecter sans danger le produit l'usage auquel il est destin. La rduction de l'exposition aux radiofrquences est possible si le produit peut tre conserv aussi loin que 6 possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou en dfinissant une puissance de sortie plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity Models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized change or modifications could avoid the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place-Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Telephone: 1-919-294-5900 7 Usage environment and your health Wireless feature (such as wireless LAN, and Bluetooth and so on) emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy like other radio devices. However, the level of energy emitted is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones. Due to the fact that wireless feature operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, Lenovo believes the wireless feature is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situation or environment, the use of wireless feature might be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations and areas may for example include:

Using the wireless feature on board of airplanes, in hospitals or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization (such as airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use wireless feature prior to turning on the tablet. 8 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo ThinkPad Yoga UltraConnect Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 9 First Edition (October 2015) Copyright Lenovo 2015. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Printed in

(1P) P/N: SP40J47495

*1PSP40J47495*

 

 

ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read and understand the following:

Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide Regulatory Notice Appendix F Notices on page 135 Important safety information on page vi The latest Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide and the Regulatory Notice are available on the Lenovo Support Web site at:

http://www.lenovo.com/UserManuals First Edition (May 2016) Copyright Lenovo 2016. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Read this first . Important safety information . Conditions that require immediate action . Safety guidelines . Service and upgrades . Power cords and power adapters . Extension cords and related devices . Plugs and outlets . Power supply statement . External devices . General battery notice . Notice for built-in rechargeable battery . Notice for non-rechargeable coin-cell battery . Heat and product ventilation . Electrical current safety information . Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice . Using headphones or earphones. Additional safety information . v

. vi vii vii vii viii ix

. ix

. ix

. x

. x

. x

. xi

. xi xii xiii xiii xiii

. Locating important product information . Chapter 1. Product overview . Locating computer controls, connectors, and

. indicators. Front view for models with a 2D camera . Front view for models with a 3D camera . Right-side view. Left-side view . Bottom view . Status indicators . Machine type and model information . FCC ID and IC Certification information . Labels for the Windows operating systems . Accessing Lenovo programs . An introduction to Lenovo programs . Features . Specifications . Operating environment Lenovo programs

. 1

. 1 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 9 9 10 11 12 12 13 13 13

. Chapter 2. Using your computer . Registering your computer . Frequently asked questions

. Getting help about the Windows operating

. system . Special keys

. ThinkPad pointing device . TrackPoint pointing device . 17

. 17 17

. 18 19 21 21 Copyright Lenovo 2016

. Power management

. Using the ac power . Checking the battery status . Charging the battery

. Maximizing the battery life . Managing the battery power

. Power-saving modes . Handling the battery. Connecting to the network . Ethernet connections . Wireless connections . Trackpad . Trackpad touch gestures . Customizing the ThinkPad pointing device . Replacing the cap of pointing stick . Connecting an external display . Choosing a display mode . Changing display settings . Inserting a flash media card. Removing a flash media card . Using audio features . Using the camera . Using a flash media card. Using an external display

. 22 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 26 26 27 28 29 29 29 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 Chapter 3. Enhancing your

. computer . Finding ThinkPad options . 37

. 37 Chapter 4. You and your computer . Accessibility and comfort

. Ergonomic information. Comfort

. Accessibility information . Traveling with your computer . Travel tips . Travel accessories . Chapter 5. Security . Attaching a mechanical lock . Using passwords. Typing passwords

. Power-on password . Supervisor password . Hard disk passwords . Hard disk security . Setting the security chip . 39 39

. 39

. 40 40

. 43

. 43 43

. 45 45

. 45 45

. 45

. 46 48

. 50

. 50 i

. Notice on deleting data from your internal storage

. drive. Using firewalls . Protecting data against viruses . 51 52 52

. 53 Chapter 6. Advanced configuration . 53

. Installing a new operating system . 53 Installing the Windows 7 operating system . Installing the Windows 10 operating system . 54 55

. 55

. 56

. 56 60

. 60

. 66

. 68 68

. 68 Installing device drivers . Using the ThinkPad Setup program . Main menu . Config menu. Date and Time menu . Security menu . Startup menu . Restart menu . Updating the UEFI BIOS . Using system management. Chapter 7. Preventing problems . General tips for preventing problems . Making sure device drivers are up-to-date . Taking care of your computer . Cleaning the cover of your computer . 71 71

. 72

. 73

. 74

. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems . Diagnosing problems . Troubleshooting . 77

. 77

. 77

. 77

. Computer stops responding . 78

. Spills on the keyboard . 78

. Error messages

. 80

. Errors without messages . 81

. Beep errors . 81

. Memory module problems . 82 Networking problems . Problems with the keyboard and other pointing devices . Problems with the display and multimedia

. devices . Battery and power problems . Problems with drives and other storage

. devices . A software problem . Problems with ports and connectors . 93 93 94 84 90 83

. Chapter 9. Recovery overview . Recovery overview for the Windows 7 operating system . Creating and using a recovery media . Performing backup and recovery operations . 95 95 95 96 ii ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace . Creating and using a rescue medium . Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device

. drivers . Solving recovery problems . Recovery overview for the Windows 10 operating system . Resetting your computer . Using advanced startup options . Recovering your operating system if Windows

. 10 fails to start . Creating and using a recovery USB drive . Chapter 10. Replacing devices . Static electricity prevention. Disabling the built-in battery . Replacing the keyboard . Replacing the internal storage drive . Replacing a memory module . Chapter 11. Getting support Before you contact Lenovo . Getting help and service . Using diagnostic programs . Lenovo Support Web site. Calling Lenovo . Purchasing additional services . Certification related information . Export classification notice . Electronic emission notices. Appendix A. Regulatory information . Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas . Wireless related information . Wireless-radio compliance information . Locating wireless regulatory notices . Federal Communications Commission Declaration of Conformity

. Industry Canada Class B emission compliance statement . European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . German Class B compliance statement . Class 1 laser product compliance

. statement . Korea Class B compliance statement . Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement . Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per

. phase . Japan notice for ac power cord . 97 98 99 100 100 100 100 101 101 103 103 103 104 109 111 115 115 115 116 116 116 117 119 119 119 121 121 121 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 123 124 124 124 Lenovo product service information for

. Taiwan . Eurasian compliance mark . Brazil audio notice . 124 124 124

. Appendix B. WEEE and recycling

. statements . Important WEEE information . Recycling information for China . Recycling information for Japan . Recycling information for Brazil . Battery recycling information for Taiwan. Battery recycling information for the European Union . Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada. 125 125 125 125 126 127 127 127 Appendix C. Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) . European Union RoHS . Turkish RoHS . Ukraine RoHS . India RoHS . China RoHS. Appendix D. ENERGY STAR model

. information . Appendix E. Trademarks . Appendix F. Notices . 129 129 129 129 129 130 131 133 135 Copyright Lenovo 2016 iii iv ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Read this first Be sure to follow the important tips given here to get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Failure to do so might lead to discomfort or injury, or cause your computer to fail. Protect yourself from the heat that your computer generates. When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. The temperature they reach depends on the amount of system activity and the level of charge in the battery. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended time. Periodically take hands from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest. Protect yourself from the heat generated by the ac power adapter. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. Do not place the ac power adapter in contact with any part of your body while it is in use. Never use it to warm your body. Prevent your computer from getting wet. To avoid spills and the danger of electrical shock, keep liquids away from your computer. Protect the cables from being damaged. Applying strong force to cables may damage or break them. Route communication lines, or the cables of an ac power adapter, a mouse, a keyboard, a printer, or any other electronic device, so that they cannot be walked on, tripped over, pinched by your computer or other objects, or in any way subjected to treatment that could interfere with the operation of your computer. Copyright Lenovo 2016 v Protect your computer and data when moving it. Before moving a computer equipped with an internal storage drive (such as a hard disk drive or solid-state drive), do one of the following:

Turn off the computer. Put the computer in sleep mode. Put the computer in hibernation mode. This will help to prevent damage to the computer, and possible loss of data. Handle your computer gently. Carry your computer carefully. Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices. Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushioning and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag. Before putting your computer in a carrying case, make sure that it is off, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. Do not put a computer in a carrying case while it is turned on. Important safety information Note: Read the important safety information first. This information can help you safely use your notebook computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Lenovo Limited Warranty. For more information, see Warranty Information in the Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide that comes with your computer. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions included with your product, observe all warnings on the product and in the operating instructions, and review the information included in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Note: This information includes references to power adapters and batteries. In addition to notebook computers, some products (such as speakers and monitors) ship with external power adapters. If you have such a product, this information applies to your product. In addition, computer products contain a coin-sized internal battery that provides power to the system clock even when the computer is unplugged, so the battery safety information applies to all computer products. vi ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Conditions that require immediate action Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. Or you might hear sounds like popping, cracking or hissing. These conditions might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. However, do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Contact the Customer Support Center for further guidance. For a list of Service and Support phone numbers, see the following Web site:

http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damage or wear or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the Customer Support Center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the Customer Support Center for further guidance. Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken, or damaged. Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire. Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery. A cracking, hissing or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product. Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the computer product, the power cord or power adapter. The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water. The product has been dropped or damaged in any way. The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions. Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. Safety guidelines Always observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury and property damage. Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the Customer Support Center or your documentation. Only use a Service Provider who is approved to repair your particular product. Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Upgrades typically are referred to as options. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with a power cord, always make Copyright Lenovo 2016 vii sure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. If you have any questions or concerns, contact the Customer Support Center. Although there are no moving parts in your computer after the power cord has been disconnected, the following warnings are required for your safety. CAUTION:

Hazardous moving parts. Keep fingers and other body parts away. CAUTION:

Before you open the computer cover, turn off the computer and wait several minutes until the computer is cool. Power cords and power adapters DANGER Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly. Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. Protect power cords and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating. Always connect power cords and signal cables in the correct order and ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input pins or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way. viii ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings. Plugs and outlets DANGER If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices. Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet. Power supply statement DANGER Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached. Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician. Copyright Lenovo 2016 ix External devices CAUTION:

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB and 1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices. General battery notice DANGER Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause overheat, liquid leakage, or an explosion. To avoid possible injury, do the following:

Do not open, dissemble, or service any battery. Do not crush or puncture the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery, or expose it to water or other liquids. Keep the battery away from children Keep the battery away from fire. Stop using the battery if it is damaged, or if you notice any discharge or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads. Store the rechargeable batteries or products containing the rechargeable batteries at room temperature, charged to approximately 30 to 50% of capacity. We recommend that the batteries be charged about once per year to prevent overdischarge. Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations. Notice for built-in rechargeable battery DANGER Do not attempt to replace the built-in rechargeable battery. Replacement of the battery must be done by a Lenovo-authorized repair facility or technician. Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. The Lenovo-authorized repair facilities or technicians recycle Lenovo batteries according to local laws and regulations. x ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Notice for non-rechargeable coin-cell battery DANGER If the coin-cell battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery contains a small amount of harmful substance. Do not heat to more than 100C (212F). The following statement applies to users in the state of California, U.S.A. California Perchlorate Information:

Products containing manganese dioxide lithium coin-cell batteries may contain perchlorate. Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate Heat and product ventilation DANGER Computers, ac power adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:

When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you use the keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time. Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time. Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments. Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features. When the ac power adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the ac power adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:

Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in. Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation. Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas. Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings. Copyright Lenovo 2016 xi Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating. Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35C (95F). Electrical current safety information DANGER Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:

Do not use your computer during a lightning storm. Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this product. Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Disconnect the attached power cords, battery, and all the cables before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. Do not use your computer until all internal parts enclosures are fastened into place. Never use the computer when internal parts and circuits are exposed. DANGER Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To connect:

To disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, attach all cables to devices. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlets. 5. Turn devices ON. 1. Turn everything OFF. 2. First, remove power cords from outlets. 3. Remove signal cables from connectors. 4. Remove all cables from devices. The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the computer. The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer. DANGER During electrical storms, do not perform any replacement and do not connect or disconnect the telephone cable from the telephone outlet on the wall. xii ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice CAUTION:

The LCD is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care. Note: For products with mercury-containing fluorescent lamps (for example, non-LED), the fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury; dispose of according to local, state, or federal laws. Using headphones or earphones CAUTION:

Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of the equalizer to maximum increases the earphone and headphone output voltage and the sound pressure level. Therefore, to protect your hearing, adjust the equalizer to an appropriate level. Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphone or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification limits the computers maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7 limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, the combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1. If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1 (Clause 6.5 Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. Additional safety information DANGER Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation. Glass parts notice CAUTION:

Some parts of your product may be made of glass. This glass could break if the product is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your product until the glass is replaced by trained service personnel. Copyright Lenovo 2016 xiii xiv ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 1. Product overview This chapter contains the following topics:

Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators on page 1 Locating important product information on page 9 Features on page 11 Specifications on page 12 Operating environment on page 12 Lenovo programs on page 13 Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators This section introduces the computer hardware features to give you the basic information you need to start using the computer. Front view for models with a 2D camera 1 Microphones 3 TrackPoint pointing stick 5 System-status indicator 7 Trackpad 2 2D camera 4 Power button 6 TrackPoint buttons 8 Speakers 1 Microphones The microphones capture sound and voice when used with a program capable of handling audio. Copyright Lenovo 2016 1 2 2D camera Use the camera to take pictures or hold a video conference. For more information, see Using the camera on page 33. ThinkPad pointing device 3 TrackPoint pointing stick 6 TrackPoint buttons 7 Trackpad The keyboard contains the Lenovo unique ThinkPad pointing device. Pointing, selecting, and dragging are all part of a single process that you can perform without moving your fingers from a typing position. For more information, see ThinkPad pointing device on page 21. 4 Power button Press the power button to turn on the computer or put the computer into sleep mode. For how to turn off the computer, see Frequently asked questions on page 17. If your computer is completely unresponsive, you can turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for four or more seconds. If the computer cannot be turned off, see Computer stops responding on page 77 for more information. You also can define what the power button does. For example, by pressing the power button, you can turn off the computer or put the computer into sleep or hibernation mode. To change what the power button does, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and then change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Power Options Choose what the power buttons do. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. 5 System-status indicator The illuminated dot on the ThinkPad logo functions as a system-status indicator. For more information, see Status indicators on page 7. 8 Speakers Your computer is equipped with a pair of stereo speakers. 2 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Front view for models with a 3D camera 1 Microphones 3 Infrared camera 5 Infrared laser projector 7 Power button 9 TrackPoint buttons 11 Speakers 2 3D camera 4 Color camera 6 TrackPoint pointing stick 8 System-status indicator 10 Trackpad 1 Microphones The microphones capture sound and voice when used with a program capable of handling audio. 2 3D camera 3 Infrared camera 4 Color camera 5 Infrared laser projector Some models come with a 3D camera 1 . Consisted of an infrared camera 2 , a color camera 3 , and an infrared laser projector 4 , the 3D camera enables you to interact with your computer easily and conveniently. The 3D camera supports all functions of a 2D camera. Use the 3D camera to take pictures or hold a video conference. For more information, see Using the camera on page 33. ThinkPad pointing device 6 TrackPoint pointing stick 9 TrackPoint buttons 10 Trackpad The keyboard contains the Lenovo unique ThinkPad pointing device. Pointing, selecting, and dragging are all part of a single process that you can perform without moving your fingers from a typing position. For more information, see ThinkPad pointing device on page 21. Chapter 1. Product overview 3 7 Power button Press the power button to turn on the computer or put the computer into sleep mode. For how to turn off the computer, see Frequently asked questions on page 17. If your computer is completely unresponsive, you can turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for four or more seconds. If the computer cannot be turned off, see Computer stops responding on page 77 for more information. You also can define what the power button does. For example, by pressing the power button, you can turn off the computer or put the computer into sleep or hibernation mode. To change what the power button does, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and then change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Power Options Choose what the power buttons do. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. 8 System-status indicator The illuminated dot on the ThinkPad logo functions as a system-status indicator. For more information, see Status indicators on page 7. 11 Speakers Your computer is equipped with a pair of stereo speakers. Right-side view 1 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 3.0 connectors 3 Fan louvers 2 Media-card slot 4 Security-lock slot 1 USB 3.0 connectors The USB 3.0 connector is used for connecting USB-compatible devices, such as a USB printer or a digital camera. Note: When you attach a USB cable to this USB connector, ensure that the USB mark is facing upward. Otherwise the connector might get damaged. 2 Media-card slot Your computer has a media-card slot. Insert your flash media card into the media-card slot to read the data on the card. For more information, see Using a flash media card on page 34. 3 Fan louvers The fan louvers and the internal fan enable air to circulate in the computer to ensure proper cooling, especially the cooling of the microprocessor. 4 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Note: To ensure proper airflow, do not place any obstacle in front of the fan louvers. 4 Security-lock slot To protect your computer from theft, purchase a security cable lock that fits this security-lock slot to lock your computer to a stationary object. Note: You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking device and security feature. Lenovo makes no comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance of the locking device and security feature. Left-side view 1 ac power connector 3 High-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) connector 2 Fan louvers 4 Ethernet connector 5 Always On USB 3.0 connector 6 Audio connector 1 ac power connector When the ac power adapter is connected to the ac power connector, it provides power to the computer and charges the battery. 2 Fan louvers The fan louvers and the internal fan enable air to circulate in the computer to ensure proper cooling, especially the cooling of the microprocessor. Note: To ensure proper airflow, do not place any obstacle in front of the fan louvers. 3 HDMI connector Use the HDMI connector to connect the computer to an HDMI-compatible audio device or video monitor, such as a high-definition television (HDTV). 4 Ethernet connector Connect the computer to a local area network (LAN) with the Ethernet connector. DANGER To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector. You can only connect an Ethernet cable to this connector. The Ethernet connector has two indicators that show the status of the network connection. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the computer is connected to a LAN and a session with the network is available. When the indicator blinks yellow, data is being transmitted. Chapter 1. Product overview 5 5 Always On USB 3.0 connector By default, the Always On USB 3.0 connector enables you to charge some mobile digital devices and smartphones in the following situations:

When your computer is on or in sleep mode When your computer is in hibernation mode or is turned off, but connected to ac power If you want to charge these devices when your computer is in hibernation mode or is turned off, and the computer is not connected to ac power, do the following:

For Windows 7: Start the Power Manager program, click the Global Power Settings tab, and then follow the instructions on the screen. For Windows 10: Start the Lenovo Settings program, click Power, and then follow the instructions on the screen. For instructions on how to start the programs, see Accessing Lenovo programs on page 13. Note: When you attach a USB cable to this USB connector, ensure that the USB mark is facing upward. Otherwise the connector might get damaged. 6 Audio connector Connect headphones or a headset that has a 3.5-mm (0.14-inch) 4-pole plug to the audio connector to listen to the sound from the computer. Notes:

If you are using a headset with a function switch, do not press this switch while using the headset. If you press it, the headset microphone will be disabled, and the integrated microphones on the computer will be enabled instead. The audio connector does not support a conventional microphone. For more information, see Using audio features on page 33. Bottom view 6 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 1 Memory-upgrade slots 3 M.2 solid state drive 5 Internal storage drive 2 Emergency-reset hole 4 Battery 1 Memory-upgrade slots You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a memory module in the memory-upgrade slot. Memory modules are available as options from Lenovo. 2 Emergency-reset hole If the computer stops responding and you cannot turn it off by pressing the power button, remove the ac power adapter first. Then insert a needle or a straightened paper clip into the emergency-reset hole to reset the computer. 3 M.2 solid state drive Some models have an M.2 solid-state drive for data storage. 4 Battery Use your computer with battery power whenever ac power is unavailable. 5 Internal storage drive Depending on the model, the computer might have a large-capacity, customer-upgradable hard disk drive that can meet various storage demands. Some models are equipped with a hybrid drive, which is a storage device that combines NAND flash solid-state memory with hard disk drive technology. Note: The hidden service partition is the reason why there is less free space than expected on your storage drive. This reduction is more noticeable on the solid-state drive because of its smaller capacity. Status indicators This topic helps you locate and identify the various status indicators on your computer. Note: Depending on the model, your computer might look different from the following illustration. Chapter 1. Product overview 7 1 Fn Lock indicator The Fn Lock indicator shows the status of Fn Lock function. For more information, see Special keys on page 19. 2 ac power-satus indicator The ac power-status indicator shows the ac power charging status of the computer. Green: Connected to ac power (charging 80%100%) Amber: Connected to ac power (charging 1%80%) Off: Not connected to ac power (no charging) 3 Speaker-mute indicator When the speaker-mute indicator is on, the speakers are muted. 4 Microphone-mute indicator When the microphone-mute indicator is on, the microphones are muted. 8 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 5 Camera-status indicator When the camera-status indicator is on, the camera is in use. 6 7 System-status indicators The illuminated dots, one in the ThinkPad logo on the outer lid of your computer and the other on the palm rest, show the system status of your computer:

Blinks for three times: The computer is initially connected to power. On: The computer is on (in normal mode). Off: The computer is off or in hibernation mode. Blinks fast: The computer is entering hibernation mode. Blinks slowly: The computer is in sleep mode. Locating important product information This section provides information to help you locate the following labels that contain important product information:

Machine type and model information The machine type and model label identifies your computer. When you contact Lenovo for help, the machine type and model information helps support technicians to identify your computer and provide faster service. The following figure shows the location of the machine type and model of your computer. FCC ID and IC Certification information The FCC and IC Certification information is identified by a label located on the computer base cover as shown in the following figure. Chapter 1. Product overview 9 For a preinstalled wireless module, this label identifies the actual FCC ID and IC certification number for the wireless module installed by Lenovo. Note: Do not remove or replace a preinstalled wireless module by yourself. For module replacement, you must contact Lenovo Service first. Lenovo is not responsible for any damage caused by unauthorized replacement. Labels for the Windows operating systems Windows 7 Certificate of Authenticity: Computer models preinstalled with the Windows 7 operating system have a Certificate of Authenticity label affixed to the computer cover or inside the battery compartment. The Certificate of Authenticity is your indication that the computer is licensed for a Windows 7 product and is preinstalled with a Windows 7 genuine version. In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 7 Professional license downgrade rights. Printed on the Certificate of Authenticity is the Windows 7 version for which the computer is licensed and the Product ID. The Product ID is important in case you need to reinstall the Windows 7 operating system from a source other than a Lenovo product recovery disc set. Windows 10 Genuine Microsoft label: Depending on your geographic location, the date when your computer was manufactured, and the version of Windows 10 that is preinstalled, your computer might have a Genuine Microsoft label affixed to its cover. See http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/Hardware.aspx for illustrations of the various types of Genuine Microsoft labels. In the Peoples Republic of China, the Genuine Microsoft label is required on all computer models preinstalled with any version of Windows 10. In other countries and regions, the Genuine Microsoft label is required only on computer models licensed for Windows 10 Pro. The absence of a Genuine Microsoft label does not indicate that the preinstalled Windows version is not genuine. For details on how to tell whether your preinstalled Windows product is genuine, refer to the information provided by Microsoft at http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/howtotell/default.aspx. Unlike Windows 7 products, there are no external, visual indicators of the Product ID or Windows version for which the computer is licensed. Instead, the Product ID is recorded in the computer firmware. Whenever a Windows 10 product is installed, the installation program checks the computer firmware for a valid, matching Product ID to complete the activation. 10 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide In some cases, an earlier Windows version might be preinstalled under the terms of the Windows 10 Pro license downgrade rights. Features The computer features introduced in this section cover a variety of models. For your specific computer model, some features might vary or not apply. To view the system properties of your computer, do the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, right-click Computer, and then click Properties. For Windows 10: Do either of the following:

Open the Start menu and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings System About. Right-click the Start button

. Then select System. Memory Double Data Rate 4 (DDR3) Synchronous Dynamic (SD) Random Access Memory modules (RAM) Storage device 2.5-inch form factor, 7-mm, 7.2-mm, or 9.5-mm height hard disk drive (available on some models) 2.5-inch form factor, 7-mm height solid-state drive (available on some models) Display The color display uses the Thin Film Transistor (TFT) technology. Display size: 15.6 inches (396.2 mm) Display resolution:

LCD: Up to 3840 x 2160 or 1920 x 1080, depending on the model External monitor: Up to 4096 x 2160 Brightness control Keyboard 6-row keyboard ThinkPad pointing device (TrackPoint pointing device and trackpad) Function keys Numeric keypad White backlight and red backlight (available on some models) Interface 4-in-1digital-media-card reader ac power connector Audio connector HDMI connector Integrated microphones Always On USB 3.0 connector Chapter 1. Product overview 11 Two USB 3.0 connectors RJ45 Ethernet connector 2D camera or 3D camera, depending on the model Note: The 3D camera is an infrared laser device. Integrated wireless features Wireless LAN Bluetooth Specifications This section lists the physical specifications for your computer. Size Width: 396 mm (15.6 inches) Depth: 258 mm (10.16 inches) Height: 25.8 mm (1.02 inches) Heat output 90W (307 Btu/hr) maximum or 135W (461 Btu/hr) maximum (depending on the model) Power source (ac power adapter) Sine-wave input at 50 to 60 Hz Input rating of the ac power adapter: 100 to 240 V ac, 50 to 60 Hz Operating environment This section provides information about the operating environment of your computer. Environment:

Maximum altitude without pressurization: 3048 m (10 000 ft) Temperature At altitudes up to 2438 m (8000 ft) Operating: 5.0C to 35.0C (41F to 95F) Storage: 5.0C to 43.0C (41F to 109F) At altitudes above 2438 m (8000 ft) Maximum temperature when operating under the unpressurized condition: 31.3C (88F) Note: When you charge the battery, its temperature must be at least 10C (50F). Relative humidity:

Operating: 8% to 80%

Storage: 5% to 95%

If possible, place your computer in a well-ventilated and dry area without direct exposure to sunshine. Attention:

12 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Keep electrical appliances such as an electric fan, radio, air conditioner, and microwave oven away from the computer. The strong magnetic fields generated by these appliances can damage the monitor and data on the hard disk drive. Do not place any beverages on top of or beside the computer or other attached devices. If liquid is spilled on or in the computer or an attached device, a short circuit or other damage might occur. Do not eat or smoke over your keyboard. Particles that fall into your keyboard can cause damage. Lenovo programs Your computer comes with Lenovo programs to help you work easily and securely. Note: The available programs are subject to change without notice. To learn more about the programs and other computing solutions offered by Lenovo, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/support Accessing Lenovo programs To access Lenovo programs on your computer, do the following:

1. Click the Start button to open the Start menu. Locate a program by the program name. 2. If the program is not displayed on the Start menu, click All programs or All apps to display all programs. 3. If you still do not find the program in the program list, search for the program in the search box. Some Lenovo programs are ready to be installed. You cannot find these programs through the above methods unless you have installed them first. To install these Lenovo programs, go to Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools and follow the instructions on the screen. An introduction to Lenovo programs This topic provides a brief introduction to Lenovo programs. Depending on your computer model, some of the programs might not be available. Access Connections

(Windows 7) Active Protection System

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) The Access Connections program is a connectivity assistant program for creating and managing location profiles. Each location profile stores all the network and Internet configuration settings needed for connecting to a network infrastructure from a specific location such as a home or an office. By switching between location profiles as you move your computer from place to place, you can quickly and easily connect to a network with no need to manually reconfigure your settings and restart the computer each time. The Active Protection System program protects your internal storage drive (such as hard disk drive) when the shock sensor inside your computer detects a condition that could damage the drive, such as system tilt, excessive vibration, or shock. The internal storage drive is less vulnerable to damage when it is not operating. This is because when the internal storage drive is not operating, the system stops it from spinning, and might also move the read and write heads of the drive to areas that do not contain data. As soon as the shock sensor senses that the environment is stable again

(minimal change in system tilt, vibration, or shock), it turns on the internal storage drive. Chapter 1. Product overview 13 Auto Scroll Utility

(Windows 7) Communications Utility

(Windows 7) Hotkey Features Integration

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Lenovo Companion

(Windows 10) This program enhances your experience with window operation. The window position of a foreground application is automatically adjusted. The scroll bar on a user interface is also automatically adjusted. The Communications Utility program enables you to configure settings for the integrated camera and audio devices. Hotkey Features Integration is a utility package that enables you to select and install utility programs specifically for the special keys and buttons on your computer. The special keys and buttons are designed to meet accessibility and usability requirements. Installing related utility programs enables full functionality of the special keys and buttons. Your systems best features should be easy to access and understand. With Lenovo Companion, they are. Use Lenovo Companion to do the following:

Optimize your computers performance, monitor your computers health, and manage updates. Access your user guide, check warranty status, and view accessories customized for your computer. Read how-to articles, explore Lenovo forums, and stay up-to-date on technology news with articles and blogs from trusted sources. Lenovo Companion is filled with exclusive Lenovo content to help you learn about what you can do with your computer. Lenovo PC Experience

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) The Lenovo PC Experience program helps you work more easily and securely by providing easy access to various programs, such as Active Protection System and Lenovo Solution Center. Lenovo Settings

(Windows 10) Lenovo Solution Center

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Mobile Broadband Connect

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Message Center Plus

(Windows 7) Password Manager

(Windows 7) Power Manager

(Windows 7) REACHit

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) Recovery Media

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) The Lenovo Settings program enables you to enhance your computing experience by turning your computer into a portable hotspot, configuring camera and audio settings, optimizing your power settings, and creating and managing multiple network profiles. The Lenovo Solution Center program enables you to troubleshoot and resolve computer problems. It combines diagnostic tests, system information collection, security status, and support information, along with hints and tips for optimal system performance. The Mobile Broadband Connect program enables you to connect the computer to the mobile broadband network through a supported wireless WAN card. The Message Center Plus program automatically displays messages to inform you about important notices from Lenovo, such as alerts on system updates and alerts on conditions that require your attention. The Password Manager program automatically captures and fills in authentication information for Windows programs and Web sites. The Power Manager program provides convenient, flexible, and complete power management for the computer. It enables you to adjust your computer power settings to achieve the best balance between performance and power saving. REACHit enables you to manage all your files, no matter where they are stored, inside one single app. Connect your devices along with multiple cloud storage accounts for an easier and faster way to access your stuff. The Recovery Media program enables you to restore the contents of the hard disk drive to the factory default settings. 14 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Rescue and Recovery

(Windows 7) SHAREit

(Windows 7 and Windows 10) System Update

(Windows 7) WRITEit

(Windows 10) The Rescue and Recovery program is a one-button recovery and restore solution. It includes a set of self-recovery tools to help you diagnose computer problems, get help, and recover from system crashes, even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. The SHAREit program enables you to share files easily and rapidly across devices such as computers and smartphones, even without any Internet connection. You can connect to your friends and send photos, folders, and other files through SHAREit. Every sharing is quick and simple. The System Update program enables you to keep the software on the computer up-to-date by downloading and installing software packages, including device drivers, Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) basic input/output system

(BIOS) updates, and other third-party programs. WRITEit gives you instant handwriting input wherever you need it. You can write directly in any app and text field, edit text in real-time, see your full screen, and convert your handwriting into digital text. Chapter 1. Product overview 15 16 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 2. Using your computer This chapter contains the following topics:

Registering your computer on page 17 Frequently asked questions on page 17 Getting help about the Windows operating system on page 18 Special keys on page 19 ThinkPad pointing device on page 21 Power management on page 25 Connecting to the network on page 29 Using an external display on page 31 Using audio features on page 33 Using the camera on page 33 Using a flash media card on page 34 Registering your computer When you register your computer, information is entered into a database, which enables Lenovo to contact you in case of a recall or other severe problem. In addition, some locations offer extended privileges and services to registered users. When you register your computer with Lenovo, you also will receive the following benefits:

Quicker service when you call Lenovo for help Automatic notification of free software and special promotional offers To register your computer with Lenovo, go to http://www.lenovo.com/register and follow the instructions on the screen to register your computer. If you are using a Windows 7 operating system, you also can register your computer through the preinstalled Lenovo Product Registration program. The program launches automatically after you have used your computer for a period of time. Follow the instructions on the screen to register your computer. Frequently asked questions The following are a few tips that will help you optimize the use of your computer. To ensure that you receive the best performance from your computer, go to the following Web page to find information such as aids for troubleshooting and answers to frequently asked questions:

http://www.lenovo.com/support/faq Can I get my user guide in another language?

To download the user guide in another language, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support. Then follow the instructions on the screen. How to turn off my computer?

Copyright Lenovo 2016 17 For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, and then click Shut down. For Windows 10: Open the Start menu, click Power, and then click Shut down. How do I access Control Panel?

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, and then click Control Panel. For Windows 10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel. How to use the battery power more effectively?

To conserve power, or to suspend operation without exiting programs or saving files, see Power-saving modes on page 27. To achieve the best balance between performance and power saving, create and apply power plans. See Managing the battery power on page 26 If your computer will be turned off for an extended period of time, you can prevent battery power from draining by removing the battery. Look for more information about using the battery in Power management on page 25. Concerned about security or need to securely dispose of data stored on your internal storage drive?

Study Chapter 5 Security on page 45 to find out how you can protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. Use the Password Manager program to protect the data stored on your computer. For details, see the help information system of the program. Before you dispose of the data on the internal storage drive, be sure to read Notice on deleting data from your internal storage drive on page 51. Need to give presentations or attach an external monitor often?

Ensure that you follow the procedure in the topic Connecting an external display on page 31. With the Extend desktop function, you can display output on both the computer display and an external monitor. You have been using your computer for some time already, and it is getting slower?

Follow the General tips for preventing problems on page 71. Diagnose problems yourself by using the preinstalled diagnostic software. See Diagnosing problems on page 77. Check for recovery solutions in Chapter 9 Recovery overview on page 95. Print the following sections and keep them with your computer in case you are unable to access this online help when necessary. Installing a new operating system on page 53 Computer stops responding on page 77 Power problems on page 91 Getting help about the Windows operating system The Windows help information system provides you with detailed information about using the Windows operating system to help you get the most of your computer. To access the Windows help information system, do one of the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, and then click Help and Support. 18 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide For Windows 10: Open the Start menu, and then click Get started from the right panel. Additionally, you can search from the taskbar to find help, apps, files, settings, and so on. Special keys Your computer has several special keys to help you work more easily and effectively. Note: Depending on the model, your computer might look different from the following illustration. 1 Additional shortcut keys Your computer might have four additional shortcut keys:

: Launches calculator

: Locks operating system

: Opens the default browser

: Opens Computer 2 Windows key Press the Windows key to open the Start menu. For information about using the Windows key with other keys, refer to the help information system of the Windows operating system. 3 4 Fn key and function keys You can configure the Fn key 4 and function keys 5 in the Keyboard Properties window by doing the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and then change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Keyboard. In the Keyboard Properties window, click the Fn and function keys tab. Chapter 2. Using your computer 19 3. Select the options of your preference.

+

: Enables or disables the Fn Lock function. When the Fn Lock function is disabled: The Fn Lock indicator is off (default mode). To initiate the special function printed as an icon on each key, press the function key directly. To input F1-F12, press the Fn key and the corresponding function key. When the Fn Lock function is enabled: The Fn Lock indicator turns on. To input F1-F12, press the function keys directly. To initiate the special function printed as an icon on each key, press the Fn key and the corresponding function key.

: Mutes or unmutes the speakers. When the speakers are muted, the speaker-mute indicator turns on. If you mute the sound and turn off your computer, the sound will remain muted when you turn on your computer again. To turn on the sound, press F1, F2, or F3.

: Decreases the speaker volume.

: Increases the speaker volume.

: Mutes or unmutes the microphones. When the microphones are muted, the microphone-mute indicator turns on.

: Darkens the display.

: Brightens the display. You can temporarily change the computer display brightness by pressing the two keys. To change the default brightness level, right-click the battery-status icon in the Windows notification area. Then click Adjust screen brightness and make changes as desired.

: Manages external displays. For more information, refer to Using an external display on page 31. Note: To switch between the computer display and an external monitor, the Windows+P key combination also is available.

: Enables or disables wireless features. For more information on the wireless features, refer to Wireless connections on page 29.

:

Windows 7: Opens Control Panel. Windows 10: Opens the Settings window.

:

Windows 7: Opens Windows Search. Windows 10: Opens the Cortana search box.

: Views the programs that you have opened.

:

Windows 7: Opens Computer. Windows 10: Views all the programs. Fn+B: Has the same function as the Break key. Fn+P: Has the same function as the Pause key. Fn+S: Has the same function as the SysRq key. 20 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Fn+K: Has the same function as the ScrLK key. Fn+4: Puts the computer into sleep mode. To return to normal operation, press the Fn key or power button. Fn+Q: Toggles between the performance mode and quiet mode ThinkPad pointing device The ThinkPad pointing device enables you to perform all the functions of a traditional mouse, such as pointing, clicking, and scrolling. With the ThinkPad pointing device, you also can perform a variety of touch gestures, such as rotating and zooming in or out. The ThinkPad pointing device consists of the following two devices:

1 TrackPoint pointing device 2 Trackpad By default, both the TrackPoint pointing device and the trackpad are active with the touch gestures enabled. To change the settings, see Customizing the ThinkPad pointing device on page 24. TrackPoint pointing device The TrackPoint pointing device enables you to perform all the functions of a traditional mouse, such as pointing, clicking, and scrolling. Chapter 2. Using your computer 21 The TrackPoint pointing device consists of the following four components:

1 Pointing stick 2 Left-click button (primary-click button) 3 Right-click button (secondary-click button) 4 Scroll bar To use the TrackPoint pointing device, refer to the following instructions:

Note: Place your hands in the typing position and use your index finger or middle finger to apply pressure to the pointing-stick nonslip cap. Use either thumb to press the left-click button or right-click button. Point Use the pointing stick 1 to move the pointer on the screen. To use the pointing stick, apply pressure to the pointing-stick nonslip cap in any direction parallel to the keyboard. The pointer moves accordingly but the pointing stick itself does not move. The speed at which the pointer moves depends on the amount of pressure you apply to the pointing stick. Left-click Press the left-click button 2 to select or open an item. Right-click Press the right-click button 3 to display a shortcut menu. Scroll Press and hold the dotted scroll bar 4 while applying pressure to the pointing stick in the vertical or horizontal direction. Then you can scroll through the document, Web site, or apps. Trackpad The entire trackpad is sensitive to finger touch and movement. You can use the trackpad to perform all the pointing, clicking, and scrolling functions of a traditional mouse. 22 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide The trackpad can be divided into two zones by its function:

1 Left-click zone (primary-click zone) 2 Right-click zone (secondary-click zone) To use the trackpad, refer to the following instructions:

Point Slide one finger across the surface of the trackpad to move the pointer accordingly. Left-click Press the left-click zone 1 to select or open an item. You also can tap anywhere on the surface of the trackpad with one finger to perform the left-click action. Right-click Press the right-click zone 2 to display a shortcut menu. You also can tap anywhere on the surface of the trackpad with two fingers to perform the right-click action. Scroll Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them in the vertical or horizontal direction. This action enables you to scroll through the document, Web site, or apps. Ensure that you position your two fingers slightly apart from each other. With the trackpad, you also can perform a variety of touch gestures. For information about using the touch gestures, see Trackpad touch gestures on page 23. Trackpad touch gestures The entire trackpad surface is sensitive to finger touch and movement. You can use the trackpad to perform the same point and click actions as you would using a traditional mouse. You also can use the trackpad to perform a variety of touch gestures. The following section introduces some frequently used touch gestures such as tapping, dragging, and scrolling. For more gestures, see the help information system of the ThinkPad pointing device. Notes:

When using two or more fingers, ensure that you position your fingers slightly apart. Some gestures are not available if the last action was done from the TrackPoint pointing device. Some gestures are only available when you are using certain apps. Chapter 2. Using your computer 23 Tap Tap anywhere on the trackpad with one finger to select or open an item. Two-finger scroll Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them in the vertical or horizontal direction. This action enables you to scroll through the document, Web site, or apps. Two-finger zoom in Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them farther apart to zoom in. Two-finger tap Tap anywhere on the trackpad with two fingers to display a shortcut menu. Two-finger zoom out Put two fingers on the trackpad and move them closer together to zoom out. The following section introduces some touch gestures on the Windows 10 operating system. Swipe three fingers up Put three fingers on the trackpad and move them up to open the task view to see all your open windows. Swipe three fingers down Put three fingers on the trackpad and move them down to show the desktop. Customizing the ThinkPad pointing device You can customize the ThinkPad pointing device so you can use it more comfortably and efficiently. For example, you can choose to enable the TrackPoint pointing device, the trackpad, or both. You also can disable or enable the touch gestures. To customize the ThinkPad pointing device, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Mouse. The Mouse Properties window is displayed. 3. In the Mouse Properties window, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the customization. Replacing the cap of pointing stick The cap 1 on the end of the pointing stick is removable. After you use the cap for a period of time, you might consider replacing the cap with a new one. Note: Ensure that you use a cap with grooves a as shown in the following illustration. 24 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Power management When you use your computer away from electrical outlets, you depend on battery power to keep your computer running. Different computer components consume power at different rates. The more you use the power-intensive components, the faster you consume battery power. Spend more time unplugged with ThinkPad batteries. Mobility has revolutionized business by enabling you to take your work wherever you go. With ThinkPad batteries, you will be able to work longer without being tied to an electrical outlet. Using the ac power The power to run your computer can come either from the battery or from ac power. While you use ac power, the batteries charge automatically. Your computer comes with an ac power adapter and a power cord. ac power adapter: Converts ac power for notebook computer use. Power cord: Connects the ac outlet and the ac power adapter. Connecting to ac power To connect the computer to ac power, do the following:

Attention: Using an improper power cord might cause severe damage to your computer. Note: Ensure that you perform the actions in the order in which they are listed. 1. Connect the power cord to the ac power adapter. 2. Connect the ac power adapter to the power connector of the computer. 3. Connect the power cord into an electrical outlet. Tips for using the ac power adapter When the ac power adapter is not in use, disconnect it from the electrical outlet. Do not bind the power cord tightly around the ac power adapter transformer pack when it is connected to the transformer. Before you charge the batteries, make sure that their temperature is at least 10C (50F). You can charge the batteries when the ac power adapter is connected to the computer. You need to charge the batteries in any of the following situations:

Chapter 2. Using your computer 25 When the battery icon in the Windows notification area shows a low percentage of battery power remaining When the batteries have not been used for a long time Checking the battery status Move your pointer to the battery-status icon in the Windows notification area to check the battery status. The battery-status icon displays the percentage of battery power remaining and how long you can use your computer before you must charge the battery. The rate at which you use battery power determines how long you can use the batteries of your computer between charges. Because of different user habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:

How much energy is stored in the battery when you begin to work The way you use your computer, for example:

How often you access the storage drive How bright you make the computer display How often you use the wireless features Charging the battery It is recommended that you charge the battery or replace it with a charged battery when the battery power remaining is low. For example:

When you find that the percentage of power remaining is low When the power alarm alerts you If an ac outlet is convenient, plug the ac power adapter into it, and then insert the connector into the computer. The battery will be fully charged in about three to six hours. The charging time is affected by the battery size and the physical environment. You can check the battery charging status at any time through the battery-status icon in the Windows notification area. Note: To maximize the life of the battery, the computer does not start recharging the battery if the remaining power is greater than 95%. Maximizing the battery life To maximize the life of the battery, do the following:

Recharge the battery completely before using it. You can see whether the battery is fully charged from the battery-status icon in the Windows notification area. Always use power-saving modes, such as sleep mode and hibernation mode. Managing the battery power To achieve the best balance between performance and power saving, adjust your power plan settings. To adjust power plan settings, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and then change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Power Options. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. 26 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide For more information, refer to the help information system of the program. Power-saving modes There are several modes that you can use at any time to conserve power. This section introduces each mode and gives tips on the effective use of battery power. Screen blank mode (for Windows 7 only) The computer display requires considerable battery power. To turn off the power to the display and make the computer enter screen blank mode, right-click the battery-gauge icon in the windows notification area and select Power off display. Sleep mode In sleep mode, your work is saved to memory, and then the storage drive and the computer display are turned off. When your computer wakes up, your work is restored within seconds. To put your computer into sleep mode, press Fn+4. You also can put the computer into sleep mode by doing the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Sleep from the menu displayed. For Windows 10: Open the Start menu, click Power, and then click Sleep. Hibernation mode By using this mode, you can turn off your computer completely without saving files or exiting any programs that are running. When the computer enters hibernation mode, all open programs, folders, and files are saved to the storage devices, and then the computer turns off. To put the computer into hibernation mode, do the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Start menu, click the arrow next to the Shut down button, and then click Hibernate from the menu displayed. For Windows 10: Define what the power button does first, and then press the power button to put the computer into hibernation mode. For more information, see Front view for models with a 2D camera on page 1 or Front view for models with a 3D camera on page 3. If you put your computer into hibernation mode with the wake-up function disabled, the computer does not consume any power. The wake-up function is disabled by default. If you put your computer into hibernation mode with the wake-up function enabled, the computer consumes a small amount of power. To enable the wake-up function, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel and click System and Security. 2. Click Administrative Tools. 3. Click Task Scheduler. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 4. From the left pane, select the task folder for which you want to enable the wake-up function. The scheduled tasks are displayed. 5. Click a scheduled task, and then click the Conditions tab. 6. Under Power, select the check box for Wake the computer to run this task. Wireless off When you are not using the wireless features, such as Bluetooth or wireless LAN, turn them off. This helps conserve power. To turn off the wireless features, press the wireless-radios control key

. Chapter 2. Using your computer 27 Handling the battery This system supports only batteries specially designed for this specific system and manufactured by Lenovo or an authorized builder. The system does not support unauthorized batteries or batteries designed for other systems. If an unauthorized battery or a battery designed for another system is installed, the system will not charge. Attention: Lenovo has no responsibility for the performance or safety of unauthorized batteries, and provides no warranties for failures or damage arising out of their use. Note: If an unauthorized battery is installed, the following message will be displayed: The battery installed is not supported by this system and will not charge. Please replace the battery with the correct Lenovo battery for this system. DANGER Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the battery. Attempting to do so can cause an explosion, or liquid leakage from the battery. A battery other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery is not covered by the warranty. DANGER If the rechargeable battery is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:

Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo. Keep the battery away from fire. Do not expose it to excessive heat. Do not expose it to water or rain. Do not short-circuit it. Store it in a cool dry place. Keep it away from children. The battery is a consumable supply. If your battery begins to discharge too quickly, replace the battery with a new one of the type recommended by Lenovo. For more information about replacing the battery, contact your Customer Support Center. DANGER Do not drop, crush, puncture the battery, or make it subject to strong forces. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame to vent from the battery or coin-cell battery. If your battery is damaged, or if you notice any discharge from your battery or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads, stop using the battery and obtain a replacement from the battery manufacturer. DANGER Only recharge the battery strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. 28 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide DANGER Do not put the battery in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your company's safety standards. DANGER There is a danger of an explosion if the coin-cell battery is incorrectly placed. The lithium battery contains lithium and can explode if it is not properly handled, or disposed of. Replace only with a battery of the same type. To avoid possible injury or death, do not: (1) throw or immerse into water,

(2) allow it to heat to more than 100C (212F), or (3) attempt to repair or disassemble it. Dispose of it as required by local ordinances or regulations and your company's safety standards. Connecting to the network Your computer has one or more network cards that enable you to connect your computer to the Internet and other network connections. Ethernet connections You can connect your computer to a local network or a broadband connection by using the built-in Ethernet feature of the computer. DANGER Your computer has an Ethernet connector. To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not connect the telephone cable to the Ethernet connector. Wireless connections Wireless connection is the transfer of data without the use of cables but by means of radio waves only. In the Airplane mode, all wireless features are disabled. To disable the Airplane mode on the Windows 10 operating system, open the Start menu and click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. Then turn off the Airplane mode. Depending on the wireless devices installed on your computer, you might be able to use the following wireless networks:

Wireless-LAN connection Wireless-WAN connection Bluetooth connection Using the wireless-LAN connection A wireless local area network (LAN) covers a relatively small geographic area, such as an office building or a house. Devices based on the 802.11 standards can connect to this type of network. Your computer comes with a built-in wireless network card and a configuration utility to help you establish wireless connections and monitor the connection status. This enables you to stay connected to your network while you are at the office, in a meeting room, or at home, with no need for a wired connection. Chapter 2. Using your computer 29 To establish a wireless-LAN connection, do the following:

1. Click the wireless-network-connection-status icon in the Windows notification area. A list of available wireless networks is displayed. 2. Double-click a network to connect to it. Provide required information if needed. The computer automatically connects to an available wireless network when the location changes. Open Network and Sharing Center to manage multiple network profiles. For more information, refer to the Windows help information system. Tips for using the wireless-LAN feature To achieve the best connection, use the following guidelines:

Place your computer so that there are as few obstacles as possible between the wireless-LAN access point and the computer. Open your computer lid to an angle of slightly more than 90 degrees. If you use the wireless feature (the 802.11 standards) of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth option, the data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be degraded. Checking the wireless-LAN connection status You can check the wireless-LAN connection status through the wireless-network-connection-status icon in the Windows notification area. The more bars encompassed, the better the signal is. For the Windows 7 operating system, you also can check the Access Connections gauge, the Access Connections status icon, or the Access Connections wireless status icon in the Windows notification area. Access Connections gauge:

Power to the wireless radio is off or no signal. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is poor. To improve signal strength, move your computer closer to the wireless access point. is marginal. is excellent. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection Access Connections status icon:

No location profile is active or none exists. Current location profile is disconnected. Current location profile is connected. Access Connections wireless status icon Power to the wireless radio is off. Power to the wireless radio is on. No association. Power to the wireless radio is on. No signal. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is excellent. Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is marginal. 30 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Power to the wireless radio is on. The signal strength of the wireless connection is poor. To improve signal strength, move your computer closer to the wireless access point. Using the Bluetooth connection Bluetooth can connect devices that are a short distance from one another. It is commonly used for connecting peripheral devices to a computer, transferring data between hand-held devices and a personal computer, or remotely controlling and communicating with devices such as mobile phones. Depending on the model, your computer might support the Bluetooth feature. To transfer data through the Bluetooth feature, do the following:

Note: If you use the wireless feature (the 802.11 standards) of your computer simultaneously with a Bluetooth option, the data transmission speed can be delayed and the performance of the wireless feature can be degraded. 1. Ensure that the Bluetooth feature is enabled. For Windows 7: Press the wireless-radios control key For Windows 10: Do one of the following:

and turn on the Bluetooth feature. Open the Start menu and then clickSettings. IfSettings is not displayed, clickAll apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Devices Bluetooth. Turn on the Bluetooth feature. Open the Start menu and then clickSettings. IfSettings is not displayed, clickAll apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. Turn on the Bluetooth feature. 2. Right-click the data that you want to send. 3. Select Send To Bluetooth Devices. 4. Select a Bluetooth device, and then follow the instructions on the screen. For more information, refer to the Windows help information system and the Bluetooth help information system. Using an external display You can use an external display such as a projector or a monitor to give presentations or to expand your workspace. This topic introduces how to connect an external display, choose display modes, and change display settings. Your computer supports up to 4096 x 2304 video resolution, with an external display connected to the HDMI connector. For more information about the external display, refer to the manuals provided with it. Connecting an external display You can use either a wired display or a wireless display. The wired display can be connected to the HDMI by a cable. The wireless display can be added through the Wi-Di or Miracast function. Connecting a wired display Note: When you connect an external monitor, a video interface cable with a ferrite core is required. 1. Connect the external display to an appropriate video connector on your computer, such as the HDMI connector. 2. Connect the external display to an electrical outlet. Chapter 2. Using your computer 31 3. Turn on the external display. If your computer cannot detect the external display, do the following:

For Windows 7: Right-click on the desktop, and then click Screen resolution Detect. For Windows 10: Right-click on the desktop, and then click Display settings Detect. Connecting a wireless display Note: To use a wireless display, ensure that both your computer and the external display support the Wi-Di or Miracast feature. For Windows 7: Start the Intel Wi-Di program. Select the desired wireless display in the list and follow the instructions on the screen. For Windows 10: Do one of the following:

Open the Start menu and then clickSettings. IfSettings is not displayed, clickAll apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Devices Connected devices Add a device. Click the action center icon on the taskbar. Click Connect. Select the desired wireless display and follow the instructions on the screen. For more information, refer to the Windows help information system. Choosing a display mode You can display your desktop and apps on the computer display, the external display, or both. To choose how to display the video output, press the display-mode switching key mode you prefer. and then select a display There are four display modes:

Disconnect: Displays the video output only on your computer screen. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Disconnect, PC screen only, Computer only, or Disconnect projector. Duplicate: Displays the same video output on both your computer screen and an external display. Extend: Extends the video output from your computer display to an external display. You can drag and move items between the two displays. Projector only: Shows the video output only on an external display. Note: Depending on the situation, you might see Projector only or Second screen only. Note: If you show DOS or programs using DirectDraw or Direct3D in full-screen mode, only the main display shows the video output. Changing display settings You can change the settings for both the computer display and the external display. For example, you can define which one is the main display and which one is the secondary display. You also can change the resolution and orientation. To change display settings, do the following:

1. Right-click on the desktop and select Screen resolution or Display settings. 2. Select the display that you want to configure. 3. Change display settings as you want. 32 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Note: If you set a higher resolution for the computer display than the external display, only part of the screen can be shown on the external display. Using audio features Your computer is equipped with the following items:

Speakers Microphones Audio connector, 3.5 mm (0.14 inch) in diameter Your computer also has an audio chip that enables you to enjoy various multimedia audio features, such as the following:

Compliant with Intel High Definition Audio Playback of Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) and Moving Picture Experts Group Audio Layer-3

(MP3) files Recording and playback of pulse-code modulation (PCM) and Waveform Audio File Format (WAV) files Recording from various sound sources, such as a headset attached The following table shows which functions of the audio devices attached to the connectors on your computer. Table 1. Audio feature list Connector Audio connector Headset with a 3.5mm, 4-pole plug Headphone and microphone functions supported Conventional headphone Conventional microphone Headphone function supported Not supported Configuring for sound recording To configure the microphone for optimal sound recording, use the SmartAudio program. To start the program, go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound SmartAudio. Using the camera Depending on the model, your computer comes with a 2D camera or a 3D camera. The 3D camera works with certain third-party apps, such as apps provided by Intel. The performance parameters of the 3D camera vary depending on the app you use. To learn how to use the 3D camera with a specific app and to view the performance parameters, search for the related information from the Intel Web site. To start the camera and configure the camera settings, do the following:

For Windows 7: Open the Communications Utility program. For Windows 10: Open the Start menu, and click Camera from the all apps list. When the camera starts, the green camera-in-use indicator turns on. You also can use the integrated camera with other programs that provide features such as photographing, video capturing, and video conferencing. To use the camera with other programs, open one of the programs and start the photographing, video capturing, or video conferencing function. Then, the camera starts automatically and the green camera-in-use indicator turns on. For more information about using the camera with a program, refer to the help information system of the program. Chapter 2. Using your computer 33 Configuring camera settings You can configure the camera settings to meet your needs, such as adjusting the quality of the video output. To configure the camera settings, do the following: To configure the camera settings, do the following:

For Windows 7: Start the Communications Utility program and configure the camera settings as desired. For Windows 10: Do one of the following:

Open the Camera app, and click the settings icon in the upper-right corner. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the camera settings as desired. Click Lenovo Settings from the Start menu. Then click Camera. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure the camera settings as desired. Using a flash media card Your computer has one media card reader slot. The media card reader slot supports the following four types of cards:

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Secure Digital eXtended-Capacity (SDXC) card Secure Digital (SD) card Secure Digital High-Capacity (SDHC) card Note: Your computer does not support the content protection for recordable media (CPRM) feature for the SD card Attention: While transferring data to or from a flash media card, such as an SD card, do not put your computer into sleep or hibernation mode before the data transfer completes; otherwise, your data could become damaged. Inserting a flash media card Attention: Before you start installing a flash media card, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. To insert a flash media card, do the following:

1. Locate the appropriate type of slot for your card. See Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators on page 1. 2. Ensure that the metal contacts are facing down and pointing toward to the card slot. 3. Press the card firmly into the card slot. If the plug-and-play feature is not enabled, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 4. From the Action menu, select Add legacy hardware. The Add Hardware Wizard starts. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen. 34 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Removing a flash media card Attention:

Stop all the activities involving the card before removing it. Otherwise, data on the card might be damaged or lost. Do not remove a card while the computer is in sleep mode or hibernation mode. Otherwise, the system might not respond when you try to resume operation. To remove a flash media card, do the following:

1. Click the triangular icon in the Windows notification area to show hidden icons. 2. Right-click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon. 3. Select the corresponding item to eject the card from the Windows operating system. 4. Press the card to eject it from your computer. 5. Remove the card and store it safely for future use. Note: If you do not remove the card from your computer after you eject the card from the Windows operating system, the card can no longer be accessed. To access the card, you must remove it first, and then insert it again. Chapter 2. Using your computer 35 36 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 3. Enhancing your computer This chapter contains the following topic:

Finding ThinkPad options on page 37 Finding ThinkPad options If you want to expand the capabilities of your computer, Lenovo has a number of hardware accessories and upgrades to meet your needs. Options include memory modules, storage devices, network cards, port replicators, batteries, power adapters, printers, scanners, keyboards, mice, and more. You can shop at Lenovo 24 hours a day, 7 days a week directly over the World Wide Web. All you need is an Internet connection and a credit card. To shop at Lenovo, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/accessories/services/index.html Copyright Lenovo 2016 37 38 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 4. You and your computer This chapter contains the following topics:

Accessibility and comfort on page 39 Traveling with your computer on page 43 Accessibility and comfort Good ergonomic practice is important to get the most from your personal computer and to avoid discomfort. Arrange your workplace and the equipment you use to suit your individual needs and the kind of work that you perform. In addition, use healthy work habits to maximize your performance and comfort while using your computer. The following topics provide information about arranging your work area, setting up your computer equipment, and establishing healthy work habits. Lenovo is committed to providing the latest information and technology to our customers with disabilities. Refer to the accessibility information that outlines our efforts in this area. See Accessibility information on page 40. Ergonomic information Working in the virtual office might mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. For example, adapting to the surrounding light sources, proper seating, and the placement of your computer hardware, can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort. This example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even when not in such a setting, you can follow many of these tips. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well. General posture: Make minor modifications in your working posture to deter the onset of discomfort caused by long periods of working in the same position. Frequent short breaks from your work also help to prevent minor discomfort associated with your working posture. Display: Position the display to maintain a comfortable viewing distance of 510-760 mm (20-30 inches). Avoid glare or reflections on the display from overhead lighting or outside sources of light. Keep the display screen clean and set the brightness to levels that enable you to see the screen clearly. Press F5 or F6 to adjust display brightness. Head position: Keep your head and neck in a comfortable and neutral (vertical, or upright) position. Chair: Use a chair that gives you good back support and seat height adjustment. Use chair adjustments to best suit your desired posture. Copyright Lenovo 2016 39 Arm and hand position: If available, use chair arm rests or an area on your working surface to provide weight support for your arms. Keep your forearms, wrists, and hands in a relaxed and neutral (horizontal) position. Type with a soft touch without pounding the keys. Leg position: Keep your thighs parallel to the floor and your feet flat on the floor or on a footrest. What if you are traveling?

It might not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, will help you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance. Questions about vision?

The visual display screens of ThinkPad notebook computers are designed to meet the highest standards and to provide you with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Of course, any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a vision-care specialist for advice. Comfort Observe the following guidelines to achieve greater comfort and improve performance. Active sitting and rest breaks: The longer you sit and work with your computer, the more important it is to observe your working posture. Follow Ergonomic information on page 39 and practice active sitting to avoid discomfort associated with your working postures. Making minor voluntary postural changes and taking short frequent work breaks are the key ingredients for healthy computing. Your computer is light and mobile; you can easily reposition your working surface to accommodate many posture modifications. Work area setup options: Familiarize yourself with all of your office furniture so that you know how to adjust your work surface, seat, and other work tools to accommodate your preferences for comfort. If your work area is not in an office setting, be sure to take special note of employing active sitting and taking work breaks. Many ThinkPad product solutions are available to help you modify and expand your computer to best suit your needs. You can find some of these options athttp://www.lenovo.com/accessories/services/index.html. Accessibility information Lenovo is committed to providing users who have hearing, vision, and mobility limitations with greater access to information and technology. This section provides information about the ways these users can get the most out of their computer experience. You also can get the most up-to-date accessibility information from the following Web site:

http://www.lenovo.com/accessibility Keyboard shortcuts The following table contains keyboard shortcuts that can help make your computer easier to use. Note: Depending on your keyboard, some of the following keyboard shortcuts might not be available. Keyboard shortcut Windows logo key + U Right Shift for eight seconds Shift five times Function Open Ease of Access Center Turn on or turn off Filter Keys Turn on or turn off Sticky Keys 40 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Keyboard shortcut Num Lock for five seconds Left Alt+Left Shift+Num Lock Left Alt+Left Shift+PrtScn (or PrtSc) Function Turn on or turn off Toggle Keys Turn on or turn off Mouse Keys Turn on or turn off High Contrast For more information, go to http://windows.microsoft.com/, and then perform a search using any of the following keywords: keyboard shortcuts, key combinations, shortcut keys. Ease of Access Center Ease of Access Center on the Windows operating system enables users to configure their computers to suit their physical and cognitive needs. To use Ease of Access Center, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and ensure that you view Control Panel using Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Ease of Access Center. 3. Choose the appropriate tool by following the instructions on the screen. Ease of Access Center mainly includes the following tools:

Magnifier Magnifier is a useful utility that enlarges the entire screen or part of the screen so that you can see the items better. Narrator Narrator is a screen reader that reads what is displayed on the screen aloud and describes events such as error messages. On-Screen Keyboard If you prefer to type or enter data into your computer using a mouse, joysick, or other pointing device instead of a physical keyboard, you can use On-Screen Keyboard. On-Screen Keyboard displays a visual keyboard with all the standard keys. You can select keys using the mouse or another pointing device, or you can tap to select the keys if your computer supports multi-touch screen. High Contrast High Contrast is a feature that heightens the color contrast of some text and images on your screen. As a result, those items are more distinct and easier to identify. Personalized keyboard Adjust keyboard settings to make your keyboard easier to use. For example, you can use your keyboard to control the pointer and make the keyboard easier to type certain key combinations. Personalized mouse Adjust mouse settings to make your mouse easier to use. For example, you can change the pointer appearance and make your mouse easier to manage windows. Speech Recognition Speech Recognition enables you to control your computer by voice. Using only your voice, you can start programs, open menus, click objects on the screen, dictate text into documents, and write and send e-mails. Everything you do with the keyboard and mouse can be done with only your voice. To use Speech Recognition, do the following:

Chapter 4. You and your computer 41 1. Go to Control Panel, and ensure that you view Control Panel using Category. 2. Click Ease of Access Speech Recognition. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Screen-reader technologies Screen-reader technologies are primarily focused on software program interfaces, help information systems, and various online documents. For additional information about screen readers, see the following:

Using PDFs with screen readers:

http://www.adobe.com/accessibility.html?promoid=DJGVE Using the JAWS screen reader:

http://www.freedomscientific.com/jaws-hq.asp Using the NVDA screen reader:

http://www.nvaccess.org/

Screen resolution You can make the text and images on your screen easier to read by adjusting the screen resolution of your computer. To adjust the screen resolution, do the following:

1. Right-click an empty area of the desktop and select Screen resolution. 2. Follow the instructions on the screen. Note: Setting a resolution too low might prevent some items from fitting on the screen. Customizable item size You can make the items on your screen easier to read by changing the item size. To change the item size temporarily, use the Magnifier tool in Ease of Access Center. See Ease of Access Center on page 41. To change the item size permanently, do the following:

Change the size of all the items on your screen. 1. Go to Control Panel, and ensure that you view Control Panel using Category. 2. Click Appearance and Personalization Display. 3. Change the item size by following the instructions on the screen. 4. Click Apply. This change will take effect the next time you log in to the operating system. Change the size of the items on a Web page. Press and hold Ctrl, and then press the plus-sign key (+) to enlarge or the minus-sign key (-) to reduce the text size. Change the size of the items on the desktop or a window. Note: This function might not work on some windows. If your mouse has a wheel, press and hold Ctrl, and then scroll the wheel to change the item size. Industry-standard connectors Your computer provides industry-standard connectors that enable you to connect assistive devices. For more information about the location and function of the connectors, see Locating computer controls, connectors, and indicators on page 1. 42 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Documentation in accessible formats Lenovo provides electronic documentation in accessible formats, such as properly tagged PDF files or HyperText Markup Language (HTML) files. Lenovo electronic documentation is developed to ensure that visually impaired users can read the documentation through a screen reader. Each image in the documentation also includes adequate alternative text so that visually impaired users can understand the image when they use a screen reader. Traveling with your computer This topic provides information to help you work with your computer when you are travelling. Travel tips Use the following travel tips to travel more confidently and efficiently with your computer. Although it is safe to allow your computer to go through the x-ray machines at airport security stations, it is important to keep your eyes on the computer at all times to prevent theft. Consider bringing an electrical adapter for use in an airplane or automobile. If you carry an ac power adapter, detach the ac cord from it to avoid damaging the cord. Travel tips on airplanes If you carry your computer into an airplane, take note of the following tips:

If you intend to use your computer or wireless services (such as Internet and Bluetooth), check with the airline for restrictions and availability of services before boarding the airplane. If there are restrictions on the use of computers with wireless features on the airplane, you must abide by those restrictions. If necessary, enable the Airplane mode before boarding. In the Airplane mode, all wireless features are disabled. To enable the Airplane mode on the Windows 10 operating system, open the Start menu and click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and click Settings Network & Internet Airplane mode. Then turn on the Airplane mode. Be careful about the seat in front of you on airplanes. Angle your computer display so that it does not get caught when the person in front of you leans back. When taking off, remember to turn off your computer or put it into hibernation mode. Travel accessories The following is a checklist of items to consider packing when you are going to travel:

ThinkPad ac power adapter External mouse, if you are accustomed to using one Ethernet cable A quality carrying case that provides adequate cushion and protection External storage device If you are traveling to another country, you might want to consider an ac power adapter for the country to which you are travelling. To purchase travel accessories, go to http://www.lenovo.com/accessories. Chapter 4. You and your computer 43 44 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 5. Security This chapter contains the following topics:

Attaching a mechanical lock on page 45 Using passwords on page 45 Hard disk security on page 50 Setting the security chip on page 50 Notice on deleting data from your internal storage drive on page 51 Using firewalls on page 52 Protecting data against viruses on page 52 Attaching a mechanical lock You can attach a mechanical lock to your computer, to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. Attach a mechanical lock to the keyhole of the computer; then secure the chain on the lock to a stationary object. Refer to the instructions shipped with the mechanical lock. Note: You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking device and security feature. Lenovo makes no comments, judgments, or warranties about the function, quality, or performance of the locking device and security feature. Using passwords You can help prevent your computer from unauthorized use by using passwords. Once you set a password, a prompt is displayed on the screen each time you turn on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. You cannot use the computer unless you type the correct password. If you have set a power-on password, a supervisor password, or a hard disk password, it unlocks automatically when the computer resumes from sleep mode. Note: If a Windows password has been set, you will be prompted to enter it. Typing passwords When this icon is displayed, type a power-on password or a supervisor password. When this icon is displayed, type a user hard disk password. To type a master hard disk password, press F1. When the icon changes to

, type the master hard disk password Note: To return to the icon

, press F1 again. Power-on password You can set a power-on password to help protect your computer against unauthorized access. Copyright Lenovo 2016 45 If you set a power-on password, the password prompt is displayed on the screen whenever you turn on the computer. You must enter the correct password to start using the computer. Setting, changing, or removing a power-on password Before you start, print these instructions. To set, change, or remove a power-on password, do the following:

1. Restart your computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to start the ThinkPad Setup program. 2. Select Security Password Power-on Password by using the directional keys. 3. Depending on your need, do one of the following:

To set a password, do the following:

a. b. In the Enter New Password field, type a desired password and press Enter. In the Confirm New Password field, retype the password and press Enter. To change a password, do the following:

a. b. In the Enter Current Password field, type the current power-on password and press Enter. In the Enter New Password field, type the new power-on password and press Enter; then retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and Press Enter. To remove a password, do the following:

In the Enter Current Password field, type the current power-on password and press Enter. a. b. Leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank. Press Enter twice. 4. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter to continue. 5. Press F10. A Setup Confirmation window is displayed. Select Yes to save the configuration changes and exit. Note: You might want to record your password and store it in a safe place. Otherwise, if you forget the password, you have to take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the password canceled. Supervisor password The supervisor password protects the system information stored in the ThinkPad Setup program. If you have set a supervisor password, no one can change the configuration of the computer without the password. It provides the following security features:

If only a supervisor password is set, a password prompt is displayed when you try to start the ThinkPad Setup program. Unauthorized users cannot access the ThinkPad Setup program without the password. The system administrator can use the supervisor password to access a computer even if the user of that computer has set a power-on password. The supervisor password overrides the power-on password. If both a supervisor password and a power-on password are set, you can do the following only if you have the supervisor password:

Changing or deleting the power-on password Changing or deleting the supervisor password Changing date and time Specifying the minimum length for power-on password and hard disk password Enabling or disabling the following features:

Wake on LAN and Flash over LAN 46 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Lock UEFI BIOS Settings Password at unattended boot Boot Device List F12 Option Boot Order Lock Flash BIOS Updating by End-Users Internal network device Internal wireless device Internal Bluetooth device Internal Network Option ROM Security mode Notes:

The system administrator can set the same supervisor password on many ThinkPad notebook computers to make administration easier. When Lock UEFI BIOS Settings option is enabled, all BIOS settings cannot be changed. To change the settings, a supervisor password is required. Setting, changing, or removing a supervisor password Before you start, print these instructions. Only a system administrator can set, change, or remove a supervisor password. To set, change, or remove a supervisor password, do the following:

1. Restart your computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to start the ThinkPad Setup program. 2. Select Security Password Supervisor Password by using the directional keys. 3. Depending on your needs, do one of the following:

To set a password, do the following:

a. b. In the Enter New Password field, type a desired password and press Enter. In the Confirm New Password field, retype the password and press Enter. To change a password, do the following:

a. b. In the Enter Current Password field, type the current supervisor password and press Enter. In the Enter New Password field, type the new supervisor password and press Enter; then retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. To remove a password, do the following:

In the Enter Current Password field, type the current supervisor password and press Enter. a. b. Leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank. Press Enter twice. 4. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter to continue. 5. Press F10. A Setup Confirmation window is displayed. Select Yes to save the configuration changes and exit. Note: You might want to record your password and store it in a safe place. The next time you open the ThinkPad Setup program, you will be prompted to type your supervisor password to proceed. If you forget your supervisor password, Lenovo cannot reset your password. You must take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a Lenovo marketing representative to have the system board replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Chapter 5. Security 47 Hard disk passwords The following two types of hard disk passwords can help protect the information stored on the hard disk drive:

User hard disk password If a user hard disk password has been set, but no master hard disk password has been, the user must enter the user hard disk password to access files and applications on the hard disk drive. Master hard disk password The master hard disk password also requires a user hard disk password. The master hard disk password is usually set and used by a system administrator. It enables the administrator to access any hard disk drive in a system like a master key. The administrator sets the master password; then assigns a user password for each computer in the network. The user can then change the user password as desired, but the administrator still can get access by using the master password. When a master hard disk password is set, only the administrator can remove the user hard disk password. Setting a hard disk password Before you start, print these instructions. To set a hard disk password, do the following:

1. Restart your computer. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to start the ThinkPad Setup program. 2. Select Security Password Hard disk 1 Password by using the directional keys. 3. A password window is displayed. You are prompted to select User or User + Master. Select User if you want to set only one hard disk password. Select User + Master if you want to set a user hard disk password and a master hard disk password, for example if you are an administrator or a supervisor. If you select User, do the following:

a. When a window for typing the new password opens, type your new password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter. In the Confirm New Password field, retype the password you just entered and press Enter. b. If you select User + Master, do the following:

a. First, set a user hard disk password. When a message window prompts you to set the user hard disk password, press Enter to continue. Type your new user hard disk password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter. Retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. b. Then, set a master hard disk password. When a message window prompts you to set the master hard disk password. Press Enter to continue. Type your new master hard disk password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter. Retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. 4. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter to continue. 5. Press F10. A Setup Confirmation window is displayed. Select Yes to save the configuration changes and exit. The next time you turn on your computer, type the user or master hard disk password to start your computer and access the operating system. Changing or removing a hard disk password To change or remove the hard disk password, do the following:

If you are in User + Master hard disk mode, you can select either User HDP or Master HDP to change the password, depending on your needs. 48 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide If you select User HDP mode, follow the following steps to change the user hard disk password:

1. Type the current user hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field and press Enter. 2. Type the new password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter; then retype the password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. 3. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter again to continue. The user hard disk password is changed. Note: The hard disk password cannot be removed in User HDP mode. If you select Master HDP mode, follow the following steps to change the master hard disk password:

1. Type the current master hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field and press Enter. 2. Type the new master hard disk password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter; then retype the new password you just entered in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. 3. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter to continue. The master hard disk password is changed. Note: If you leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank and press Enter twice, both the user and master hard disk passwords are removed. If you are in User hard disk mode, follow the following steps to change the user hard disk password:

1. Follow steps 1 through 7 in Setting a hard disk password on page 48, typing your password to get access to the ThinkPad Setup program. 2. Type the current user hard disk password in the Enter Current Password field and press Enter. 3. Type the new password in the Enter New Password field and press Enter; then retype the new password in the Confirm New Password field and press Enter. 4. A Setup Notice window is displayed. Press Enter again to continue. The user hard disk password is changed. Note: If you leave the Enter New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank and press Enter twice, the user hard disk password is removed. Tips on using the hard disk passwords You can set the minimum length of a hard disk password through the Security menu. If you set a hard disk password of over seven characters, the hard disk drive can be used only with a computer that can recognize a hard disk password of over seven characters. If you then install the hard disk drive in a computer that cannot recognize a hard disk password that contains more than seven characters, you cannot access the drive. Record your password and store it in a safe place. If you forget the user hard disk password, or both user and master hard disk passwords, Lenovo cannot reset your passwords or recover data from the hard disk drive. You must take your computer to a Lenovo reseller or a marketing representative to have the hard disk drive replaced. Proof of purchase is required, and a fee will be charged for parts and service. Notes: The eDrive storage drives or Trusted Computing Group (TCG) Opal-compliant storage drives provide self-encryption capabilities to secure your data. If a TCG Opal-compliant storage drive and a TCG Opal management software program are installed, and the TCG Opal management software program is activated, the hard disk password is not available. If an eDrive storage drive is installed in your computer, and your computer is preinstalled with the Windows 10 operating system, the hard disk password is not available. Chapter 5. Security 49 Hard disk security To protect passwords from unauthorized security attacks, refer to the following tips to maximize security:

Set a power-on password as well as a hard disk password for your internal storage drive. Refer to the procedures in Power-on password on page 45 and Hard disk passwords on page 48. For security, a longer password is recommended. Use the security chip to provide reliable security for the UEFI BIOS. Refer to Setting the security chip on page 50. If a Disk Encryption storage drive is installed in your computer, be sure to protect the contents of your computer memory from unauthorized accesses by use of drive encryption software, such as Microsoft Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption. See Using Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption on page 50. Before you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer, delete the data stored on it. For more information, refer to Notice on deleting data from your internal storage drive on page 51. The hard disk drive built into your computer can be protected by UEFI BIOS. Using Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption To help protect your computer against unauthorized access, use the drive encryption software, such as Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption. Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption is an integral security feature of some editions of the Windows operating system. It can help you protect the operating system and data stored on your computer, even if your computer is lost or stolen. BitLocker works by encrypting all user and system files, including the swap and hibernation files. BitLocker uses a Trusted Platform Module to provide enhanced protection for your data and to ensure early boot component integrity. A compatible TPM is defined as a V1.2 TPM. To check the BitLocker status, go to Control Panel, and click System and Security BitLocker Drive Encryption. For more information about Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption, see the help information system of the Windows operating system, or search for Microsoft Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption Step-by-Step Guide on the Microsoft Web site. Disk Encryption hard disk drive and Encryption solid-state drive Some models contain the Disk Encryption hard disk drive or Encryption solid-state drive. This feature helps to protect your computer against security attacks on media, NAND flash, or device controllers by use of a hardware encryption chip. For the efficient use of the encryption feature, set a hard disk password for the internal storage device. Setting the security chip Strict security requirements are imposed on network client computers that transfer confidential information electronically. Depending on the options you ordered, your computer might have an embedded security chip, a cryptographic microprocessor. With the security chip, you can do the following:

Protect your data and system Strengthen access controls Secure communications 50 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Before you start, print these instructions. To set an item on the Security Chip submenu, do the following:

1. Turn off your computer. Wait for about five seconds, and then turn on your computer again. 2. When the logo screen is displayed, press F1 to start the ThinkPad Setup program. 3. Select Security Security Chip by using the directional keys. 4. Press Enter. The Security Chip submenu opens. 5. Move to an item you want to set by using the directional keys. When the item is highlighted, press Enter. 6. Set other items that you want to set. 7. Press F10. A Setup Confirmation window is displayed. Select Yes to save the configuration changes and exit. Notes:

Ensure that the supervisor password has been set in ThinkPad Setup. Otherwise anyone can change the settings for the security chip. If the security chip is inactive or disabled, the Clear Security Chip option will not be displayed. When you clear the security chip, turn off your computer and then turn it on again after you set the security chip to Active. Otherwise, the Clear Security Chip option is not displayed. Notice on deleting data from your internal storage drive Some of the data stored on the internal storage drive might be sensitive. Handing your computer over to someone else without deleting the loaded software, such as operating systems and application software, might even violate license agreements. Be sure to delete data stored on the storage drive before you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer. You can use the following methods to delete data from the storage drive:

Move the data to the Recycle Bin, and then empty the Recycle Bin. Delete the data. Format your storage drive, using the software for initializing it. Use the recovery program provided by Lenovo to bring the storage drive back to the factory default settings. These operations, however, only change the file location of the data; they do not delete the data itself. In other words, the data retrieval processing is disabled under an operating system such as Windows. The data is still there, even though it seems to be lost. Thus, it is sometimes possible to read the data by use of special software for data recovery. There is a risk that people of bad faith might read and misuse the critical data on the storage drive for unexpected purposes. To prevent leakage of data, it is important that you delete all the data from the storage drive when you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer. You can destroy the data physically by smashing the storage drive with a hammer, or magnetically by means of strong magnetic power, thus making the data unreadable. But it is recommended that you use the software (payware) or service (pay service) developed for that purpose. The process might take several hours. For disposing of data on the solid-state drive, Lenovo provides the Drive Erase Utility for Resetting the Cryptographic Key and Erasing the Solid State Drive tool. For disposing of data on the hard disk drive, Lenovo provides the Secure Data Disposal tool. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support to download these tools. Chapter 5. Security 51 If an Encryption solid-state drive or a Disk Encryption hard disk drive or a Disk Encryption hybrid drive is supported and installed in your computer, you can logically dispose of all the data on the drive in a short time by erasing the cryptographic key. The data encrypted with the old key is not physically erased but remains on the drive; however, it cannot be decrypted without the old key. This feature is also available with the Drive Erase Utility for Resetting the Cryptographic Key and Erasing the Solid State Drive tool. Using firewalls If your system is preinstalled with a firewall program, it protects against computer Internet security threats, unauthorized access, intrusions, and Internet attacks. It also protects your privacy. For more information about how to use the firewall program, refer to the help information system that comes with the program. Protecting data against viruses Your computer is preinstalled with an antivirus program so you can detect and eliminate viruses. The antivirus program is designed to help you detect and eliminate viruses. Lenovo provides a full version of antivirus software on your computer with a free 30-day subscription. After 30 days, you must renew the license to continue receiving the antivirus software updates. For more information about how to use your antivirus software, refer to the help information system of your antivirus software. 52 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 6. Advanced configuration This chapter contains the following topics:

Installing a new operating system on page 53 Installing device drivers on page 55 Using the ThinkPad Setup program on page 55 Using system management on page 68 Installing a new operating system In some situations, you might need to install a new operating system. This topic provides instructions on how to install a new operating system. Installing the Windows 7 operating system Before you start, print these instructions. Attention: The process of installing a new operating system deletes all the data on your hard disk drive or solid-state drive, including the data that were stored in a hidden folder. To install the Windows 7 operating system, do the following:

1. Copy all the subdirectories and files in the C:\SWTOOLS directory to a removable storage device. The supplement files for the Windows 7 operating system are in the C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES directory. The device drivers are in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory. The preinstalled programs are in the C:\SWTOOLS\APPS directory. 2. Start the ThinkPad Setup program. See Using the ThinkPad Setup program on page 55. 3. Select Startup UEFI/Legacy Boot. Then do one of the following:

To install the Windows 7 (32-bit) operating system, select Legacy Only or Both. To install the Windows 7 (64-bit) operating system in Legacy mode, select Legacy Only. To install the Windows 7 (64-bit) operating system in UEFI mode, select UEFI Only. 4. Press F10 to exit the ThinkPad Setup program. 5. Insert the Windows 7 operating system installation DVD into the optical drive, and restart the computer. Note: If you are starting the installation DVD image from an external USB device, do additional configurations before you start. For more information, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/support/installwin7viausb3 6. Restore the C:\SWTOOLS directory that you backed up before installing the Windows 7 operating system. 7. Install the device drivers. See Installing device drivers on page 55. 8. Install the Windows 7 fix modules. You can find the Windows 7 fix modules in the C:\SWTOOLS\OSFIXES\

directory. For more information, go to the Microsoft Knowledge Base home page at:

http://support.microsoft.com/

9. Install the registry patches, for example the Enabling Wake on LAN from Standby for ENERGY STAR patch. To download and install the registry patches, go to the Lenovo Support Web site at:

http://www.lenovo.com/support Copyright Lenovo 2016 53 Note: After installing the operating system, do not change the initial UEFI/Legacy Boot setting in the ThinkPad Setup program. Otherwise the operating system will not start correctly. When you install the Windows 7 operating system, you might need one of the following country or region codes:

Country or region Code China Denmark Finland France Germany Italy Japan SC DK FI FR GR IT JP Country or region Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden Taiwan and Hong Kong United States Code NL NO SP SV TC US Installing the Windows 10 operating system Before you start, print these instructions. Attention: The process of installing a new operating system deletes all the data on your internal storage drive, including the data that were stored in a hidden folder. To install the Windows 10 operating system, do the following:

1. Start the ThinkPad Setup program. See Using the ThinkPad Setup program on page 55. 2. Select Startup Boot to display the Boot Priority Order submenu. 3. Select the drive that contains the operating system installation program, for example USB HDD. 4. Press the F10 key to exit the ThinkPad Setup program. 5. Connect the drive that contains the operating system installation program to the computer, and restart the computer. 6. Install the device drivers and necessary programs. See Installing device drivers on page 55. 7. After installing the device drivers, apply Windows Update to get the latest modules, for example the security patches. 8. Depending on your preference, install Lenovo programs. For information about Lenovo programs, see Lenovo programs on page 13. Note: After installing the operating system, do not change the initial UEFI/Legacy Boot setting in the ThinkPad Setup program. Otherwise, the operating system will not start correctly. When you install the Windows 10 operating system, you might need one of the following country or region codes:

Country or region Code China Denmark Finland France Germany SC DK FI FR GR 54 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Country or region Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden Taiwan and Hong Kong Code NL NO SP SV TC Italy Japan IT JP United States US Installing device drivers Device driver is the program that operates a particular hardware device of the computer. If a device does not perform well or you install a new device, you need to install or update the corresponding device driver. For example, if you use the Windows 7 operating system, to use the USB 3.0 connector, you need to download and install the USB 3.0 driver. To download the latest device drivers, do the following:

1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers. 2. Select your product name to view all the device drivers for your computer. 3. Select the device drivers you that you need, and follow the instructions on the screen. Attention: Do not download the device drivers from the Windows Update Web. Always download the device drivers from:

http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers If you use the Windows 7 operating system, you also can find the device drivers in the C:\SWTOOLS\DRIVERS directory on your storage drive. For more information, see Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device drivers on page 99. Using the ThinkPad Setup program The ThinkPad Setup program enables you to select various setup configurations for your computer through configuring the BIOS. To configure the BIOS of your computer, do the following:

1. Turn on the computer. When the ThinkPad logo is displayed, press F1. The ThinkPad Setup program starts. Note: If you are required to enter the supervisor password, enter the correct password. You also can press Enter to skip the password prompt and start the ThinkPad Setup program. If you do not enter the password, you cannot change the configurations that are protected by the supervisor password. For more information, refer to Using passwords on page 45. 2. Use the cursor keys to select a tab; or use the cursor keys to locate an item and press Enter to select it. Then a submenu is displayed. Note: Some menu items are displayed only if the computer supports the corresponding features. 3. Set the value of an item by doing one of the following:

Press the F6 key to change to a higher value. Press the F5 key to change to a lower value. Note: Default values are in boldface. 4. To change other configurations, press the Esc key to exit the submenu and return to the parent menu. 5. When you complete the configuration, press the F10 key to save and exit. You also can select the Restart tab in the ThinkPad Setup menu, and restart your computer with one of the provided options. Note: You can press the F9 key to restore to the default settings. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 55 Main menu When you enter the ThinkPad Setup program, you will first see the Main menu as follows:

UEFI BIOS Version UEFI BIOS Date (Year-Month-Day) Embedded Controller Version ME Firmware Version (available on models with an Intel CPU) Machine Type Model System-unit serial number System board serial number Asset Tag CPU Type CPU Speed Installed memory UUID MAC address (Internal LAN) Preinstalled OS License UEFI Secure Boot OA3 ID (available on Windows 10 based models) OA2 Config menu To change the configuration of your computer, select the Config tab from the ThinkPad Setup menu. The following table lists the Config menu items. Default values are in boldface. The menu items might change without notice. Depending on the model, the default value might vary. Attention: The default configurations are already optimized for you. Improper change of the configurations might cause unexpected results. Table 2. Config menu items Menu item Network Submenu item Wake On LAN Selection Disabled AC Only AC and Battery 56 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Comments Enable the computer to power on when the Ethernet controller receives a magic packet (a special network message). If you select AC Only, Wake on LAN is enabled only when the ac power adapter is attached. If you select AC and Battery, Wake on LAN is enabled with any power sources. Notes:

Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Comments Ethernet LAN Option ROM

(for Legacy Only boot mode or Both with Legacy first) UEFI IPv4 Network Stack

(for UEFI Only boot mode or Both with UEFI first) UEFI IPv6 Network Stack

(for UEFI Only boot mode or Both with UEFI first) UEFI PXE Boot Priority

(for Both with UEFI first boot mode, and IPv6 and IPv4 stacks are both enabled.) USB UEFI BIOS Support Always On USB Charge in Battery Mode USB Keyboard/Mouse Fn and Ctrl Key swap Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled IPv6 First IPv4 First Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled The magic packet type Wake on LAN requires ac power. The Wake on LAN function does not work when a hard disk password is set. Loads the Ethernet LAN Option ROM to enable startup from an integrated network device. Enable or disable Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4) network stack for the UEFI environment. Enable or disable Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) network stack for UEFI environment. Select network stack priority for UEFI PXE boot. Enables or disables boot support for USB storage devices. If you select Disabled, the external USB devices cannot be charged through USB connectors. If you select Enabled, the external USB devices can be charged through USB connectors even when system is in hibernation or power-off mode and in battery mode. Enable exchanges of Fn and Ctrl key action at the bottom-left of the keyboard. Disabled: Fn key and Ctrl key behavior is as printed on the keyboard. Enabled: Fn key works as Ctrl key. Ctrl key works as Fn key. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 57 Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item F1F12 as primary function Selection Disabled Enabled Fn Sticky key Disabled Enabled Display Boot Display Device ThinkPad LCD HDMI Total Graphics Memory 256MB 512MB Boot Time Extension Disabled 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds 58 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Comments Enable the F1-F12 function or the special function printed as an icon on each key as the primary function. Enabled: Executes the F1-F12 function. Disabled: Executes the special function. To temporarily switch the above two options, press Fn+Esc to enable FnLock. The FnLock indicator is on when FnLock is enabled. When the option is enabled, you can press the Fn key to keep it in a pressed condition; then press the desired function key. The action is equivalent to pressing the required key simultaneously with the Fn key. When you press the Fn key twice, the state is locked until you press the Fn key again. Select the display device that is to be activated at boot time. This selection is effective for boot time, password prompt, and ThinkPad Setup. Allocate total memory which Intel internal graphics device shares. If you select 512MB, the maximum usable memory might be reduced on the 32-bit operating system. Note: This submenu is available on models with an Intel CPU. This option defines the amount of time to extend the boot process, in seconds. The system cannot detect some external monitors during boot because they need a few seconds to be ready. Try this option if the Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Power Intel SpeedStep technology Disabled Enabled Adaptive Thermal Management CPU Power Management Scheme for AC Maximize Performance Balanced Scheme for Battery Maximize Performance Balanced Disabled Enabled Disable Built-in Battery Yes No Comments monitor being used does not display the boot screen. Note: This submenu is available on models with an Intel CPU. Select the mode of Intel SpeedStep technology at runtime. Maximum Performance: Always highest speed Battery Optimized:

Always lowest speed Disabled: No runtime support, lowest speed Note: This submenu is available on models with an Intel CPU. Enable or disable the power-saving feature that stops the microprocessor clock automatically when there are no computer activities. Normally, it is not necessary to change the setting. Temporary disable battery for servicing the system. After selecting this item, the system will be automatically powered off, then ready to be serviced. Note: the battery will be automatically enabled when the AC adapter is reconected. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 59 Table 2. Config menu items (continued) Menu item Beep and Alarm Submenu item Password Beep Selection Disabled Enabled Keyboard Beep Disabled Enabled Comments Enable this option to have a beep sound when the system is waiting for a power-on, hard disk, or supervisor password. Different beeps will sound when the entered password matches or does not match the configured password. Enable this option to have a beep sound when unmanageable key combination are pressed. Date and Time menu To change the date or time of your computer, select the Date/Time tab from the ThinkPad Setup menu. Then do the following:

1. Use the cursor keys to select System Date or System Time. 2. Type a date or time. Security menu To change the security settings of your computer, select the Security tab from the ThinkPad Setup menu. The following table lists the Security menu items. Default values are in boldface. The menu items might change without notice. Depending on the model, the default value might vary. Attention: The default configurations are already optimized for you. Improper change of the configurations might cause unexpected results. Table 3. Security menu items Menu item Password Submenu item Supervisor Password Lock UEFI BIOS Settings Selection Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Password at Unattended boot Disabled Enabled 60 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Comments Refer to Supervisor password on page 46. Enable or disable the function that protects items in ThinkPad Setup from being changed by a user who does not have the supervisor password. By default, this is set to Disabled. If you set the supervisor password and enable this function, no one but you can change items in the ThinkPad Setup program. If you select and enable Password at unattended boot, a password prompt is displayed when the Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Password at Restart Disabled Enabled Password at Boot Device List Disabled Enabled Password Count Exceeded Error Disabled Enabled Set Minimum Length Disabled x characters

(4x12) Comments computer is turned on, from either a power-off state or hibernation state. If you select Disabled, no password prompt is displayed; the computer goes ahead and loads the operating system. To prevent unauthorized access, set the user authentication on the operating system. If you select and enable Password at restart, a password prompt is displayed when you restart the computer. If you select Disabled, no password prompt is displayed; the computer goes ahead and loads the operating system. To prevent unauthorized access, set the user authentication on the operating system. If the security password is set, this option is used to specify whether the Security password must be entered to display the F12 boot device list. Select Enabled to prompt for the security password. Select Disabled to proceed without any user action required. Select Enabled to show the POST 0199 error and prompt for the Security password. Select Disabled to hide the POST 0199 error and proceed without any user action required. Specify a minimum length for power-on password and hard disk passwords. If you set the supervisor password and specify a minimum length for passwords, no one but you can change the length. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 61 Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Power-On Password Hard Disk X Password Security Chip Security Chip Selection Selection Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Discrete TPM Intel PTT Comments Refer to Power-on password on page 45. Refer to Hard disk passwords on page 48. If you select Discrete TPM, you can use a discrete TPM chip with TPM 1.2 mode. If you select Intel PTT, you can use Intel Platform Trusted technology (PTT) with TPM 2.0 mode. If you change from Intel PTT to Discrete TPM, a message pops up that all encryption keys will be cleared in the security chip. If you want to continue, select Yes. If you change from Discrete TPM to Intel PTT, a message pops up that all encryption keys will be cleared in the security chip. Intel AMT and Intel TXT are disabled when the security chip is set to Intel PTT. If you want to continue, select Yes. Notes:

This submenu is available on models with an Intel CPU. Discrete TPM is displayed only when a discrete TPM chip is available. Security Chip Active Inactive Disabled Intel PTT can be used with the Windows 8 or later operating system. If you select Active, the security chip is functional. If you select Inactive, the security chip is visible, but it is not functional. If you select Disabled, the security chip is hidden and it is not functional. Note: This item is displayed when Security Chip 62 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Enabled Disabled Clear Security Chip Enter Intel TXT Feature

* Unselectable when Intel PTT is enabled. Disabled Enabled Physical Presence for Provisioning Disabled Enabled Physical Presence for Clear Disabled Enabled Comments Selection is set to Discrete TPM. If you select Enabled, the security chip is functional. If you select Disabled, the security chip is hidden and it is not functional. Note: This item is displayed when Security Chip Selection is set to Intel PTT. Clear the encryption key. Note: This item is displayed only if you have selected Active or Enabled for the Security Chip option. Enable or disable Intel Trusted Execution Technology. Notes:

This item is available on models with an Intel CPU. This item is displayed only if you have selected Active or Enabled for the Security Chip option. This item is set to Disabled when Intel PTT is enabled. This option enables or disables the confirmation message when you change the settings of the security chip. This option enables or disables the confirmation message when you clear the security chip. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 63 Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item UEFI BIOS Update Option Flash BIOS Updating by End-Users Selection Disabled Enabled Secure RollBack Prevention Disabled Enabled Memory Protection Execution Prevention Disabled Enabled Virtualization Intel Virtualization Technology Disabled Enabled Intel VT-d Feature Disabled Enabled 64 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Comments If you select Enabled, all users can update the UEFI BIOS. If you select Disabled, only the person who knows the supervisor password can update the UEFI BIOS. If you select Disabled, you can flash to an earlier version of the UEFI BIOS. If you select Enabled, you cannot flash to an earlier version of the UEFI BIOS. Note: This item is set as Disabled by default when the OS Optimized Defaults on the Restart menu is set as Disabled. This item is set as Enabled by default when the OS Optimized Defaults is set as Enabled. If the Some computer viruses and worms cause memory buffers to overflow by running code where only data is allowed. Data Execution Prevention feature can be used with your operating system, then by selecting Enabled you can protect your computer against attacks by such viruses and worms. If after choosing Enabled you find that a program does not run correctly, select Disabled and reset the setting. If you select Enabled, a Virtual Machine Monitor

(VMM) can utilize the additional hardware capabilities provided by Virtualization Technology. Note: This submenu is available on models with an Intel CPU. Intel VT-d is Intel Virtualization Technology for Directed I/O. When enabled, a VMM can utilize the platform infrastructure for I/O virtualization. Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Selection Comments I/O Port Access Ethernet LAN Wireless LAN Bluetooth USB Port Memory Card Slot Integrated Camera Microphone Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Anti-Theft Computrace Module Activation Disabled Enabled Permanently Disabled Secure Boot Secure Boot Disabled Enabled Note: This submenu is available on models with an Intel CPU. If you select Enabled, you can use the Ethernet LAN device. If you select Enabled, you can use wireless LAN devices. If you select Enabled, you can use Bluetooth devices. If you select Enabled, you can use USB connectors. If you select Enabled, you can use the memory card slots. If you select Enabled, you can use the integrated camera. If you select Enabled, you can use the microphones

(internal, external, or line-in). Enable or disable the UEFI BIOS interface to activate the computrace module. Computrace is an optional monitoring service from Absolute Software. Note:

If you set the Computrace module activation to Permanently Disabled, you will be unable to enable this setting again. Enable or disable the UEFI Secure Boot feature. Select Enable to prevent unauthorized operating systems from running at boot time. Select Disabled to allow any operating systems to run at boot time. Note: To enable Secure Boot, you need to set the startup setting as UEFI Only and set CSM Support as No. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 65 Table 3. Security menu items (continued) Menu item Submenu item Platform Mode Secure Boot Mode Reset to Setup Mode Selection Setup Mode User Mode Standard Mode Custom Mode Yes No Restore Factory Keys Yes No Clear All Secure Boot Keys Yes No Comments Specify the system operating mode. Specify the system operating mode. This option is used to clear the current platform key and put the system into Setup Mode. You can install your own platform key and customize the Secure Boot signature databases in Setup Mode. Secure Boot mode will be set to Custom Mode. This option is used to restore all keys and certificates in Secure Boot databases to factory defaults. Any customized Secure Boot settings will be erased, and the default platform key will be re-established along with the original signature databases including certificate for the Windows 10 operating systems. This option is used to clear all keys and certificates in Secure Boot databases. You can install your own keys and certificates after selecting this option. Startup menu To change the startup settings of your computer, select the Startup tab from the ThinkPad Setup menu. Attention:

After you change the startup sequence, ensure that you select a correct device during a copy, a save, or a format operation. Otherwise your data might be erased or overwritten. If you are using the BitLocker drive encryption, do not change the startup sequence. BitLocker drive encryption locks the computer from starting once detects the change of startup sequence. To change the startup sequence temporarily so that the computer starts from a desired drive, do the following:

1. Restart the computer. When the ThinkPad logo is displayed, press the F12 key. 2. Select the device that you want the computer to start from. Note: The Boot menu will be displayed if the computer cannot start from any devices or the operating system cannot be found. 66 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide The following table lists the Startup menu items. Default values are in boldface. The menu items might change without notice. Depending on the model, the default value might vary. Note: Some items are displayed on the menu only if the computer supports the corresponding features. Table 4. Startup menu items Menu item Boot Network Boot UEFI/Legacy Boot Selection Comments Select the boot device when you press the power button to turn on the computer. Select the boot device when the computer wakes from LAN. If Wake On LAN is enabled, a network administrator can turn on all of the computers in a LAN remotely by use of network management software. Both UEFI Only Legacy Only UEFI/Legacy Boot Priority UEFI First Legacy First CSM Support (for UEFI Only) No Yes Boot Mode Quick Diagnostics Option Key Display Disabled Enabled Select system boot capability. Both: Select priority of boot options between UEFI and Legacy. UEFI Only: The computer will start from the UEFI-enabled operating system. Legacy Only: The computer will boot from any operating system other than the UEFI-enabled one. Note: If you select UEFI Only, the computer cannot start from the bootable devices that do not have the UEFI-enabled operating system. Compatibility Support Module (CSM) is required for starting the legacy operating system. If you select UEFI Only, CSM Support is selectable. For Both or Legacy Only mode, CSM Support is not selectable. Screen during the POST:

Quick: The ThinkPad Logo screen is displayed. Diagnostics: Test messages are displayed. Note: You can also enter Diagnostic mode by pressing Esc during POST. If you select Disabled, then the message To interrupt normal startup, press Enter is not displayed during the POST. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 67 Table 4. Startup menu items (continued) Menu item Boot Device List F12 Option Boot Order Lock Selection Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Comments If you select Enabled, the F12 key is recognized and the Boot Menu window is displayed. If you select Disabled, your computer will boot using the default priority. If you select Enabled, your computer will boot using the priority you have customized. Restart menu To exit the ThinkPad Setup program and restart the computer, select Restart from the ThinkPad Setup menu. The following submenu items are displayed:

Exit Saving Changes: Save the changes and restart the computer. Exit Discarding Changes: Discard the changes and restart the computer. Load Setup Defaults: Restore to the factory default settings. Note: Enable OS Optimized Defaults to meet the Windows 10 certification requirement. When you change this setting, some other settings are changed automatically, such as CSM Support, UEFI/Legacy Boot, Secure Boot, and Secure RollBack Prevention. Discard Changes: Discard the changes. Save Changes: Save the changes. Updating the UEFI BIOS The UEFI BIOS is the first program that the computer runs when the computer is turned on. The UEFI BIOS initializes the hardware components, and loads the operating system and other programs. You can update the UEFI BIOS by starting your computer from a flash update optical disc or a flash update program running in the Windows environment. When you install a new program, a device driver, or hardware, you might be informed to update the UEFI BIOS. For instructions on how to update the UEFI BIOS, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers Using system management This topic is primarily intended for the network administrators. Your computer is designed for manageability, so that you can redirect more resources to better meet your business objectives. This manageability, known as Total Cost of Ownership (TCO), enables you to remotely operate client computers in the same way as you operate your own computer, such as turning on a client computer, formatting a hard disk drive, and installing a program. Once the computer is configured and operational, you can manage it by using the software and the manageability features that are already integrated into the client computer and the network. 68 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Desktop Management Interface The UEFI BIOS of your computer supports an interface called System Management BIOS (SMBIOS) Reference Specification, version 2.7.1. SMBIOS provides information about the hardware components of your computer. It is the responsibility of the UEFI BIOS to provide information about itself and the devices on the system board. This specification documents the standards for getting access to this BIOS information. Preboot eXecution Environment The Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) technology makes the computer more manageable by enabling the computer to start from a server. Your computer supports the personal computer functions that PXE requires. Note: The Remote Initial Program Load (RIPL or RPL) function cannot be used with your computer. Asset ID EEPROM The Asset ID EEPROM contains information about the computer configuration and the serial numbers of the key components. It also includes a number of blank fields where you can record information about the end users in your network. Chapter 6. Advanced configuration 69 70 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 7. Preventing problems This chapter contains the following topics:

General tips for preventing problems on page 71 Making sure device drivers are up-to-date on page 72 Taking care of your computer on page 73 General tips for preventing problems Check the capacity of your hard disk drive from time to time. If the hard disk drive gets too full, the Windows operating system will slow down and might produce errors. To check the hard disk drive capacity, do the following:

Windows 7: Open the Start menu and click Computer. Windows 10: Open the File Explorer and click This PC. Empty your recycle bin on a regular basis. Use disk defragment tool regularly on your hard disk drive to improve data seek and read times. To free up disk space, uninstall unused application programs. Note: You also might want to look for program duplication or overlapping versions. Clean out your Inbox, Sent, and Trash folders from your e-mail client program. Back up your data at least once a week. If critical data is present, it is a good idea to perform a daily backup operation. Lenovo has many backup options available for your computer. Rewritable optical drives are available for most machines and are easily installed. Schedule system restore operations to take a system snapshot periodically. For more information about system restore, see Chapter 9 Recovery overview on page 95. Update device drivers and the UEFI BIOS when needed. Profile your machine at http://www.lenovo.com/support to keep up to date with current drivers and revisions. Keep up to date for device drivers on other non-Lenovo hardware. You might want to read the device driver information release notes prior to updating for compatibility or known issues. Keep a log book. Entries might include major hardware or software changes, driver updates, minor issues you have experienced, and how you resolved the minor issues. If you ever need to run a recovery on your computer to return the preinstalled contents onto the machine, the following tips might help along the way:

Remove all external devices such as the printer, keyboard, and so on. Make sure that your battery is charged and your computer has the ac power connected. Access ThinkPad Setup and load the default settings. Restart the computer and start the recovery operation. If your computer uses discs as the recovery media, do not remove the disc from the drive until prompted to do so. For suspected hard disk drive issues, refer to Diagnosing problems on page 77 and run a diagnostic test for the drive before you call the Customer Support Center. If your computer does not start up, download the files to create a bootable self-test medium from http://www.lenovo.com/hddtest. Run the test and record any messages or error codes. If the test returns any failing error codes or messages, Copyright Lenovo 2016 71 call the Customer Support Center with the codes or messages and the computer in front of you. A technician will assist you further. If required, you can find the contact information about the Customer Support Center for your country or region at http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone. When calling the Customer Support Center, make sure that you have your machine model type, serial number, and the computer in front of you. Also, if the computer is producing error codes, it is helpful to have the error screen on or the messages written down. Making sure device drivers are up-to-date Device drivers are programs that contain instructions for the operating system about how to operate or drive a certain piece of hardware. Each hardware component on your computer has its own specific driver. If you add a new component, the operating system needs to be instructed on how to operate that piece of hardware. After you install the driver, the operating system can recognize the hardware component and understand how to use it. Note: Because drivers are programs, like any other file on your computer, they are susceptible to corruption and might not perform correctly if corruption occurs. It is not always necessary to download the latest drivers. However, you should download the latest driver for a component if you notice poor performance from that component or if you added a new component. This might eliminate the driver as the potential cause of a problem. Getting the latest drivers from the Web site You can download and install updated device drivers from the Lenovo Web site by doing the following:

1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/ThinkPadDrivers. 2. Select the entry for your computer and then follow the instructions on the screen to download and install necessary software. Getting the latest drivers using System Update The System Update program helps you keep the software on your computer up-to-date. Update packages are stored on Lenovo servers and can be downloaded from the Lenovo Support Web site. Update packages can contain applications, device drivers, UEFI BIOS flashes, or software updates. When the System Update program connects to the Lenovo Support Web site, the System Update program automatically recognizes the machine type and model of your computer, the installed operating system, and the language of the operating system to determine what updates are available for your computer. The System Update program then displays a list of update packages and categorizes each update as critical, recommended, or optional to help you understand the importance. You have complete control of which updates to download and install. After you select the update packages you want, the System Update program automatically downloads and installs the updates without any further intervention from you. The System Update program is preinstalled on your computer and is ready to run. The only prerequisite is an active Internet connection. You can start the program manually, or you can use the schedule feature to enable the program to search for updates automatically at specified intervals. You also can predefine scheduled updates to search by severity (critical updates, critical and recommended updates, or all updates) so the list you choose from contains only those update types that are of interest to you. For more information about how to use the System Update program, refer to the help information system of the program. 72 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Taking care of your computer Although your computer is designed to function reliably in normal work environments, you need to use common sense in handling it. By following the important tips in this topic, you will get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer. Be careful about where and how you work Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags. Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers

(more than 13 cm or 5 inches). Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F). Some appliances, such as certain portable desktop fans or air purifiers, can produce negative ions. If a computer is close to such an appliance, and is exposed for an extended time to air containing negative ions, it might become electrostatically charged. Such a charge might be discharged through your hands when you touch the keyboard or other parts of the computer, or through connectors on I/O devices connected to it. Even though this kind of electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the opposite of a discharge from your body or clothing to the computer, it poses the same risk of a computer malfunction. Your computer is designed and manufactured to minimize any effects of electrostatic charge. An electrostatic charge above a certain limit, however, can increase the risk of ESD. Therefore, when using the computer close to an appliance that can produce negative ions, give special attention to the following:

Avoid directly exposing your computer to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions. Keep your computer and peripherals as far as possible from such an appliance. Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge. Note: Not all such appliances cause a significant electrostatic charge. Be gentle with your computer Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or the palm rest. Your computer display is designed to be opened and used at an angle slightly greater than 90 degrees. Do not open the display beyond 135 degrees, as this might damage the computer hinge. Do not turn your computer over while the ac power adapter is plugged in. This could break the adapter plug. Carry your computer properly Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect cords and cables. When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display. Handle storage media and drives properly When installing the storage drive, follow the instructions shipped with your hardware, and apply pressure only where needed on the device. After you replace the primary storage drive, reattach the cover of the drive slot. When replacing the storage drive, reattach the cover of the drive slot. Store your external and removable storage drive in the appropriate containers or packaging when they are not being used. Chapter 7. Preventing problems 73 Before you install any of the following devices, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the device. While transferring data to or from a flash media card, such as an SD card, do not put your computer in sleep or hibernation mode before the data transfer is complete. To do so might cause damage to your data. Taking care when setting passwords Remember your passwords. If you forget a supervisor or hard disk password, Lenovo will not reset it, and you might have to replace your system board or storage drive. Registering your computer Register your ThinkPad computer with Lenovo at http://www.lenovo.com/register. For more information, see Registering your computer on page 17. Be sure not to modify your computer Only an authorized ThinkPad repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer. Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed. Cleaning the cover of your computer Occasionally clean your computer by doing the following:

1. Prepare a mixture of a gentle kitchen-use detergent. The detergent must not contain abrasive powder or strong chemicals such as acid or alkaline. Use five parts water to one part detergent. 2. Absorb the diluted detergent into a sponge. 3. Squeeze excess liquid from the sponge. 4. Wipe the cover with the sponge, using a circular motion and taking care not to let any excess liquid drip. 5. Wipe the surface to remove the detergent. 6. Rinse the sponge with clean running water. 7. Wipe the cover with the clean sponge. 8. Wipe the surface again with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth. 9. Wait for the surface to dry completely and remove any fibers from the cloth. Cleaning your computer keyboard To clean the computer keyboard, do the following:

1. Apply some isopropyl rubbing alcohol to a soft, dust-free cloth. Note: Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. 2. Wipe each keytop surface with the cloth. Wipe the keys one by one; if you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth might hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Make sure that no liquid drips onto or between the keys. 3. Allow to dry. 4. To remove any crumbs or dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or cool air from a hair dryer. Cleaning your computer display To clean the computer display, do the following:

74 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 1. Gently wipe the display with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. If you see a scratchlike mark on your display, it might be a stain transferred from the keyboard or the TrackPoint pointing stick when the cover was pressed from the outside. 2. Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. 3. If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or a 50-50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water that does not contain impurities. Note: Avoid spraying cleaner directly onto the keyboard. 4. Wring out as much of the liquid as you can. 5. Wipe the display again; do not let any liquid drip into the computer. 6. Be sure to dry the display before closing it. Chapter 7. Preventing problems 75 76 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems This chapter contains the following topics:

Diagnosing problems on page 77 Troubleshooting on page 77 Diagnosing problems If you experience problems with your computer, use the Lenovo Solution Center program as a starting point for solving them. The Lenovo Solution Center program enables you to troubleshoot and resolve computer problems. It combines diagnostic tests, system information collection, security status, and support information, along with hints and tips for optimal system performance. Notes:

The Lenovo Solution Center program also is available for downloaded at:

http://www.lenovo.com/diags If you are using other Windows operating system rather than Windows 7 or Windows 10, you can find the latest information about diagnostics for your computer at:

http://www.lenovo.com/diagnose When you are setting up your computer, the Lenovo Solution Center program prompts you to create recovery media. You can use the recovery media to restore the hard disk drive to the factory default state. For more information, see Creating and using a recovery media on page 95. To run the Lenovo Solution Center program, see Accessing Lenovo programs on page 13. For additional information, refer to the Lenovo Solution Center help system. Note: If you are unable to isolate and repair the problem yourself after running Lenovo Solution Center program, save and print the log files created by the program. You will need the log files when you speak to a Lenovo technical support representative. Troubleshooting If your computer has an error, it typically displays a message or an error code, or makes a beep when you turn it on. When you experience a problem, refer to the corresponding sections in this topic to try to solve the problem by yourself. Computer stops responding Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later. If your computer is completely unresponsive (you cannot use the ThinkPad pointing device or the keyboard), do the following:

1. Press and hold the power button until the computer turns off. After the computer is turned off, restart by pressing the power button. If the computer does not turn on, continue with step 2. Note: Do not remove the battery and the ac power adapter to reset the computer. Copyright Lenovo 2016 77 2. While the computer is turned off, remove all power sources from the computer (battery and the ac power adapter). Hold down the power button for 10 seconds. Plug in the ac power adapter while keeping the battery out of the computer. If the computer does not turn back on, continue with step 3. Note: Once the computer starts up and enters the Windows environment, use the proper shutdown procedure to turn the computer off. Once the computer is off, reattach the battery and restart the computer. If the computer does not start with the battery reattached, remove the battery and again start with step 2. If the computer starts with ac power but does not start when the battery is attached, call the Customer Support Center for support. 3. While the computer is off, remove all sources of power (battery and the ac power adapter or battery). Remove all external devices that are attached to your computer (keyboard, mouse, printer, scanner, and so on). Repeat step 2. If step 2 is unsuccessful, continue with step 4. Note: The following steps involve removing static sensitive components from your computer. Make sure that you are properly grounded and remove all sources of power attached to the computer. If you are uncomfortable or unsure about removing components, call the Customer Support Center for assistance. 4. While the computer is off, remove all sources of power and external hardware. Remove any non-original memory module added to your computer. After removing the extra memory module and reinstalling the original memory module, repeat step 2. If the computer still does not turn on, consult the user manual for other customer-replaceable components that are attached to your computer. If the computer still does not start up, call the Customer Support Center and a Customer Support Specialist will assist you. Spills on the keyboard With a mobile computer, there are increased chances of spilling liquids on the keyboard. Because most liquids conduct electricity, liquid spilled on the keyboard could create numerous short circuits, potentially causing irreparable damage to your computer. If you spill something on your computer:

Attention: Be sure that no liquid creates a short circuit between you and the ac power adapter (if in use). Although you might lose some data or work by turning off the computer immediately, leaving the computer on might make your computer unusable. 1. Carefully unplug the ac power adapter immediately. 2. Turn off the computer immediately. If the computer does not turn off, remove the battery. The more quickly you stop the current from passing through the computer the more likely you will reduce damage from short circuits. 3. Wait until you are certain that all the liquid is dry before turning on your computer. Note: If you want to replace your keyboard, you can purchase a new one. Error messages Message: 0177: Bad SVP data, stop POST task. Solution: Checksum of the supervisor password in the EEPROM is not correct. The system board should be replaced. Have the computer serviced. Message: 0183: Bad CRC of Security Settings in EFI Variable. Enter ThinkPad Setup. Solution: Checksum of the Security settings in the EFI Variable is not correct. Enter ThinkPad Setup to check security settings, Press F10 and then press Enter to restart the system. If you still have a problem, have the computer serviced. 78 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Message: 0187: EAIA data access error. Solution: The access to EEPROM is failed. Have the computer serviced. Message: 0188: Invalid RFID Serialization Information Area. Solution: The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block # 0 and 1). The system board should be replaced, and the box serial number needs to be reinstalled. Have the computer serviced. Message: 0189: Invalid RFID configuration information area. Solution: The EEPROM checksum is not correct (block # 4 and 5). The system board should be replaced, and the UUID needs to be reinstalled. Have the computer serviced. Message: 0190: Critical low-battery error. Solution: The computer turns off, because the battery is low. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and charge the battery, or replace the battery with a fully charged one. Message: 0191: System Security - Invalid remote change requested. Solution: The system configuration change has failed. Confirm the operation and try again. To clear the error, enter the ThinkPad Setup program. Message: 0199: System Security - Security password retry count exceeded. Solution: This message is displayed if you enter a wrong supervisor password more than three times. Confirm the supervisor password and try again. To clear the error, enter the ThinkPad Setup program. Message: 0251: System CMOS checksum bad. Solution: The system CMOS might have been corrupted by a program. The computer uses the default settings. Run ThinkPad Setup to reconfigure the settings. If you still see the same error code, have the computer serviced. Message: 0253: EFI Variable Block Data was destroyed. Solution: The system EFI Variable Block Data might have been corrupted. The computer uses the default settings. Run ThinkPad Setup to reconfigure the settings. If you still see the same error code, have the computer serviced. Message: 0271: Real time clock error. Solution: Have the computer serviced. Message: 1802: Unauthorized network card is plugged in. Solution: The network card is not supported on this computer. Remove it. Message: 2100: Detection error on HDD0 (Main HDD). Solution: The hard disk drive is not working. Have the hard disk drive serviced. Message: 2101: Detection error on HDD1 (Ultrabay HDD)). Solution: The hard disk drive is not working. Have the hard disk drive serviced. Message: 2102: Detection error on HDD2 (Mini SATA). Solution: The Mini SATA device is not working. Have the Mini SATA device serviced. Message: 2110: Read error on HDD0 (Main HDD). Solution: The hard disk drive is not working. Have the hard disk drive serviced. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 79 Message: 2111: Read error on HDD1 (Ultrabay HDD) Solution: The hard disk drive is not working. Have the hard disk drive serviced. Message: 2112: Read error on HDD2 (Mini SATA) Solution: The Mini SATA device is not working. Have the Mini SATA device serviced. Message: 2200: Machine Type and Serial Number are invalid. Solution: Machine Type and Serial Number are invalid. Have the computer serviced. Message: 2201: Machine UUID is invalid. Solution: Machine UUID is invalid. Have the computer serviced. Message: Fan error Solution: Cooling fan has failed. Shut down the computer immediately and have the computer serviced. Message: Thermal sensing error Solution: The thermal sensor is not functioning correctly. Shut down the computer immediately and have the computer serviced. Message: This system does not support batteries that are not genuine Lenovo-made or authorized. The system will continue to boot, but may not charge unauthorized batteries. Press the ESC key to continue. Attention: Lenovo has no responsibility for the performance or safety of unauthorized batteries, and provides no warranties for failures or damage arising out of their use. Solution: Replace the battery with the correct Lenovo battery for this computer. If you still see the same error message, contact Lenovo Service to have the computer serviced. Message: The battery installed is not supported by this system and will not charge. Please replace the battery with the correct Lenovo battery for this system. Press the ESC key to continue. Solution: Replace the battery with the correct Lenovo battery for this computer. If you still see the same error message, contact Lenovo Service to have the computer serviced. Errors without messages Problem: My screen keeps blanking when I do not want it to. Solution: If your computer is preinstalled with the Windows 7 operating system, you can disable any system timers, such as the LCD turn-off timer or the blank timer by doing the following:

1. Start Power Manager. 2. Click the Power plan tab, and then select Maximum Performance from the predefined power plans. If your computer is preinstalled with the Windows 10 operating system, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel, and ensure that you view Control Panel by Category. 2. Click Hardware and Sound Power Options High performance. 3. Show the additional plans, and then choose High performance. Problem: When I turn on the computer, nothing is displayed on the screen and the computer does not beep while starting up. Note: If you are not sure whether you heard any beeps, turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for four seconds or more. Then turn on the computer and listen again. Solution: Ensure that:

80 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide The battery is installed correctly. The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet. The computer is turned on. (Press the power button again for confirmation.) The brightness level of the screen is appropriately set. If a power-on password is set, press any key to display the prompt for the power-on password and then type the correct password and press Enter. If these items are correctly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Problem: When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor is displayed on a blank screen. Solution: If you have modified a partition on your hard disk drive by using partition software, information about that partition, or the master boot record might have been destroyed. 1. Turn off the computer, and then turn it on again. 2. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, do the following:

If you have used the partition software, examine the partition on the hard disk drive by using the software, and recover the partition if required. Use the recovery solutions to restore the system to the factory default state. If the problem persists, have the computer serviced. Problem: My screen goes blank while the computer is on. Solution: Your screen saver or power management might have been enabled. Do either of the following:

Touch the TrackPoint pointing device or the trackpad, or press a key to exit the screen saver. Press the power button to resume the computer from sleep or hibernation mode. Beep errors Table 5. Beep errors Problem One short beep, pause, three short beeps, pause, three more short beeps, and one short beep Three short beeps, pause, one short beep, pause, one more short beep, and three short beeps One long and two short beeps Five short beeps Solution Make sure that memory modules are installed correctly. If they are, and you still hear the beeps, have the computer serviced. PCI resource allocation failure. Power off the computer and remove the device from the ExpressCard Slot. If the beeps persist, have the computer serviced. The video function has a problem. Have the computer serviced. The system board has a problem. Have the computer serviced. Memory module problems Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later. If your memory module is not operating properly, check the following items:

1. Verify that the memory module is installed and seated correctly in your computer. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 81 It might be necessary to remove all added memory modules to test the computer with only the factory-installed memory modules, and then reinstall the memory module one at a time to ensure a proper connection. 2. Check for error messages during startup. Follow the appropriate corrective actions for power-on self-test (POST) error messages. 3. Verify that the latest UEFI BIOS for your model has been installed. 4. Verify the proper memory configuration and compatibility including the maximum memory size and the memory speed. 5. Run diagnostic programs. See Diagnosing problems on page 77. Networking problems The following are the most common networking problems:

Ethernet problems Problem: Your computer cannot connect to the network. Solution: Make sure that:

The cable is installed correctly. The network cable must be securely connected both to the Ethernet connector of your computer and to the RJ45 connector of the hub. The maximum allowable distance from the computer to hub is 100 meters. If the cable is connected and the distance is within acceptable limits but the problem persists, try a different cable. You are using the correct device driver. To install the correct driver, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 2. If the exclamation mark ! is displayed next to the adapter name under Network adapters, you might not be using the correct driver or the driver might have been disabled. To update the driver, right-click the highlighted adapter. 3. Click Update Driver Software, and then follow the instructions on the screen. The switch port and the adapter have the same duplex setting. If you configured the adapter for full duplex, make sure that the switch port also is configured for full duplex. Setting wrong duplex mode can degrade performance, cause data loss, or result in lost connections. You have installed all networking software that is necessary for your network environment. Check with your LAN administrator for the necessary networking software. Problem: The adapter stops working for no apparent reason. Solution: The network driver files might be corrupt or missing. Update the driver by referring to the above solution for the procedure to make sure that the correct device driver is installed. Problem: If your computer is a Gigabit Ethernet model and you use a speed of 1000 Mbps, the connection fails or errors occur. Solution:

Use Category 5 wiring and make sure that the network cable is securely connected. Connect to a 1000 BASE-T hub/switch (not 1000 BASE-X). Problem: The Wake On LAN feature is not working. 82 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Solution: Ensure that Wake On LAN is enabled in ThinkPad Setup. If it is, check with your LAN administrator for the necessary settings. Problem: My computer is a Gigabit Ethernet model, it cannot connect to the network at 1000 Mbps. Instead, it connects at 100 Mbps. Solution:

Try another cable. Make sure that the link partner is set to auto-negotiate. Make sure that the switch is 802.3ab-compliant (gigabit over copper). A wireless LAN problem Problem: I cannot connect to the network using the built-in wireless network card. Solution: Make sure that:

The Airplane mode is off. Your wireless LAN driver is the latest version. Your computer is within range of a wireless access point. The wireless radio is enabled. Note: If you are using the Windows 7 operating system, click Show hidden icons on the Windows notification area. The Access Connections icon is displayed. For more information about the icon, refer to the Access Connections help information system. For the Windows 7 operating system, check the Network Name (SSID) and your encryption information. Use the Access Connections program to verify this case-sensitive information. Bluetooth problems Note: Check your connection anytime and make sure that no other Bluetooth-enabled device is searching for the device to which you want to connect. Simultaneous searching is not allowed in the Bluetooth connection. Problem: Sound does not come from the Bluetooth headset/headphone but comes from the local speaker even though the Bluetooth headset/headphone is connected using a Headset profile or AV profile. Solution: Do the following:

1. Exit the application that uses the sound device (for example, Windows Media Player). 2. Go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Sound Playback. 3. If you are using a Headset profile, select Bluetooth Hands-free Audio and click the Set Default button. If you are using an AV profile, select Stereo Audio and click the Set Default button. 4. Click OK to close the Sound window. Problem: PIM items sent from the Windows 7 operating systems cannot be received correctly into the address book of any other Bluetooth-enabled device. Solution: The Windows 7 operating system sends PIM items in XML format, but most Bluetooth-enabled devices handle PIM items in vCard format. If another Bluetooth-enabled device can receive a file through Bluetooth, a PIM item sent from the Windows 7 might be saved as a file with the extension .contact. Problems with the keyboard and other pointing devices The following are the most common problems with keyboards and other pointing devices. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 83 ThinkPad pointing device problems Problem: The pointer drifts when the computer is turned on or after it resumes normal operation. Solution: The pointer might drift when you are not using the TrackPoint pointing device during normal operation. This is a normal characteristic of the TrackPoint pointing device and is not a defect. Pointer drifting might occur for several seconds under the following conditions:

When the computer is turned on When the computer resumes normal operation When the TrackPoint pointing device is kept pressed for a long time When the temperature changes Problem: The TrackPoint pointing device or trackpad does not work. Solution: Ensure that the TrackPoint pointing device or trackpad is enabled in the ThinkPad pointing device setting window. Keyboard problems Problem: All or some keys on the keyboard do not work. Solution: If an external numeric keypad is connected:

1. Turn off the computer. 2. Remove the external numeric keypad. 3. Turn on the computer and try using the keyboard again. If the keyboard problem is resolved, carefully reconnect the external numeric keypad and the external keyboard. Make sure that you have seated the connectors correctly. If the problem persists, make sure that the correct device driver is installed by doing the following:

1. Open Control Panel. Change the view of Control Panel from Category to Large icons or Small icons. 2. Click Keyboard. 3. Select the Hardware tab. In the Device Properties pane, make sure that you see this message:

Device Status: This device is working properly. If keys on the keyboard still do not work, have the computer serviced. Problem: A number is displayed when you type a letter. Solution: The numeric lock function is on. To disable it, press Fn+NumLock. Problem: All or some keys on the external numeric keypad do not work. Solution: Make sure that the external numeric keypad is correctly connected to the computer. Problems with the display and multimedia devices This topic includes the most common problems with displays and multimedia devices, including the computer display, the external monitor, and audio devices. Computer screen problems Problem: The screen is blank. Solution: Do the following:

Press F7 to bring up the image. If you are using the ac power adapter, or using the battery and the battery gauge shows that the battery is not depleted, press F6 to make the screen brighter. If your computer is in sleep mode, press Fn to resume from the sleep mode. 84 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide If the problem persists, follow the solution for the following problem. Problem: The screen is unreadable or distorted. Solution: Make sure that:

The display device driver is installed correctly. The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set. The monitor type is correct. To check these settings, do the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to your computer, and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet. 2. Turn on the external monitor. 3. Right-click on the desktop, and do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Screen resolution. For Windows 10: Click Display settings, show the displayed window in full screen, and then click Advanced display settings. Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 4. Select the external monitor and set Resolution. 5. Do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Advanced settings. For Windows 10: Click Display adapter properties. 6. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information to make sure that the monitor type is correct. If the monitor type is correct, click OK to close the window; otherwise proceed with the following steps. 1. If more than two monitor types are displayed, select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non-PnP Monitor. 2. Click Properties. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 3. Click the Driver tab. 4. Click Update Driver. 5. Click Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer. 6. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box. 7. Select the correct manufacturer and model for the external monitor. If you cannot find your monitor on the list, stop the installation of this driver and use the driver shipped with your monitor. 8. After updating the driver, click Close. 9. For the Windows 7 operating system, to change the color settings, right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Click Advanced settings, select the Monitor tab, and then set Colors. 10. Click OK. Problem: Incorrect characters are displayed on the screen. Solution: Did you install the operating system or program correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Problem: The screen stays on even after you turn off your computer. Solution: Press and hold the power button for four seconds or more to turn off your computer; then turn it on again. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 85 Problem: Missing, discolored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time you turn on your computer. Solution: This is an intrinsic characteristic of the TFT technology. Your computer display contains multiple thin-film transistors (TFTs). A small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots on the screen might exist all the time. External monitor problems Problem: The external monitor is blank. Solution: To bring up the image, press F7 and select the desired monitor. If the problem persists, do the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to another computer to make sure that it works. 2. Reconnect the external monitor to your computer. 3. Refer to the manual shipped with the external monitor to check the resolutions and refresh rates that are supported. If the external monitor supports the same resolution as the computer display or a higher resolution, view output on the external monitor or on both the external monitor and the computer display. If the external monitor supports a lower resolution than the computer display, view output on the external monitor only. (If you view output on both the computer display and the external monitor, the external monitor screen will be blank or distorted.) Problem: You cannot set a higher resolution than the present one on your external monitor. Solution: Make sure that the monitor information is correct. Do the following:

1. Right-click on the desktop, and do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Screen resolution. For Windows 10: Click Display settings, show the displayed window in full screen, and then click Advanced display settings. Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 2. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor). 3. Do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Advanced settings. For Windows 10: Click Display adapter properties. 4. Click the Adapter tab. 5. Make sure that the correct device driver name is shown in the adapter information window. Note: The device driver name depends on the video chip that has been installed on your computer. 6. Click OK. If the information is incorrect, reinstall the device driver. Check the monitor type and, if necessary, update the driver by doing the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet. 2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer. 3. Right-click on the desktop, and do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Screen resolution. For Windows 10: Click Display settings, show the displayed window in full screen, and then click Advanced display settings. 86 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 4. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor). 5. Do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Advanced settings. For Windows 10: Click Display adapter properties. 6. Click the Monitor tab. Check the monitor information window to make sure that the monitor type is correct. If it is, click OK to close the window; otherwise do the following. 7. If more than one monitor type is displayed, select Generic PnP Monitor or Generic Non-PnP Monitor. 8. Click Properties. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 9. Click the Driver tab. 10. Click Update Driver. 11. Click Browse my computer for driver software, and then click Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my computer. 12. Clear the Show compatible hardware check box. 13. Select your monitor manufacturer and model. 14. After updating the driver, click Close. 15. Set Resolution. Note: To change the color settings, select the Monitor tab, and then set Colors. 16. Click OK. Problem: The screen is unreadable or distorted. Solution: Ensure that:

The monitor information is correct and the appropriate monitor type is selected. Refer to the solution to the above problem. Make sure that an appropriate refresh rate is selected by doing the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet. 2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer. 3. Right-click on the desktop, and do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Screen resolution. For Windows 10: Click Display settings, show the displayed window in full screen, and then click Advanced display settings. Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 4. Click the icon for the desired monitor (the Monitor-2 icon is for the external monitor). 5. Do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Advanced settings. For Windows 10: Click Display adapter properties. 6. Click the Monitor tab. 7. Select the correct screen refresh rate. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 87 Problem: Wrong characters are displayed on the screen. Solution: Did you follow the correct procedure when installing the operating system or program? If you did, have the external monitor serviced. Problem: The Extend desktop function does not work. Solution: Enable the Extend desktop function by doing the following:

1. Connect the external monitor to the monitor connector, and then connect the monitor to an electrical outlet. 2. Turn on the external monitor and the computer. 3. Right-click on the desktop, and do the following:

For Windows 7: Click Screen resolution. For Windows 10: Click Display settings, show the displayed window in full screen, and then click Advanced display settings. Note: If your computer cannot detect the external monitor, click the Detect button. 4. Click the Monitor-2 icon. 5. Select Extend these displays for multiple displays. 6. Click the Monitor-1 icon (for the primary display, the computer display). 7. Set the resolution for the primary display. 8. Click the Monitor-2 icon (for the external monitor). 9. Set the screen resolution for the secondary display. 10. Set the relative position of each monitor by dragging its icon. You can set the monitors in any relative position, but the icons must touch each other. 11. Click OK to apply the changes. Note: For the Windows 7 operating system, to change the color settings, right-click on the desktop, and click Screen resolution. Click Advanced settings, select the Monitor tab, and then set Colors. Problem: If you use the Extend desktop function, you cannot set a higher resolution or higher refresh rate on the secondary display. Solution: Change the resolution and the color depth to lower settings for the primary display. Refer to the solution to the above problem. Problem: Display switching does not work. Solution: If you use the Extend desktop function, disable it, and change the display output location. If a DVD movie or a video clip is playing, stop the playback, close the program, and then change the display output location. Problem: The screen position on the external monitor is incorrect when that monitor is set for a high resolution. Solution: Sometimes, when you use a high resolution such as 1600x1200, the image is shifted to left or right on the screen. To correct this, first make sure that your external monitor supports the display mode

(the resolution and the refresh rate) that you have set. If it does not, set a display mode that the monitor supports. If it does support the display mode you have set, go to the setup menu for the monitor itself and adjust the settings there. Usually the external monitor has buttons for access to the setup menu. For details, see the documentation that comes with the monitor. 88 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Audio problems Problem: Wave or MIDI sound does not play correctly. Solution: Make sure that the built-in audio device is configured correctly. 1. Open Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 4. Double-click Sound, video and game controllers. 5. Make sure that the following device is enabled and configured correctly:

Conexant CX20672 SmartAudio HD Problem: Recordings made using the microphone input are not loud enough. Solution: Make sure that the Microphone Boost function is turned on and set by doing the following:

1. Open Control Panel. 2. Click Hardware and Sound. 3. Click Sound. 4. Click the Recording tab in the Sound window. 5. Select Microphone, and click the Properties button. 6. Click the Levels tab, and move the Microphone Boost slider upwards. 7. Click OK. Note: For details about controlling volume, refer to your Windows online help. Problem: A volume or balance slider cannot be moved. Solution: The slider might be grayed out. This means that its position is fixed by the hardware and cannot be changed. Problem: The volume sliders do not stay in place when some audio programs are used. Solution: It is normal for the sliders to change position when certain sound applications are used. The applications are aware of the settings in the Volume Mixer window and are allowed to change the settings themselves. An example is the Windows Media Player. Usually the program has sliders available to control the sound from within the program. Problem: The balance slider cannot completely mute one channel. Solution: The control is designed to compensate for minor differences in balance and does not completely mute either channel. Problem: There is no volume control for MIDI sound in the Volume Mixer window. Solution: Use the hardware volume control. This is because the built-in synthesizer software does not support the control. Problem: The sound cannot be turned off even if you set the Master volume control at minimum. Solution: You still can hear some sound even though you have set the Master volume control at minimum. To turn off the sound completely, go to the Master volume control and select Mute speakers. Problem: When you connect headphones to your computer while playing sound, a speaker does not produce sound. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 89 Solution: Once the headphone is attached, the streaming is automatically redirected to it. If you want to listen to sound from the speakers again, be sure to set those speakers as the default device. The procedure is as follows:

1. Open Control Panel. 2. Click All Control Panel Items. 3. Click the SmartAudio icon. The SmartAudio window opens. 4. Look at the playback devices. If you have attached headphones, the headphones will be automatically set as the default device, and the icon for that headphones will be checked. 5. To set a different device as the default, double-click the icon for those speakers. That icon will now have a check mark. 6. Play any sound by use of a music program such as Windows Media Player. Make sure that sound comes from the speakers. For details, refer to the help information system for SmartAudio. Battery and power problems This topic contains instructions on troubleshooting battery and power problems. Battery problems Problem: The battery cannot be fully charged in the standard charge time when the computer is powered off. Solution: The battery might be over-discharged. Do the following:

1. Turn off the computer. 2. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and let it charge. If a quick charger is available, use it to charge the over-discharged battery. If the battery cannot be fully charged in 24 hours, use a new battery. Problem: Your computer shuts down before the battery-status icon in the Windows notification area shows empty, or your computer operates after the battery-status icon in the Windows notification area shows empty. Solution: Discharge and recharge the battery. Problem: The operating time for a fully charged battery is short. Solution: Discharge and recharge the battery. If your battery operating time is still short, use a new battery. Problem: The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery. Solution: The surge protector in the battery might be active. Turn off the computer for one minute to reset the protector; then turn on the computer again. Problem: The battery cannot be charged. Solution: You cannot charge the battery when it is too hot. If the battery feels hot, remove it from the computer and allow it to cool to room temperature. After it cools, reinstall it and recharge the battery. If it still cannot be charged, have it serviced. An ac power adapter problem Problem: The ac power adapter is connected to the computer and the working electrical outlet, but the power adapter (power plug) icon is not displayed in the Windows notification area. Solution: Do the following:

90 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 1. Make sure that the connection of the ac power adapter is correct. For instructions on connecting the ac power adapter, see Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide that comes with your computer. 2. If the connection of the ac power adapter is correct, turn off the computer. Then disconnect the ac power adapter and remove the main battery. 3. Reinstall the battery and reconnect the ac power adapter. Then turn on the computer. 4. If the power adapter icon still is not displayed in the Windows notification area and the system-status indicator does not blink three times when an ac power source is connected, have the ac power adapter and your computer serviced. Note: If you are using the Windows 7 operating system, to display the power adapter (power plug) icon, click Show hidden icons in the Windows notification area. Power problems Print these instructions now and keep it with your computer for reference later. If your computer is getting no power at all, check the following items:

1. Verify the power button. Refer to Status indicators on page 7. 2. Check all power connections. Remove any power strips and surge protectors to connect the ac power adapter directly to the ac power outlet. 3. Inspect the ac power adapter. Check for any physical damage, and make sure that the power cable is firmly attached to the adapter brick and the computer. 4. Verify the ac power source is working by attaching another device to the outlet. 5. Remove all devices and then test for system power with minimal devices attached. a. Disable the built-in battery. See Disabling the built-in battery on page 103. b. Turn off the computer. c. Disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. d. Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. e. Remove the memory module. Refer to Replacing a memory module on page 111. f. Remove the hard disk drive. Refer to Replacing the internal storage drive on page 109. g. Wait for 30 seconds, and then reinstall the memory module and the known good battery or the ac power adapter to test the computer with minimal devices attached first. h. Reinstall each device one at a time that you have removed in the earlier steps. If your computer does not run on battery power, check the following items:

1. Disable the built-in batter. See Disabling the built-in battery on page 103. Then restart the computer. 2. Swap batteries with another similar model, if available. If another similar ThinkPad model is available, then verify that the battery works in the other computer and that the battery for the other model works in this computer. A power button problem Problem: The system does not respond, and you cannot turn off the computer. Solution: Turn off the computer by pressing and holding the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the system is still not reset, remove the ac power adapter and the battery. Boot problems Print these instructions now and keep them with your computer for reference later. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 91 If you receive an error message before the operating system loads, follow the appropriate corrective actions for POST error messages. If you receive an error message while the operating system is loading the desktop configuration after the POST is completed, check the following items:

1. Go to the Lenovo Support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support and search for the error message. 2. Go to the Microsoft Knowledge Base homepage at http://support.microsoft.com/ and search for the error message. Sleep and hibernation problems Problem: The computer enters sleep mode unexpectedly. Solution: If the microprocessor overheats, the computer automatically enters sleep mode to allow the computer to cool and to protect the microprocessor and other internal components. Check the settings for sleep mode. Problem: The computer enters sleep mode (the system-status indicator blinks slowly immediately after the power-on self-test. Solution: Make sure that:

The battery is charged. The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. Refer to Operating environment on page 12. If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. Problem: A critical low-battery error occurs, and the computer immediately turns off. Solution: The battery power is getting low. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer and plug it into an electrical outlet, or replace the battery with a charged one. Problem: The computer display remains blank after you press Fn to return from sleep mode. Solution: Check whether an external monitor was disconnected or turned off while the computer was in sleep mode. If you disconnected or turned off the external monitor, connect it or turn it on before resuming the computer from the sleep mode. When resuming the computer from the sleep mode without attaching the external monitor or turning it on, and the computer display remains blank, press F7 to bring up the computer display. Problem: The computer does not return from sleep mode, or the system-status indicator blinks slowly and the computer does not work. Solution: If the system does not return from sleep mode, it might have entered sleep or hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the system-status indicator. If the system-status indicator blinks slowly, your computer is in sleep mode. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer; then press Fn. If the system-status indicator is off, your computer is in power-off state or hibernation mode. Connect the ac power adapter to the computer; then press the power button to resume operation. If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system might stop responding and you might not be able to turn off the computer. In this case, you need to reset the computer. If you have not saved your data, it might be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds or more. If the system is still not reset, remove the ac power adapter and the battery. Problem: Your computer does not enter sleep or hibernation mode. 92 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Solution: Check whether any option has been selected to disable your computer from entering sleep or hibernation mode. If your computer tries to enter sleep mode but the request is rejected, the device attached to the USB connector might have been disabled. If this occurs, do a hot-unplug-and-plug operation for the USB device. Problem: The battery discharges slightly while the computer is in hibernation mode. Solution: If the wakeup function is enabled, the computer consumes a small amount of power. This is not a defect. For details, refer to Power-saving modes on page 27. Problems with drives and other storage devices This section includes storage drive problems. Hard disk drive problems Problem: The hard disk drive makes a rattling noise intermittently. Solution: The rattling noise might be heard:

When the hard disk drive begins or finishes getting access to data When you carry the hard disk drive When you carry your computer This is a normal characteristic of a hard disk drive and is not a defect. Problem: The hard disk drive does not work. Solution: On the Startup menu of ThinkPad Setup, make sure that the hard disk drive is on the Boot priority order list. If it is on the Excluded from boot order list, it is disabled. Select the entry for it on the list and press the Shift+1 key. This moves the entry to the Boot priority order list. Problem: After setting a hard disk password on the hard disk drive of the computer, you moved the drive to another computer. Now you cannot unlock the hard disk password. Solution: Your computer supports an enhanced password algorithm. Computers older than yours might not support such a security function. A solid-state drive problem Problem: When you compress files or folders by use of the data compression function in Windows, and then decompress them, the process of writing to or reading from the files or folders is slow. Solution: Apply the disk defragmentation tool in Windows for faster access to the data. A software problem Problem: An application does not run correctly. Solution: Make sure that the problem is not being caused by the application. Check that your computer has the minimum required memory to run the application. Refer to the manuals supplied with the application. Check the following:

The application is designed to operate with your operating system. Other applications run correctly on your computer. Chapter 8. Troubleshooting computer problems 93 The necessary device drivers are installed. The application works when it is run on some other computer. If an error message is displayed while you are using the application, refer to the manuals supplied with the application. If the application still does not run correctly, contact your place of purchase or a service representative for help. Problems with ports and connectors The following are the most common problems with ports and connectors. A USB problem Problem: A device connected to the USB connector does not work. Solution: Open the Device Manager window. Make sure that the USB device setup is correct, and that the assignment of computer resource and the installation of the device driver are correct. To open the Device Manager window, go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Device Manager. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation. 94 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 9. Recovery overview This chapter contains the following topics:

Recovery overview for the Windows 7 operating system on page 95 Recovery overview for the Windows 10 operating system on page 100 Recovery overview for the Windows 7 operating system This section provides information about the recovery solutions provided by Lenovo on the Windows 7 operating system. Notes:

There are a variety of methods to choose from when considering how to recover in the event of a software-

or hardware-related problem. Some methods vary depending on the type of your operating system. The product on the recovery media might be used only for the following purposes:

Restore the product preinstalled on your computer Reinstall the product Modify the product using the Additional Files To prevent potential performance risks or unexpected behavior that might be caused by the new hard disk drive technology, it is recommended that you use one of the following software programs for backup:

Rescue and Recovery version 4.52 or later Symantec Norton Ghost version 15 or later To start the Symantec Norton Ghost program, do the following:

1. Click Start Run. The Run window opens. 2. Type cmd in the field. Then click OK. 3. Type ghost -align=1mb and press Enter. Acronis True Image 2010 or later Paragon Backup & Recovery 10 Suit or later, Paragon Backup & Recovery 10 Home or later Creating and using a recovery media You can use recovery media to restore the hard disk drive to the factory default settings. Recovery media are useful if you transfer the computer to another area, sell the computer, recycle the computer, or put the computer in an operational state after all other methods of recovery have failed. As a precautionary measure, it is important to create recovery media as early as possible. Note: The recovery operations you can perform using recovery media vary depending on the operating system from which the recovery media were created. The recovery media might contain a boot medium and a data medium. Your Microsoft Windows license permits you to create only one data medium, so it is important that you store the recovery media in a safe place after you have made them. Creating recovery media This section provides instructions on how to create recovery media. Note: You can create recovery media using discs or external USB storage devices. Copyright Lenovo 2016 95 To create recovery media, click Start All Programs Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools Factory Recovery Disks. Then, follow the instructions on the screen. Using recovery media This section provides instructions on how to use recovery media on different operating systems. You can use recovery media to restore the computer to the factory default settings only. You can use recovery media to put the computer in an operational state after all other methods of recovery have failed. Attention: When you use recovery media to restore the computer to the factory default settings, all the files currently on the hard disk drive will be deleted and replaced by the factory default settings. To use recovery media, do the following:

1. Depending on the type of your recovery media, connect the boot medium (memory key or other USB storage device) to the computer, or insert the boot disc into the optical drive. 2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Boot Menu window opens, release the F12 key. 3. Select the desired startup device and press Enter. The restore process begins. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the operation. Notes:

1. After restoring your computer to the factory default settings, you might have to reinstall device drivers for some devices. See Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device drivers on page 99. 2. Some computers come with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works preinstalled. If you need to recover or reinstall your Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works programs, you must use the Microsoft Office CD or Microsoft Works CD. These discs are provided only with computers preinstalled with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works. Performing backup and recovery operations The Rescue and Recovery program enables you to back up all your hard disk drive contents including the operating system, data files, software programs, and personal settings. You can designate where the Rescue and Recovery program stores the backup:

In a protected area of your hard disk drive On the secondary hard disk drive if a secondary hard disk drive is installed in your computer On an attached external USB hard disk drive On a network drive On recordable discs (a recordable optical drive is required for this option) After you have backed up the contents on the hard disk drive , you can restore the complete contents of the hard disk drive , restore only the selected files, or restore only the Windows operating system and applications. Performing a backup operation This section provides instructions on how to perform a backup operation using the Rescue and Recovery program. 1. From the Windows desktop, click Start All Programs Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens. 2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow. 96 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 3. Click Back up your hard drive and select backup operation options. Then, follow the instructions on the screen to complete the backup operation. Performing a recovery operation This section provides instructions on how to perform a recovery operation using the Rescue and Recovery program. 1. From the Windows desktop, click Start All Programs Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens. 2. In the Rescue and Recovery program main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow. 3. Click the Restore your system from a backup icon. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the recovery operation. For more information about performing a recovery operation from the Rescue and Recovery workspace, see Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace on page 97. Using the Rescue and Recovery workspace The Rescue and Recovery workspace resides in a protected, hidden area of your hard disk drive that operates independently from the Windows operating system. This enables you to perform recovery operations even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. You can perform the following recovery operations from the Rescue and Recovery workspace:

Rescue files from your hard disk drive or from a backup The Rescue and Recovery workspace enables you to locate files on your hard disk drive and transfer them to a network drive or other recordable media, such as a USB device or a disc. This solution is available even if you did not back up your files or if changes were made to the files since your last backup operation. You also can rescue individual files from a Rescue and Recovery backup located on your local hard disk drive, a USB device, or a network drive. Restore your hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup If you have backed up your hard disk drive using the Rescue and Recovery program, you can restore the hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup, even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. Restore your hard disk drive to the factory default settings The Rescue and Recovery workspace enables you to restore the complete contents of your hard disk drive to the factory default settings. If you have multiple partitions on your hard disk drive, you have the option to restore the factory default settings to the C: partition and leave the other partitions intact. Because the Rescue and Recovery workspace operates independently from the Windows operating system, you can restore the factory default settings even if you cannot start the Windows operating system. Attention: If you restore the hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup or restore the hard disk drive to the factory default settings, all files on the primary hard disk drive partition (usually drive C:) will be deleted in the recovery process. If possible, make copies of important files. If you are unable to start the Windows operating system, you can use the rescue files feature of the Rescue and Recovery workspace to copy files from your hard disk drive to other media. To start the Rescue and Recovery workspace, do the following:

1. Make sure that the computer is turned off. 2. Repeatedly press and release the F11 key when turning on the computer. When you hear beeps or see a logo screen, release the F11 key. 3. If you have set a Rescue and Recovery password, type your password when prompted. The Rescue and Recovery workspace opens after a short delay. Chapter 9. Recovery overview 97 Note: If the Rescue and Recovery workspace fails to open, see Solving recovery problems on page 100. 4. Do one of the following:

To rescue files from your hard disk drive from a backup, click Rescue files and follow the instructions on the screen. To restore your hard disk drive from a Rescue and Recovery backup or to restore your hard disk drive to the factory default settings, click Restore your system and follow the instructions on the screen. For more information about the features of the Rescue and Recovery workspace, click Help. Notes:

1. After restoring your hard disk drive to the factory default settings, you might have to reinstall device drivers for some devices. See Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device drivers on page 99. 2. Some computers come with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works preinstalled. If you need to recover or reinstall your Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works programs, you must use the Microsoft Office CD or Microsoft Works CD. These discs are provided only with computers preinstalled with Microsoft Office or Microsoft Works. Creating and using a rescue medium With a rescue medium, such as a disc or a USB hard disk drive, you can recover the computer from failures that prevent you from gaining access to the Rescue and Recovery workspace on your hard disk drive. Notes:

1. The recovery operations you can perform using a rescue medium vary depending on the operating system. 2. The rescue disc can be started in all types of optical drives. Creating a rescue medium This section provides instructions on how to create a rescue medium. 1. From the Windows desktop, click Start All Programs Lenovo PC Experience Lenovo Tools Enhanced Backup and Restore. The Rescue and Recovery program opens. 2. In the Rescue and Recovery main window, click the Launch advanced Rescue and Recovery arrow. 3. Click the Create Rescue Media icon. The Create Rescue and Recovery Media window opens. 4. In the Rescue Media area, select the type of the rescue medium you want to create. You can create a rescue medium using a disc, a USB hard disk drive, or a secondary internal hard disk drive. 5. Click OK and follow the instructions on the screen to create a rescue medium. Using a rescue medium This section provides instructions on how to use the rescue medium you have created. If you have created a rescue medium using a disc, use the following instructions to use the rescue medium:

1. Turn off your computer. 2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Boot Menu window opens, release the F12 key. 3. In the Boot Menu window, select the desired optical drive as the first boot device. Then, insert the rescue disc into the optical drive and press Enter. The rescue medium starts. If you have created a rescue medium using a USB hard disk drive, use the following instructions to use the rescue medium:

1. Attach the USB hard disk drive to one of the USB connectors on your computer. 98 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 2. Repeatedly press and release the F12 key when turning on the computer. When the Boot Menu window opens, release the F12 key. 3. In the Boot Menu window, select the USB hard disk drive as the first boot device and press Enter. The rescue medium starts. When the rescue medium starts, the Rescue and Recovery workspace opens. The help information for each feature is available from the Rescue and Recovery workspace. Follow the instructions to complete the recovery process. Reinstalling preinstalled programs and device drivers Your computer has provisions that enable you to reinstall selected factory-installed programs and device drivers. Reinstalling preinstalled programs To reinstall some preinstalled application programs, do the following:

1. Turn on your computer. 2. Go to the C:\SWTOOLS directory. 3. Open the APPS folder. The folder contains several subfolders named for the various preinstalled applications. 4. Open the subfolder for the application you want to reinstall. 5. Double-click Setup, and then follow the on-screen steps to reinstall the application. Reinstalling preinstalled device drivers Attention: When you reinstall device drivers, you are changing the current configuration of your computer. Reinstall device drivers only when it is necessary to correct a problem with your computer. To reinstall a device driver for a factory-installed device, do the following:

1. Turn on your computer. 2. Go to the C:\SWTOOLS directory. 3. Open the DRIVERS folder. The folder contains several subfolders named for the various devices installed in your computer (for example, AUDIO and VIDEO). 4. Open the subfolder for the device. 5. Reinstall the device driver by one of the following methods:

In the subfolder for the device, look for a text file (a file with the extension .txt). The text file contains information on how to reinstall that device driver. If the subfolder for the device contains a file of setup information (a file with the extension .inf), you can use the Add New Hardware program (in the Windows Control Panel) to reinstall the device driver. Not all device drivers can be reinstalled by use of this program. In the Add New Hardware program, when prompted for the device driver you want to install, click Have Disk and Browse. Then select the device driver file from the device subfolder. In the subfolder for the device, look for the executable file (a file with the extension .exe). Double-click the file, and follow the instructions on the screen. Attention: If you need updated device drivers for your computer, do not download them from the Windows Update Web site. Obtain them from Lenovo. For more information, see Making sure device drivers are up-to-date on page 72. Chapter 9. Recovery overview 99 Solving recovery problems If you are unable to access the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the Windows environment, do one of the following:

Use a rescue medium to start the Rescue and Recovery workspace. See Creating and using a rescue medium on page 98. Use recovery media if all other methods of recovery have failed and you need to restore the hard disk drive to the factory default settings. See Creating and using a recovery media on page 95. Note: If you are unable to access the Rescue and Recovery workspace or the Windows environment from a rescue medium or recovery media, you might not have the rescue device (an internal hard disk drive, a disc, a USB hard disk drive, or other external devices) set as the first boot device in the startup device sequence. You must first make sure that your rescue device is set as the first boot device in the startup device sequence in the ThinkPad Setup program. For detailed information on how to temporarily or permanently change the startup device sequence, see Startup menu on page 66. It is important to create a rescue medium and a set of recovery media as early as possible and store them in a safe place for future use. Recovery overview for the Windows 10 operating system The Windows recovery programs enable you to reset your computer or use advanced startup options. It is recommended that you create a recovery USB drive as early as possible. Store the recovery USB drive as a backup or replacement for the Windows recovery programs. For more information, see Creating and using a recovery USB drive on page 101. Resetting your computer If your computer does not perform well, you might consider resetting your computer. In the resetting process, you can choose to keep your files or remove them, and then reinstall the Windows operating system. To reset your computer, do the following:

Note: The graphical user interface (GUI) items of the operating system might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Reset this PC section, click Get started. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen to reset your computer. Using advanced startup options With advanced startup options, you can change the firmware settings of the computer, change the startup settings of the Windows operating system, start the computer from an external device, or restore the Windows operating system from a system image. To use advanced startup options, do the following:

Note: The GUI items of the operating system might change without notice. 1. Open the Start menu and then click Settings. If Settings is not displayed, click All apps to display all programs, and then click Settings Update & security Recovery. 2. In the Advanced startup section, click Restart now Troubleshoot Advanced options. 100 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 3. Select a desired startup option, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Recovering your operating system if Windows 10 fails to start The Windows recovery environment on your computer is capable of operating independently from the Windows 10 operating system. This enables you to recover or repair the operating system even if the Windows 10 operating system fails to start. After two consecutive failed boot attempts, the Windows recovery environment starts automatically. Then you can choose repair and recovery options by following the instructions on the screen. Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the recovery process. Creating and using a recovery USB drive You can create a recovery USB drive as a backup for the Windows recovery programs. With the recovery USB drive, you can troubleshoot and fix the problems even if the preinstalled Windows recovery programs are damaged. Creating a recovery USB drive The USB drive that you use to create the recovery USB drive must be at least 16 GB of storage. The actual USB capacity that is required depends on the size of the recovery image. Attention: The creation process deletes anything stored on the USB drive. To avoid data loss, make a backup copy of all the data that you want to keep. To create a recovery USB drive, do the following:

Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power during the following process. 1. Connect a proper USB drive (at least 16 GB of storage). 2. Type recovery in the search box on the taskbar. Then click Create a recovery drive. 3. Click Yes in the User Account Control window to allow the Recovery Media Creator program to start. 4. In the Recovery Drive window, follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery USB drive. Using the recovery USB drive If you cannot start your computer, refer to the corresponding information in the topic Chapter 8 Troubleshooting computer problems on page 77 to try to solve the problem by yourself. If you still cannot start your computer, use the recovery USB drive to recover your computer. To use a recovery USB drive, do the following:

Note: Ensure that your computer is connected to ac power. 1. Connect the recovery USB drive to the computer. 2. Turn on or restart the computer. Before the Windows operating system starts, repeatedly press the F12 key. The Boot Menu window opens. 3. Select the recovery USB drive as the boot device. 4. Select a preferred keyboard layout. 5. Click Troubleshoot to display the optional recovery solutions. 6. Select a corresponding recovery solution according to your situation. Then follow the instructions on the screen to complete the process. Chapter 9. Recovery overview 101 102 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 10. Replacing devices This chapter contains the following topics:

Static electricity prevention on page 103 Replacing the keyboard on page 104 Replacing the internal storage drive on page 109 Replacing a memory module on page 111 Static electricity prevention Static electricity, although harmless to you, can seriously damage computer components and options. Improper handling of static-sensitive parts can cause damage to the part. When you unpack an option or a CRU, do not open the static-protective package that contains the part until the instructions direct you to install the part. When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:

Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you. Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the edges. Never touch exposed circuitry. Prevent others from touching components. When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-protective package that contains the part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body. When possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-protective package and install the part without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective package on a smooth, level surface and place the part on the package. Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface. Disabling the built-in battery Before replacing any hardware component except the removable battery, ensure that you have disabled the built-in battery by doing the following:

For Windows 10, disable Fast Startup before disabling the built-in battery. To disable Fast Startup for Windows 10, do the following:

1. From the desktop, type Power in the search box on the taskbar, and select Power Options. 2. Click Change what the power buttons do on the left pane. 3. Click Change settings that are currently unavailable at the top. 4. If prompted by User Account Control (UAC), click Yes. 5. Clear the Turn on fast startup check box, and then click Save changes. To disable the build-in battery, do the following:

1. Turn off your computer and disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Copyright Lenovo 2016 103 2. Turn on your computer. When the logo screen is displayed, immediately press F1 to enter ThinkPad Setup. 3. Select Config Power. The Power submenu is displayed. 4. Select Disable built-in battery and press Enter. 5. Select Yes in the Setup Confirmation window. The built-in battery is disabled and the computer turns off automatically. Wait three to five minutes to let the computer cool. Replacing the keyboard Before you start, print these instructions and read Important safety information on page vi. Note: Depending on the model, your computer might look different from the illustrations in this topic. DANGER During electrical storms, do not perform any replacement and do not connect or disconnect the telephone cable from the telephone outlet on the wall. Removing the keyboard To remove the keyboard, do the following:

1. Disable the built-in battery. See Disabling the built-in battery on page 103. 2. Turn off the computer and then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait several minutes to let the computer cool. 3. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. 4. Loosen the screws 1 and then remove the cover 2 . 104 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 5. Remove the screws that secure the keyboard. 6. Turn the computer over and open the display. 7. Push hard in the direction shown by the arrows to unlatch the front side of the keyboard. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 105 8. Detach the keyboard from the keyboard frame. 9. Detach the connectors to remove the keyboard. Installing the keyboard To install the keyboard, do the following:

106 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 1. Attach the connectors. 2. Insert the keyboard. Ensure that the rear edge of the keyboard is under the frame. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 107 3. Slide the keyboard into place in the direction shown by the arrows. 4. Reinstall the screws. 108 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 5. Reinstall the computer cover 1 . Then tighten the screws 2 . 6. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and all cables. Replacing the internal storage drive Before you start, print these instructions and read Important safety information on page vi. Attention: The internal storage drive is sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and permanent loss of data. Observe the following guidelines:

Replace the storage drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and slot of the storage drive are not designed for frequent changes or drive swapping. Do not drop the storage drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the storage drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that absorbs any physical shocks. Do not apply pressure to the cover of the storage drive. Do not touch the connector. Before removing the storage drive, make a backup copy of all the information on it and then turn off the computer. Never remove the storage drive while the computer is operating, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. To replace the internal storage drive, do the following:

1. Disable the built-in battery. See Disabling the built-in battery on page 103. 2. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait several minutes to let the computer cool. 3. Close the computer display and turn the computer over. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 109 4. Loosen the screws 1 and then remove the cover 2 . 5. Lift the tab to remove the storage drive out of the computer. 110 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide 6. Place the new drive into the drive bay. 7. Reinstall the computer cover 1 . Then tighten the screws 2 . 8. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and all cables. Replacing a memory module Before you start, print these instructions and read Important safety information on page vi. Increasing memory capacity is an effective way to make programs run faster. To replace or add a memory module, ensure you follow the notices and instructions in this topic. Note: The operating speed of a memory module has dependency on the system configuration. In some conditions, the memory module in your computer might not be able to operate at the maximum speed. Attention: Before you start installing a memory module, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. Static electricity could damage the memory module. To replace a memory module, do the following:

Chapter 10. Replacing devices 111 1. Disable the built-in battery. See Disabling the built-in battery on page 103. 2. Turn off the computer; then disconnect the ac power adapter and all cables from the computer. Wait several minutes to let the computer cool. 3. Close the computer display and turn it over. 4. Loosen the screws 1 and then remove the cover 2 . 5. Open the latches on both sides of the memory slot at the same time 1 and then remove the memory module 2 . 6. Place the notched end of the new memory module toward the contact edge side of the memory slot. Insert the memory module 1 into the slot at an angle of about 20 degrees. Pivot the memory module 112 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide downward until it snaps into place 2 . Ensure that the memory module is firmly installed in the slot and cannot be moved easily. Attention: Do not touch the contact edge of the memory module. Otherwise the memory module might get damaged. 7. Reinstall the computer cover 1 . Then tighten the screws 2 . 8. Turn the computer over again. Connect the ac power adapter and all cables. Chapter 10. Replacing devices 113 114 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Chapter 11. Getting support This chapter contains the following topics:

Before you contact Lenovo on page 115 Getting help and service on page 115 Purchasing additional services on page 117 Before you contact Lenovo Often, you can solve your computer problems by referring to the information in the explanations of error codes, running diagnostic programs, or by consulting the Lenovo Web site. Registering your computer Register your computer with Lenovo. For more information, see Registering your computer on page 17. Downloading system updates Downloading updated software might resolve problems you experience with your computer. To download updated software, go to the following Web site and follow the instructions on the screen:

http://www.lenovo.com/support Recording information Before you talk to a Lenovo representative, record the following important information about your computer. Recording problem symptoms and details Collect the answers to the questions below before you call for help. Then, you will be able to get help as quickly as possible. What is the problem? Is it continuous or intermittent?

Is there an error message? What is the error code, if any?

What operating system are you using? Which version?

Which software programs were running at the time of the problem?

Can the problem be reproduced? If so, how?

Recording system information The serial number label is on the bottom of your computer. Record the machine type and the serial number. What is the name of your Lenovo product?

What is the machine type?

What is the serial number?

Getting help and service If you need help, service, technical assistance, or just want more information about Lenovo products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from Lenovo to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional information about Lenovo and our products, what to do if you experience a problem with your computer, and whom to call for service should it be necessary. Copyright Lenovo 2016 115 Information about your computer and preinstalled software, if any, is available in the documentation that comes with your computer. The documentation includes printed books, online books, readme files, and help files. In addition, information about Lenovo products is available on the World Wide Web. Microsoft Service Packs are the latest software source for Windows product updates. They are available through Web download (connection charges might apply) or through disc. For more specific information and links, go to http://www.microsoft.com. Lenovo offers technical assistance with installation of, or questions related to, Service Packs for your Lenovo-preinstalled Microsoft Windows product. For information, contact the Customer Support Center. Using diagnostic programs Many computer problems can be solved without outside assistance. If you experience a problem with your computer, the first place to start is the troubleshooting information in your computer documentation. If you suspect a software problem, see the documentation, including readme files and help information systems, that comes with the operating system or application program. ThinkPad notebook computers come with a set of diagnostic programs that you can use to help you identify hardware problems. See Diagnosing problems on page 77 for instructions on how to use the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device drivers or other software. You can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates from the Lenovo Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support. Lenovo Support Web site Technical support information is available on the Lenovo Support Web site at:

http://www.lenovo.com/support This Web site is updated with the latest support information such as the following:

Drivers and software Diagnostic solutions Product and service warranty Product and parts details User guides and manuals Knowledge base and frequently asked questions Calling Lenovo If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, during the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through the Customer Support Center. The following services are available during the warranty period:

Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem. Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service. Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes

(ECs) that apply to your hardware available. The following items are not covered:

116 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or nonwarranted parts Identification of software problem sources Configuration of UEFI BIOS as part of an installation or upgrade Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS) Installation and maintenance of application programs For the terms and conditions of the Lenovo Limited Warranty that applies to your Lenovo hardware product, see Warranty information in the Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide that comes with your computer. If possible, be near your computer when you make your call in case the technical assistance representative needs to help you resolve a computer problem. Ensure that you have downloaded the most current drivers and system updates, run diagnostics, and recorded information before you call. When calling for technical assistance, have the following information available:

Machine type and model Serial numbers of your computer, monitor, and other components, or your proof of purchase Description of the problem Exact wording of any error messages Hardware and software configuration information for your system Telephone numbers For a list of the Lenovo Support phone numbers for your country or region, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone or refer to the Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide that comes with your computer. Note: Phone numbers are subject to change without notice. The latest phone numbers are available at http://www.lenovo.com/support/phone. If the number for your country or region is not provided, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Purchasing additional services During and after the warranty period, you can purchase additional services, such as support for Lenovo and non-Lenovo hardware, operating systems, and application programs; network setup and configuration services; upgraded or extended hardware repair services; and custom installations services. Service availability and service name might vary by country. For more information about these services, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/accessories/services/index.html Chapter 11. Getting support 117 118 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Appendix A. Regulatory information The latest compliance information is available at http://www.lenovo.com/compliance. Location of the UltraConnect wireless antennas ThinkPad notebook computers feature an integrated UltraConnect wireless antenna system built into the display for optimal reception, enabling wireless communication wherever you are. Antenna location 1 Wireless LAN antenna (auxiliary) 2 Wireless LAN antenna (main) Wireless related information Wireless interoperability Wireless LAN Card is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), Complementary Code Keying (CCK), and/or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:

The 802.11b/g Standard, 802.11a/b/g, 802.11n or 802.11ac on Wireless LANs, as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. The Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance. A Bluetooth device is designed to be interoperable with any Bluetooth products that are compliant to Bluetooth Specification 4.0 as defined by the Bluetooth SIG. The following profiles are supported by the Bluetooth devices:

Note: Depending on the Bluetooth card and the operating system you use, some profiles might not be available. Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) Audio/Video Control Transport Protocol (AVCTP) Copyright Lenovo 2016 119 Audio/Video Distribution Transport Protocol (AVDTP) A/V Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) Basic Imaging Profile (BIP) Basic Printing Profile (BPP) Dial-Up Networking Profile (DUN) File Transfer Profile (FTP) Generic Access Profile (GAP) Generic A/V Distribution Profile (GAVDP) Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP) Headset Profile (HSP) Hands-Free Profile (HFP) Human Interface Device Profile (HID) Message Access Profile (MAP) Object Exchange Protocol (OBEX) Object Push Profile (OPP) Personal Area Networking Profile (PAN) Phone Book Access Profile (PBAP) Service Discovery Protocol (SDP) Synchronization Profile (SYNC) Video Distribution Profile (VDP) Generic Attribute Profile (GATT) Proximity Profile Find Me Profile Immediate Alert Profile Battery Status Profile Usage environment and your health Integrated wireless cards emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy like other radio devices. However, the level of energy emitted is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones. Due to the fact that integrated wireless cards operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, Lenovo believes they are safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situation or environment, the use of integrated wireless cards might be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations and areas might for example include:

Using the integrated wireless cards on board of airplanes, in hospitals or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. 120 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization (such as airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use integrated wireless cards prior to turning on the computer. Wireless-radio compliance information Computer models equipped with wireless communications comply with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Brazil wireless-radio compliance information Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. This equipment is a secondary type device, that is, it is not protected against harmful interference, even if the interference is caused by a device of the same type, and it also cannot cause any interference to primary type devices. Mexico wireless-radio compliance information Advertencia: En Mexico la operacin de este equipo estsujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Locating wireless regulatory notices For more information about the wireless regulatory notices, refer to the Regulatory Notice shipped with your computer. If your computer is shipped without the Regulatory Notice, you can find it on the Web site at:

http://www.lenovo.com/UserManuals Certification related information The following table contains information of the product name, compliance ID, and machine types. Product name ThinkPad E560p ThinkPad S5 Compliance ID TP00080A TP00080A Machine types 20G5 20G4 Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number (ECCN) of 5A992.c. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission Declaration of Conformity The following information refers to the ThinkPad E560p and ThinkPad S5 notebook computer, machine types 20G4 and 20G5. Appendix A. Regulatory information 121 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than specified or recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Phone Number: 919-294-5900 Industry Canada Class B emission compliance statement CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. EU contact: Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia 122 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide German Class B compliance statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Deutschland:

Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen

- CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo

(Deutschland) GmbH, Meitnerstr. 9, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:

Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B. Class 1 laser product compliance statement This product complies with International Standard EN/IEC 60825-1:2007 edition 2 for a Class 1 laser product. This product also complies with US FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. Manufactured by Intel Corporation, 2200 Mission College Blvd., Santa Clara, CA 95054, Model Number: Front F200 Korea Class B compliance statement Appendix A. Regulatory information 123 Japan VCCI Class B compliance statement Japan compliance statement for products which connect to the power mains with rated current less than or equal to 20 A per phase Japan notice for ac power cord The ac power cord shipped with your product can be used only for this specific product. Do not use the ac power cord for other devices. Lenovo product service information for Taiwan Eurasian compliance mark Brazil audio notice Ouvir sons com mais de 85 decibis por longos perodos pode provocar danos ao sistema auditivo. 124 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Appendix B. WEEE and recycling statements Lenovo encourages owners of information technology equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. The latest environmental information is available at http://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration. Important WEEE information The WEEE marking on Lenovo products applies to countries with WEEE and e-waste regulations (for example, the European WEEE Directive, India E-Waste Management & Handling Rules, 2011). Appliances are labeled in accordance with local regulations concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). These regulations determine the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable within each geography. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather put in the established collection systems for reclaiming these end of life products. Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, and recovery of WEEE and to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. For additional WEEE information, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/recycling Recycling information for China Recycling information for Japan Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law Copyright Lenovo 2016 125 for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details, visit the Lenovo Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan. Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, go to http://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan. Disposing of Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor. Disposing of disused lithium batteries from Lenovo computers A button-shaped lithium battery is installed inside your Lenovo computer to provide power to the computer clock while the computer is off or disconnected from the main power source. If you need to replace it with a new one, contact your place of purchase or contact Lenovo for service. If you need to dispose of a disused lithium battery, insulate it with vinyl tape, contact your place of purchase or an industrial-waste-disposal operator, and follow their instructions. Disposal of a lithium battery must comply with local ordinances and regulations. Disposing of a disused battery from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery or a nickel metal hydride battery. If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that person's instructions. You also can refer to the instructions at http://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/. If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at http://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/. Recycling information for Brazil Declaraes de Reciclagem no Brasil Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso Equipamentos eltricos e eletrnicos no devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados pontos de coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas especializadas no manuseio de resduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgos ambientais, de acordo com a legislao local. A Lenovo possui um canal especfico para auxili-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso voc possua um produto Lenovo em situao de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para:

reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, nmero de srie e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instrues para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo. 126 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Battery recycling information for Taiwan Battery recycling information for the European Union Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU). Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium). Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment Battery recycling information for the United States and Canada Appendix B. WEEE and recycling statements 127 128 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Appendix C. Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive

(RoHS) The latest environmental information is available at http://www.lenovo.com/ecodeclaration. European Union RoHS This Lenovo product, with included parts (cables, cords, and so on) meets the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS recast or RoHS 2). For more information about Lenovo worldwide compliance on RoHS, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/social_responsibility/us/en/RoHS_Communication.pdf Turkish RoHS The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE). Ukraine RoHS India RoHS RoHS compliant as per E-Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2011. Copyright Lenovo 2016 129 China RoHS 130 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Appendix D. ENERGY STAR model information ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with the ENERGY STAR qualified designation. You might find an ENERGY STAR mark affixed on the computer or displayed on the power settings interface. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if carry an ENERGY STAR mark, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers. 20G4 and 20G5 By using ENERGY STAR qualified products and taking advantage of the power-management features of the computer, you can help reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption can contribute to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, go to:

http://www.energystar.gov Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when the computer has been inactive for a specified length of time:

Power plan: Default Turn off the display: After 10 minutes Put the computer into sleep: After 20 minutes To awaken the computer from sleep mode, press the Fn key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, see the Windows help information on the computer. The Wake On LAN function is enabled when your Lenovo computer is shipped from the factory, and the setting remains valid even when the computer is in sleep mode. If you do not need to have Wake on LAN enabled while the computer is in sleep mode, you can reduce the power consumption and prolong the time in sleep mode, by disabling the setting of Wake on LAN for sleep mode. To disable the setting of Wake on LAN for sleep mode, do the following:

1. Go to Control Panel and click Hardware and Sound Device Manager. 2. In the Device Manager window, expand Network adapters. 3. Right-click your network adapter device, and click Properties. 4. Click the Power Management tab. Copyright Lenovo 2016 131 5. Clear the Allow this device to wake the computer check box. 6. Click OK. 132 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Appendix E. Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo Access Connections Active Protection System Secure Data Disposal ThinkPad ThinkPad logo TrackPoint UltraConnect Intel and Intel SpeedStep are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U. S. and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, Direct3D, BitLocker, and Cortana are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Copyright Lenovo 2016 133 134 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Appendix F. Notices Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent programs covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the application(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. Copyright Lenovo 2016 135 136 ThinkPad E560p and S5 User Guide Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Second Edition (January 2016) Copyright Lenovo 2015. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents About this manual. iii

. 1

. 1

. 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 5

. 7 7

. 7

. 7 8

. 8

. 8

. 9 9

. 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 14 14

. Chapter 1. Regulatory information for

. USA and Canada . Read first . USA Federal Communications Commission

.

(FCC)

. I. Approved wireless devices . II. Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module . III. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters . Canada Industry Canada (IC) . IC Certification number Numro dhomologation IC . Electronic emission notices . Chapter 2. Regulatory information for

. Europe. EU Declaration of Conformity . English. Bulgarian . Croatian . Czech . Danish . German . Estonian . Spanish . Greek . French . Italian . Latvian. Lithuanian . Dutch . Hungarian . Polish . Portuguese . Romanian . Slovenian. Copyright Lenovo 2015

. Slovakian . Finnish . Swedish . For model: 8260NGW . For model: 3165NGW . For model: BCM943162ZP . For model: QCNFA34AC . Chapter 3. ThinkPad

. LAN Bluetooth

. LAN

. Chapter 4. Regulatory information for other countries . Notice for users in Argentina (Nota para uso en

. Argentina)

. Notice for users in Brazil . Notice for users in India . Notice for users in Korea. Notice for users in Mexico (Nota para uso en

. Mexico)

. Notice for users in Morocco . Notice for users in Nigeria . Notice for users in Pakistan . Notice for users in Saudi Arabia . Notice for users in Serbia . Notice for users in Singapore . Notice for users in South Africa . Notice for users in Taiwan . Notice for users in Thailand . Notice for users in the UAE . Trademarks . 15 15 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 22

. 21

. 25 25 25 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 34 34 34 35 36 36 xxxix i ii Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules About this manual This manual contains regulatory information for the following ThinkPad products. ThinkPad notebook computer ThinkPad E460 and E560 ThinkPad E465 and E565 ThinkPad E560p 8260NGW 3165NGW BCM943162ZP QCNFA34AC Copyright Lenovo 2015 iii iv Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Chapter 1. Regulatory information for USA and Canada Read first Read this document before using your computer. This computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. Install and use your computer according to the following instructions. The latest Regulatory Notice manual is available on the Lenovo Web site. To download the manual, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support and then follow the on-screen instructions. Veuillez lire le prsent document avant d'utiliser votre ordinateur. Cet ordinateur est conforme aux normes de frquence radio et de scurit de tous les pays ou rgions dans lesquels son utilisation sans fil a t homologue. Installez et utilisez l'ordinateur en respectant les instructions qui suivent. La dernire version du manuel Regulatory Notice est disponible sur le site Web de Lenovo. Pour la tlcharger, rendez-vous sur http://www.lenovo.com/support et suivez les instructions l'cran. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. Approved wireless devices This section presents the FCC ID and model number of each wireless device. Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module FCC ID: PD98260NG (Model: 8260NGW) FCC ID: PD93165NG (Model: 3165NGW) FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP) FCC ID: PPD-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC) Notes:

The wireless LAN and the Bluetooth features operate at different frequencies exclusively, and transmit radio frequencies simultaneously. The wireless LAN modules marketed in the USA and Canada do not support or function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). II. Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module The wireless LAN and Bluetooth module in your computer is preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter nor remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. i) FCC ID location The FCC ID for the wireless LAN and Bluetooth module is shown on the enclosure of your computer. For the location of the FCC ID, see FCC ID and IC Certification information in User Guide. Copyright Lenovo 2015 1 ii) FCC RF Exposure compliance The radiated output power of the wireless LAN module authorized to use for your computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

CAUTION:

For ThinkPad E460 and E465:

The total radiated energy from the antennas connected to the installed wireless LAN module, conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement, regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093, when the computer was tested in either conventional notebook or tablet computer orientations. For ThinkPad 13:

The total radiated energy from the antennas connected to the installed wireless LAN module, conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement, regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093, when the computer was tested in either conventional notebook or tablet computer orientations. For ThinkPad E560 and E565:

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antennas connected to the installed wireless LAN module and all persons. If the distance cannot be maintained while the computer is closed, you must select sleep as the power mode when closing the display. The transmission antennas for the wireless LAN module are located in the LCD cover. See Locating the UltraConnect wireless antennas in User Guide. iii) Radio Frequency interference requirements Each device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 5. When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode, note that high power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. III. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your computer is approved for simultaneous use of one of the approved wireless LAN modules and the approved Bluetooth device. For a list of those transmitters, refer to I. Approved wireless devices on page 1. Make sure of the following conditions when you use any other external RF option device:

1. When you use any other RF option device, you are requested to confirm that the device conforms to the RF Safety requirement and is approved to use for your computer. 2. You must follow the RF Safety instructions of the RF option device that are included in the user manual of the RF option device. 3. If the RF option device is prohibited to use in conjunction with another transmitters, you must turn off all other wireless features in your computer. 2 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number I. Approved wireless devices This section presents the IC Certification and model number of each wireless device. i) Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module IC: 1000M-8260NG (Model: 8260NGW) IC: 1000M-3165NG (Model: 3165NGW) IC: 4324A-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP) IC: 4104A-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC) Notes:

The wireless LAN and the Bluetooth features operate at different frequencies exclusively, and transmit radio frequencies simultaneously. The wireless LAN modules marketed in the USA and Canada does not support or function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). II. Preinstalled wireless LAN and Bluetooth module The IC Certification number for the wireless LAN and Bluetooth module is shown on the enclosure of your computer. For the location of the IC Certification number, see FCC ID and IC Certification information in User Guide. Attention: The wireless LAN and Bluetooth module in your computer is preinstalled by Lenovo, and you are prohibited to replace with other wireless adapter nor remove it. If the device requires replacement due to some problem during warranty, it must be serviced by a Lenovo authorized servicer. III. Low power license-exempt radio communication devices (RSS-210) Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The transmitter devices have been designed to operate with the antennas integrated in the computer, and having a maximum gain of within 3 dBi. When you use a wireless LAN module in the 802.11 a/n transmission mode:

The devices for the band 51505350 MHz are only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 52505350 MHz and 56505850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN (Licence-Exempt Local Area Network) devices. IV. Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102) The computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/. Chapter 1. Regulatory information for USA and Canada 3 The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless modules conforms to the Canada Portable RF exposure limit regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 5, Section 4 set forth for an uncontrolled environment, and are safe for intended operation in the conventional setting. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Numro dhomologation IC I. Priphriques sans fil homologus Cette section prsente le numro dhomologation IC et le numro de modle de chaque priphrique sans fil. i) Module LAN sans fil et Bluetooth prinstall IC: 1000M-8260NG (Model: 8260NGW) IC: 1000M-3165NG (Model: 3165NGW) IC: 4324A-BRCM1075 (Model: BCM943162ZP) IC: 4104A-QCNFA34AC (Model: QCNFA34AC) Remarques:

Les fonctions de rseau local sans fil, et Bluetooth sont oprationnelles des frquences diffrentes exclusivement et mettent des frquences radio simultanment. Les modules de rseau local sans fil commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. II. Module LAN sans fil et Bluetooth prinstall Le numro de certification IC pour le module LAN sans fil et Bluetooth est reprsente sur le botier de votre ordinateur. Pour connatre l'emplacement du numro de certification IC, voir ID FCC et IC informations de certification dans le Guide de l'utilisateur. Attention: Le module sans fil LAN et Bluetooth sur votre ordinateur est prinstall par Lenovo, et il vous est interdit de le remplacer par un autre sans fil adaptateur ni le supprimer. Si l'appareil ncessite un remplacement en raison d'un problme pendant la garantie, il doit tre rpar par un technicien agr Lenovo. III. Appareils de radio-communication basse tension sans licence d'utilisation

(CNR-210) Le fonctionnement de ce type d'appareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne peut pas causer de perturbations lectromagntiques. 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les perturbations reues, y compris celles susceptibles d'occasionner un fonctionnement indsirable. Les appareils metteurs ont t conus pour fonctionner avec les antennes intgres l'ordinateur et avoir un gain d'antenne maximal de 3 dBi. Lorsque vous utilisez une module de rseau local sans fil dans le mode de transmission 802.11 a/n, tenez compte des remarques suivantes:

Les appareils destins la bande 51505350 MHz devront tre exclusivement utiliss en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal. Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux (c'est--dire qu'ils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz. Ils peuvent provoquer des perturbations 4 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LE-LAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. IV. Conformit des appareils de radiocommunication aux limites d'exposition humaine aux radiofrquences (CNR-102) Les ordinateurs utilisent des antennes intgrales faible gain qui n'mettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par Sant Canada pour la population. Consultez le Code de scurit 6 sur le site Internet de Sant Canada l'adresse http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/

L'nergie mise par les antennes relies aux modules sans fil respecte la limite d'exposition aux radiofrquences mises par les appareils portables au Canada telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la Section 4 du document CNR-102, version 5 pour un environnement non contrl et permet d'affecter sans danger le produit l'usage auquel il est destin. La rduction de l'exposition aux radiofrquences est possible si le produit peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou en dfinissant une puissance de sortie plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity Models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized change or modifications could avoid the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place-Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Telephone: 1-919-294-5900 Chapter 1. Regulatory information for USA and Canada 5 Usage environment and your health This computer contains integrated wireless cards that operate within the guidelines identified by radio frequency (RF) safety standards and recommendations; therefore, Lenovo believes this product is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the worldwide scientific community, and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists, who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of wireless devices might be restricted by the proprietor of a building or responsible representative of an organization. For example, these situations and areas might include the following:

On board of airplanes, in hospitals or near petrol stations, blasting areas (with electro-explosive devices), medical implants or body-worn electronic medical devices, such as pace makers. In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific area (such as an airport or hospital), you are encouraged to use a wireless device prior to turning on the computer. 6 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Chapter 2. Regulatory information for Europe EU Declaration of Conformity For models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, and QCNFA34AC For model: BCM943162ZP English Hereby, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declares that the wireless equipment listed in this section is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. EU Frequency band restriction for a wireless LAN Usage of this device is limited to indoor in the band 5150 to 5350 MHz (channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated energy from the antenna of this computer/device which may contain any of the Wireless LAN adapters listed in this document, conforms with the EN SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) requirement, as specified in IEC/EN 62209-2, when used in a minimum separation distance of 0 mm between the computer/device and the human body. The maximum SAR values measured for the following ThinkPad computers are listed as below, when the computers were operated in a conventional setting. The EU limit is 2.0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0.591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0.352 W/kg Bulgarian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. , ,

, 1999/5/EO.

/, LAN , , EN SAR

( ), IEC/EN 62209-2, 0 / . Copyright Lenovo 2015 7 0560 SAR, ,

. 2,0 W/. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Croatian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ovime izjavljuje da je beina oprema navedena u ovom odjeljku usklaena s osnovnim zahtjevima i drugim relevantnim zahtjevima direktive R&TTE 1999/5/EZ. Ogranienje frekvencijskog pojasa za beini LAN u EU Koritenje ureaja je ogranieno u zatvorenim prostorima na spektar 5150 do 5350 MHz (kanali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Izlaganje zraenju radijske frekvencije Zraenje antene raunala/ureaja koji moe sadravati bilo koji od beinih LAN prilagodnika navedenih u ovom dokumentu usklaeno je s odredbom EN SAR (specifina brzina apsorpcije, eng. Specific Absorption Rate) norme IEC/EN 62209-2 kada se koristi pri minimalnoj udaljenosti od 0 mm izmeu raunala/ureaja i ljudskog tijela. Maksimalna SAR vrijednost izmjerena za tablet navedena je nie i odnosi se na upotrebu tableta u konvencionalnom okruenju. Ogranienje za EU iznosi 2,0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Czech Spolenost Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tmto prohlauje, e bezdrtov zazen uveden v tto sti dokumentu spluj zkladn i dal relevantn poadavky smrnice R&TTE 1999/5/ES. Vystaven rdiovm vlnm Energie vyzaovan antnou tohoto potae/zazen, jeho soust me bt nkter z adaptr bezdrtov st LAN uvedench v tomto dokumentu, vyhovuje poadavkm normy IEC/EN 62209-2 z hlediska maximlnho mnostv absorbovan energie (SAR, Specific Absorption Rate), jestlie pota/zazen pouvte v minimln vzdlenosti 0 mm od lidskho tla. Maximln hodnota SAR zmen u tohoto tabletu pi bnm provozu je uvedena ne. Maximln hodnota povolen v EU je 2,0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Danish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer hermed, at det trdlse udstyr, der er angivet i dette afsnit, overholder de vsentlige krav og andre relevante krav i R&TTE direktiv 1999/5/EF. 8 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Restriktioner for frekvensbnd i EU for trdlse LAN Brug af denne enhed er begrnset til indendrs brug i frekvensbndet 5150 til 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Eksponering for radiofrekvensstrling Strlingsenergien fra antennen p denne computer/enhed, som kan indeholde nogen af de trdlse LAN-adaptere, der er angivet i dette dokument, overholder EN SAR-kravet (Specific Absorption Rate) som angivet i IEC/EN 62209-2, nr der er en afstand p mindst 0 mm mellem computeren/enheden og kroppen. Den maksimale SAR-vrdi, der blev mlt for tabletten, er angivet ovenfor, nr tabletten blev anvendt i almindelig siddestilling. EU-grnsen er 2,0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg German Hiermit erklrt Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dass das in diesem Abschnitt aufgelistete drahtlose Gert die wesentlichen Anforderungen sowie weitere relevante Bedingungen der R&TTE-Richtlinie 1999/5/EG erfllt. EU-Frequenzbandeinschrnkung fr drahtloses LAN Die Verwendung dieses Gerts ist im Innenbereich auf das Frequenzband von 5.150 bis 5.350 MHz (Kanle 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64) beschrnkt. Belastung durch Funkfrequenzstrahlung Die Gesamtfunkenergie, die von der Antenne dieses Computers/Gerts ausgestrahlt wird, die an einen der in diesem Dokument aufgelisteten Adapter fr drahtloses LAN angeschlossen ist, ist innerhalb des in der EN SAR-Richtlinie (Specific Absorption Rate) entsprechend IEC/EN 62209-2 festgelegten Bereichs bei einem Mindestabstand von 0 mm zwischen dem Computer/Gert und dem menschlichen Krper. Der gemessene SAR-Hchstwert fr das Tablet beim Betrieb an einem typischen Arbeitsplatz ist nachfolgend aufgefhrt. Die EU-Obergrenze liegt bei 2,0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Estonian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd kinnitab, et kesolevas jaotises esitatud traadita side seadmed vastavad R&TTE direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele stetele. EL-i sagedusvahemiku piirang traadita side LAN-ile Seadet on lubatud kasutada siseruumides sagedusalas 51505350 MHz (kanalid 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Kokkupuude raadiosagedusliku kiirgusega Kesolevas dokumendis toodud ht vimalikku traadita LAN-adapterit sisaldava arvuti/seadme antenni kiirgusenergia vastab standardi IEC/EN 62209-2 EN SAR-i (erineelduvusmra) nuetele, kui arvuti/seadme ja inimkeha vaheline vhim kaugus on 0 mm. Tahvelarvuti puhul mdetud maksimaalne SAR-i vrtus tavaprastes kasutustingimustes on toodud allpool. EN-i piirnorm on 2,0 W/Kg. Chapter 2. Regulatory information for Europe 9 ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Spanish Mediante el presente, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. declara que el equipo inalmbrico indicado en esta seccin cumple con los requisitos esenciales y otros requisitos pertinentes de la Directiva de R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Restriccin de banda de frecuencia de la UE para una LAN inalmbrica La utilizacin de este dispositivo est limitada a interiores en la banda de 5150 a 5350 MHz (canales 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Exposicin a radiacin de radiofrecuencia La energa irradiada de la antena de este sistema/dispositivo que puede contener cualquiera de los adaptadores para LAN inalmbrica indicados en este documento se adeca al requisito EN SAR (Velocidad especfica de absorcin), segn se especifica en IEC/EN 62209-2 cuando se usa a una distancia de separacin mnima de 0 mm entre el sistema/dispositivo y el cuerpo humano. El valor SAR mximo medido para la tableta se indica a continuacin, cuando la tableta se operaba con valores convencionales. El lmite de la UE es 2,0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Greek

, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.

(R&TTE), 1999/5/.

/

LAN EN SAR (Specific Absorption Rate), IEC/EN 62209-2, 0

/ . SAR tablet , tablet

. 2,0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg French Par la prsente, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dclare que le matriel sans fil mentionn dans cette section est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres obligations en vigueur figurant dans la Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE. 10 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Restriction lie la bande de frquence pour un rseau local sans fil au sein de l'Union europenne Ce priphrique doit tre utilis exclusivement l'intrieur, dans la bande de frquence de 5150 5350 MHz

(canaux 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Exposition aux radiofrquences L'nergie mise par l'antenne de cet ordinateur/appareil susceptible d'tre quip d'une des cartes de rseau local sans fil rpertories dans le prsent document est conforme la limite du dbit d'absorption spcifique (DAS) pour les normes europennes telle que dfinie par la norme IEC/EN 62209-2, mme lorsque la distance entre l'ordinateur/l'appareil et le corps humain est nulle. La limite maximale du dbit d'absorption spcifique mesure pour la tablette est indique ci-dessous, lorsque la tablette est utilise dans un environnement conventionnel. La limite dfinie par l'UE est de 2 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0.591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0.352 W/kg Italian Con la presente documentazione, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dichiara che l'apparecchiatura wireless indicata in questa sezione conforme ai requisiti essenziali e ad altri requisiti rilevanti della Direttiva R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Restrizioni UE sulla banda di frequenza per LAN wireless L'utilizzo di questo dispositivo limitato ad ambienti chiusi in banda compresa tra 5150 e 5350 MHz (canali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Esposizione alle radiazioni della frequenza radio L'energia irradiata dall'antenna di questo computer/dispositivo che potrebbe contenere una delle schede LAN wireless elencate in questo documento conforme al requisito EN SAR (Specific Absorption Rate), come specificato in IEC/EN 62209-2, quando utilizzato a una distanza minima di 0 mm tra il computer/dispositivo e il corpo umano. Il valore SAR massimo misurato per il tablet elencato in basso, con il tablet utilizzato in ambiente convenzionale. Il limite EU 2 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0.591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0.352 W/kg Latvian Ar o uzmums Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pazio, ka aj sada nordtais bezvadu aprkojums atbilst R&TTE direktvas 1999/5/EK pamatprasbm un citm saisttajm prasbm. Pakauana radio frekvenu starojumam is dators/ierce var saturt jebkuru aj dokument nordtu bezvadu LAN adapteri, un s ierces/datora antenas izstarot enerija atbilst Eiropas normm par patnjo absorbcijas intensitti (Specific Absorption Rate SAR) attiecb uz standartu IEC/EN 62209-2, kad starp datoru/ierci un cilvka ermeni ir minimlais 0 mm attlums. Chapter 2. Regulatory information for Europe 11 Maksiml planetdatoram konstatt SAR vrtba ir nordta tlk, un mrjumu laik planetdators darbojs ar parastajiem iestatjumiem. ES ierobeojums ir 2,0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Lithuanian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. pareikia, kad iame skyriuje nurodyta belaid ranga atitinka direktyvos 1999/5/EB dl radijo ryio rengini ir telekomunikacij galini rengini pagrindinius reikalavimus ir kitas susijusias nuostatas. Radijo dani spinduliuots poveikis io kompiuterio / renginio antenos, kuri gali bti su bet kuriuo i iame dokumente nurodyt belaidio LAN adapteriu, skleidiama energija atitinka EN SAR (specifins sugerties spartos, angl. Specific Absorption Rate) reikalavim, kaip nurodyta IEC/EN 62209-2, kai kompiuteris / renginys naudojamas bent 0 mm atstumu nuo mogaus kno. Toliau nurodyta didiausia nustatyta planetini kompiuteri SAR vert; ji buvo gauta planetiniu kompiuteriu dirbant prastomis slygomis. ES limitas yra 2,0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Dutch Hierbij verklaart Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. dat de draadloze apparatuur die in dit artikel is aangegeven, voldoet aan de essentile vereisten en overige relevante vereisten van de R&TTE-richtlijn (richtlijn 1999/5/EG). EU-beperking van frequentieband voor een draadloze LAN-adapter Gebruik van dit apparaat is beperkt tot binnenshuis gebruik in de band van 5150 tot 5350 MHz (kanalen 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Blootstelling aan radiofrequentiestraling De energie die de antenne van deze computer/dit apparaat met een van de in dit document genoemde draadloze LAN-adapters uitstraalt, voldoet aan de EN SAR-vereisten (Specific Absorption Rate) zoals opgegeven in IEC/EN 62209-2 bij gebruik op een minimale afstand van 0 mm tussen de computer/het apparaat en het lichaam. De maximale SAR-waarde die voor de tablet is gemeten terwijl de tablet werkte met een conventionele instelling, wordt hieronder weergegeven. De EU-limiet is 2,0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Hungarian A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ezennel kijelenti, hogy a fejezetben emltett vezetk nlkli kszlk megfelel az 1999/5/EK szm R&TTE direktva alapvet kvetelmnyeinek s egyb vonatkoz kvetelmnyeinek. 12 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Frekvenciatartomnyra vonatkoz eurpai unis korltozs vezetk nlkli LAN-hlzatokhoz Az eszkz hasznlata beltrre korltozdik az 5150 - 5350 MHz tartomnyban (36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64 csatornk). Rdifrekvencis sugrzsnak val kitettsg Az esetlegesen a dokumentumban felsorolt vezetk nlkli LAN-adapterek egyikt tartalmaz szmtgp/eszkz antennjnak kisugrzott energija megfelel az EN SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) IEC/EN 62209-2 szabvnyban meghatrozott kvetelmnyeinek, ha a szmtgp/eszkz legalbb 0 mm tvolsgra van az emberi testtl. A tblagphez mrt legnagyobb SAR rtk albb lthat; a mrs sorn a tblagpet norml krlmnyek kztt zemeltettk. Az EU hatrrtke 2,0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Polish Firma Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. deklaruje niniejszym, e wymienione w tej sekcji urzdzenie bezprzewodowe jest zgodne z zasadniczymi wymaganiami i innymi odpowiednimi postanowieniami dyrektywy w sprawie urzdze radiowych i kocowych urzdze telekomunikacyjnych 1999/5/WE. Dziaanie promieniowania o czstotliwoci radiowej Energia emitowana przez anten tego komputera/urzdzenia z zamontowanym dowolnym z adapterw cznoci bezprzewodowej LAN wymienionych w tym dokumencie jest zgodna z wymaganiami dotyczcymi wspczynnika EN SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) przedstawionymi w normie IEC/EN 62209-2 podczas uywania w odlegoci minimum 0 mm midzy komputerem/urzdzeniem a ciaem czowieka. Maksymalna zmierzona warto wspczynnika promieniowania SAR dla tabletu dziaajcego w typowych warunkach zostaa podana poniej. Limit w UE wynosi 2,0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Portuguese A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. declara, por este meio, que o equipamento sem fios listado nesta seco est em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e com outros requisitos relevantes da Diretiva 1999/5/CE R&TTE Restrio da banda de frequncias na UE para LAN sem fios A utilizao deste dispositivo est limitada utilizao no interior, na banda de 5150 a 5350 MHz (canais 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Exposio a radiaes de radiofrequncia A energia radiada da antena deste computador/dispositivo que poder conter qualquer dos adaptadores LAN sem fios listados neste documento, est em conformidade com os requisitos EN SAR (Specific Chapter 2. Regulatory information for Europe 13 Absorption Rate), conforme especificado na norma IEC/EN 62209-2, em caso de utilizao mantendo uma distncia mnima de 0 mm entre o computador/dispositivo e o corpo humano. O valor SAR mximo medido para o tablet encontra-se indicado abaixo, com o tablet a funcionar num ambiente convencional. O limite na UE de 2,0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Romanian Prin prezenta, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. declar c echipamentul fr fir prezentat n aceast seciune respect cerinele importante i alte cerine relevante ale Directivei R&TTE 1999/5/CE. Expunerea la radiaia de frecven radio Energia radiat de la antena acestui calculator/dispozitiv ce poate conine oricare dintre adaptoarele LAN fr fir prezentate n acest document respect cerina EN SAR (rat specific de absorbie), dup cum se specific n IEC/EN 62209-2, cnd este utilizat la o distan minim de 0 mm ntre calculator/dispozitiv i corpul uman. Mai jos este listat valoarea SAR maxim msurat pentru tablet atunci cnd aceasta a fost utilizat ntr-un mediu obinuit. Limita UE este de 2,0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Slovenian S tem druba Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. izjavlja, da je brezina oprema, navedena v tem razdelku, skladna z osnovnimi zahtevami in drugimi s tem ustreznimi zahtevami direktive o radijski in telekomunikacijski terminalski opremi 1999/5/ES. Izpostavljenost sevanju radijskih frekvenc Sevanje iz antene tega raunalnika/naprave, ki lahko vsebuje katerega koli od brezinih vmesnikov LAN, navedenih v tem dokumentu, ustreza zahtevi EN SAR (Specific Absorption Rate), kot je doloena v IEC/EN 62209-2, e se uporablja pri razdalji najmanj 0 mm med raunalnikom/napravo in lovekim telesom. Najveja vrednost SAR, izmerjena za tablini raunalnik, ki je deloval v obiajnem okolju, je navedena spodaj. Omejitev za EU je 2,0 W/Kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg 14 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Slovakian Spolonos Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tmto vyhlasuje, e bezdrtov zariadenie uveden v tejto asti je v slade so zkladnmi poiadavkami a inmi relevantnmi poiadavkami smernice 1999/5/ES o rdiovom zariaden a koncovch telekomunikanch zariadeniach. Vystavenie rdiovmu iareniu Energia, ktor vyaruje antna tohto potaa/zariadenia, ktor me obsahova ktorkovek z adaptrov bezdrtovej siete LAN uvedench v tomto dokumente, vyhovuje poiadavke pre hodnotu SAR (Specific Absorption Rate pecifick miera absorpcie) poda normy IEC/EN 62209-2, ke sa pouva pri minimlnom odstupe 0 mm medzi potaom/zariadenm a udskm telom. Niie je uveden maximlna hodnota SAR nameran pre potae ThinkPad pouvan v benom prostred. Limit je poda eurpskej normy 2,0 W/kg. Niie je uveden maximlna hodnota SAR nameran pre tablet pouvan v benom prostred. Limit je poda eurpskej normy 2,0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Finnish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ilmoittaa tten, ett tss jaksossa mainitut langattomat laitteet ovat R&TTE-direktivin 1999/5/EY pakollisten vaatimusten ja muiden sen sisltmien asiaankuuluvien vaatimusten mukaisia. Langattoman lhiverkon taajuusalueen rajoitus EU:n alueella Tm laite on tarkoitettu kytettvksi sistiloissa taajuusalueella 5150 - 5320 MHz (kanavat 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60 ja 64). Radiotaajuiselle steilylle altistuminen Johonkin tss asiakirjassa lueteltuun langattomaan lhiverkkosovittimeen liitetyn tietokoneen tai laitteen antennin lhettm steilyenergia on IEC/EN 62209-2-standardissa ominaisabsorptionopeudelle (SAR-arvo) asetetun vaatimuksen mukainen, kun tietokoneen tai laitteen ja ihmiskehon vlinen etisyys on vhintn 0 mm. Suurin taulutietokoneelle mitattu SAR-arvo, kun taulutietokonetta kytetn tavanomaisin asetuksin, on ilmoitettu alla. EU:n raja-arvo on 2,0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0,591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0,352 W/kg Swedish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. tillknnager hrmed att den trdlsa utrustningen i det hr avsnittet verensstmmer med de grundlggande kraven och andra relevanta krav i R&TTE-direktivet 1999/5/EG. Chapter 2. Regulatory information for Europe 15 Frekvensomrdesbegrnsning inom EU fr trdlst LAN Enheten r avsedd fr inomhusbruk i frekvensomrdet 5150 till 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Exponering av radiofrekvensstrlning Den energi som avges frn antennen p den hr datorn/enheten som kan innehlla en adapter fr trdlst LAN som listats i det hr dokumentet, r frenlig med EN SAR-kraven (Specific Absorption Rate), s som anges i SS-EN 62209-2, vid anvndning p minsta avstnd om 0 mm mellan datorn/enheten och en person. Det maximala SAR-vrdet som uppmtts fr surfplattan nr den anvnts i en normal milj visas nedan. EU-grnsen r 2.0 W/kg. ThinkPad E460 and E465: 0.591 W/kg ThinkPad 13: 0.352 W/kg 16 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules For model: 8260NGW Chapter 2. Regulatory information for Europe 17 For model: 3165NGW 18 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules For model: BCM943162ZP Chapter 2. Regulatory information for Europe 19 For model: QCNFA34AC 20 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Chapter 3. ThinkPad LAN Bluetooth 8260NGW 3165NGW Table 1. LAN / Bluetooth 003-150093 D150069003 003-150009 D150008003 201-140081 D14-0015201 003-140109 D14067003 QCNFA34AC BCM943162ZP Intel Mobile Communications SAS Intel Mobile Communications SAS Broadcom Corporation Qualcomm Atheros, Inc.

(5 GHz ) ThinkPad IEEE802.11a/n 5.15-5.35 GHz

()

(2.4 GHz )

() (

) () 1. 2. 3.

: (

http://www.lenovo.com/jp/lsmartctr) Copyright Lenovo 2015 21 LAN (IEEE802.11b/g ) 2.4 GHz (2400 2483.5 MH) (DS)

(OFDM) 40 m (

10 mW/MHz) Bluetooth 2.4 GHz (2400 2483.5 MH)

(FH) 10 m Bluetooth 2.4 GHz (2400 2483.5 MH)

(FH) 20 m Bluetooth 2.4 GHz (2400 2483.5 MH)

(FH) 40 m Bluetooth 2.4 GHz (2400 2483.5 MH)

(FH) 80 m LAN LAN LAN LAN

() ID

()

()

()

() LAN LAN LAN Bluetooth LAN Bluetooth Lenovo 22 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules 2.4FH8 LAN Bluetooth

()

() ThinkPad LAN Bluetooth Chapter 3. ThinkPad 23 24 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Chapter 4. Regulatory information for other countries Notice for users in Argentina (Nota para uso en Argentina) Modelo: 8260NGW Equipo: Acceso Inalambrico de Red CNC: C-14836 Modelo: 3165NGW Equipo: Acceso Inalambrico de Red CNC: C-14440 Modelo: BCM943162ZP Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-13296 Modelo: QCNFA34AC Equipo: Transceptor CNC: C-13621 Notice for users in Brazil For model: 8260NGW For model: 3165NGW For model: BCM943162ZP For model: QCNFA34AC For models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC Copyright Lenovo 2015 25 0851-14-1869(01) 07898581341000 Portuguese English Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio This equipment is a secondary type device, that is, it is not protected against harmful interference, even if the interference is caused by a device of the same type, and it also cannot cause any interference to primary type devices. 26 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Notice for users in India For model: 8260NGW NR-ETA/2401 For model: 3165NGW NR-ETA/1623 For model: BCM943162ZP NER-ETA/331 For model: QCNFA34AC ETA-187/2014-RLO (SR)/3052 ETA-188/2014-RLO (SR)/3053 Notice for users in Korea For models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC Note that this device has been certified for residential use and may be used in any environment. For ThinkPad E560 and E565:

B ( )

(B)

.

( 2400~2483.5 , 5725~5825 ) For ThinkPad E460, E465, and ThinkPad 13:

B ( )

(B)

.

( 2400~2483.5 , 5725~5825 ) SAR

. SAR . SAR

. 10 mm . Chapter 4. Regulatory information for other countries 27 Notice for users in Mexico (Nota para uso en Mexico) Modelo: 8260NGW Equipo: Adaptador Intel 8260NGW IFT: RCPIN8215-0957 Modelo: 3165NGW Equipo: Adaptador Intel 3165NGW IFT: RCPIN3115-0385 Modelo: BCM943162ZP Equipo: Tarjeta WLAN con Bluetooth IFT: RCPBRBC14-0398 Modelo: QCNFA34AC Equipo: Tarjeta Tipo M.2 802.11a/b/g/n/ac+BT 4.1 IFT: RCPQUQC14-1244 Advertensia:

En Mexico la operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada Notice for users in Morocco For models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities:

Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant, and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 and 7 (2425 - 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, and Zag. Due to the channel restrictions above, the operation of this product using the fat channel mode (40 MHz of channel bandwidth) is not allowed at the 2.4 GHz frequency band. 28 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Notice for users in Nigeria For models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC Notice for users in Pakistan The following models have been approved by Pakistan Telecommunication Authority (PTA): 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC Chapter 4. Regulatory information for other countries 29 Notice for users in Saudi Arabia For model: 8260NGW 30 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules For model: 3165NGW Chapter 4. Regulatory information for other countries 31 For model: BCM943162ZP 32 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Applicant Information

_& Applicant:WoWi Approval Services, Inc.:
 Certificate Details]  _ Issue Date:09/02/20151436/04/20:1  1 Validity Period:09/02/20161437/04/30: 1 Device Details7 _ Product Name:802.11a/b/g/n/ac WLAN + Bluetooth 4.0 NGFF2230 Mini Card:
 Product Model:BCM943162ZP: 9 & Manufacturer:Broadcom Corporation : Additional Details _&Operating Frequency : Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP) :2400-2483.5 MHZ:19.97 dBm 5150-5250 MHZ:22.95 dBm 5470-5725 MHZ:22.95 dBm 5250-5350 MHZ:22.95 dBm
& :  _ 1& A& 1Device comply with CITC technical Specification No.:RI103 , RI045 _& 
7:
1 Additional Requirement     (WLAN - WiFi) _
Certificate No:TA 09022015-09022016-4890:] 
1
  1
:  71&S 
1 ]17 9  ]  L &   _& & _ &1 &http://ers.citc.gov.sa
] Conformity Certificate  _# # _
 ## ,4 # 1422/03/12 # (12/
)

4 
#  _
 # # 4  . S W  Q
# # 4  _ S ,1422/03/05 # (74)
Q#
_#   _ ]  4 S . X#  _#
] X ,  #S S W  ]Q _ S#
S
]# ] #S ]Q ]Q #S
  Q# # ,]  4 # _#  #S] #  # #   _W #S #S S S  # #  #S ] #  X# , X#  _4 \  # _# ### _#/X ]Q 
# X   W
   ]Q # X # . ] #S ]Q 4
  #S ]Q 4 S W]  For model: QCNFA34AC Chapter 4. Regulatory information for other countries 33 Notice for users in Serbia The following models have been approved by Ratel: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC. Notice for users in Singapore For models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC Notice for users in South Africa Adapter model 8260NGW is ICASA approved:

Adapter model 3165NGW is ICASA approved:

Adapter model BCM943162ZP is ICASA approved:

Adapter model QCNFA34AC is ICASA approved:

34 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules TA-2015/1400 TA-2015/580 TA-2013 / 2479 TA-2014/1048 Notice for users in Taiwan For models: 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC Chapter 4. Regulatory information for other countries 35 Notice for users in Thailand For models 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC installed on ThinkPad E460;

or models BCM943162ZP and QCNFA34AC installed on ThinkPad E465 This wireless communication equipment has the specific absorption rate (SAR) of 0.591 W/kg or below as related to the equipment, which is in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Wireless Communication Devices on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. For models 8260NGW and 3165NGW installed on ThinkPad 13 This wireless communication equipment has the specific absorption rate (SAR) of W/kg or below as related to the equipment, which is in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Wireless Communication Devices on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. For models 8260NGW, 3165NGW, BCM943162ZP, and QCNFA34AC installed on ThinkPad E560;

or models BCM943162ZP and QCNFA34AC installed on ThinkPad E565 The specific absorption rate (SAR) of this wireless communication equipment is in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Wireless Communication Devices on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Notice for users in the UAE For model: 8260NGW For model: 3165NGW For model: BCM943162ZP 36 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules ER40232/15 DA0018841/09ER37771/15 DA0018841/09ER0128991/140030000/10 For model: QCNFA34AC Chapter 4. Regulatory information for other countries 37 ER34640/14 DA0039119/10 38 Regulatory Notice for Wireless LAN Modules Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:

Lenovo Lenovo logo ThinkPad ThinkPad logo UltraConnect Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Part Number: SP40J47561_01 Printed in

(1P) P/N: SP40J47561_01

*1PSP40J47561_01*

 

 

en-US Rev. AA00 Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-02 08/2011 This Lenovo Limited Warranty consists of the following parts:

Part 1 - General Terms Part 2 - Country-specific Terms Part 3 - Warranty Service Information The terms of Part 2 replace or modify terms of Part 1 as specified for a particular country. Part 1 - General Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty. What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Lenovo hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase as shown on your sales receipt or invoice or as may be otherwise specified by Lenovo. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are as specified in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. This warranty only applies to products in the country or region of purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT AND FOR SUCH DURATION AS REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 1 Lenovo limited warranty How to Obtain Warranty Service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or a Lenovo approved Service Provider. A list of approved Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at: www.lenovo.com/support/phone. Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Provider's normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for information specific to your location. Customer Responsibilities for Warranty Service Before warranty service is provided, you must take the following steps:

follow the service request procedures specified by the Service Provider

backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product

provide the Service Provider with all system keys or passwords

provide the Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service

remove all data, including confidential information, proprietary information and personal information, from the product or, if you are unable to remove any such information, modify the information to prevent its access by another party or so that it is not personal data under applicable law. The Service Provider shall not be responsible for the loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, on a product returned or accessed for warranty service

remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not covered by the warranty its replacement

ensure that the product or part is free of any legal restrictions that prevent

if you are not the owner of a product or part, obtain authorization from the owner for the Service Provider to provide warranty service 2 Lenovo limited warranty What Your Service Provider Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the specified problem determination and resolution procedures. The Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem by telephone, e-mail or remote assistance. The Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems may be resolved with a replacement part that you install yourself called a Customer Replaceable Unit or CRU. If so, the Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone; through the application of software updates or the installation of a CRU, the Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, the Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy under this Limited Warranty is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price. Replacement Products and Parts When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. 3 Lenovo limited warranty Use of Personal Contact Information If you obtain service under this warranty, you authorize Lenovo to store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo may use this information to perform service under this warranty. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction with our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, you authorize Lenovo to transfer your information to any country where we do business and to provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law. Lenovo's privacy policy is available at www.lenovo.com/. What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:

uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product

loss of, or damage to, your data by a product

any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently

failure or damage resulting from misuse, abuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, improper maintenance, or use not in accordance with product information materials

damage caused by a non-authorized service provider

failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request

any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation

products or parts with an altered identification label or from which the identification label has been removed Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. 4 Lenovo limited warranty UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY:

1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Your Other Rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE LAWS OF YOUR STATE OR JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER A WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER LAWS OR REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 5 Lenovo limited warranty Part 2 - Country-specific Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Australia Lenovo means Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: +61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

What this Warranty Covers:

Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and conditions during the warranty period. If the product fails due to a covered defect during the warranty period, Lenovo will provide you a remedy under this Limited Warranty. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are set forth below in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information. THE BENEFITS GIVEN BY THIS WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO YOUR RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AT LAW, INCLUDING THOSE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Replacement Products and Parts:

When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovo's property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Products and parts presented for repair may be replaced by refurbished products or parts of the same type rather than being repaired. Refurbished parts may be used to repair the product; and repair of the product may result in loss of data, if the product is capable of retaining user-generated data. 6 Lenovo limited warranty The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Contact Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal contact information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1988 by contacting Lenovo. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Limitation of Liability:

Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. 7 Lenovo limited warranty THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Your Other Rights:

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS OR RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING RIGHTS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. For example, our products come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the products repaired or replaced if the products fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. New Zealand The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1993 by contacting Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: 61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com 8 Lenovo limited warranty Bangladesh, Cambodia, India, Indonesia, Nepal, Philippines, Vietnam and Sri Lanka The following is added to Part 1:

Dispute Resolution Disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore. This warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center

(SIAC Rules) then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings shall be conducted in the English language. The English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings. European Economic Area (EEA) The following is added to Part 1:

Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address:

EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. Russia The following is added to Part 1:

Product Service Life The product service life is four (4) years from the original date of purchase. 9 Lenovo limited warranty Part 3 - Warranty Service Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Notebook:

80M5 80M6 Taiwan, Korea China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China

(Macau S.A.R.), India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Sri Lanka, Singapore Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Cyprus, Greece, Macedonia, Slovenia, Serbia/Montenegro, Poland, Albania Argentina, Colombia, Peru, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Chile, Paraguay, Ecuador, Mexico Austria, France, Iceland, Israel, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, the United Kingdom, Canada, United States of America Hungary, Romania, Bulgaria Japan, Australia, New Zealand Moldova Russia, Ukraine, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Belarus, Azerbaijan, Georgia, Armenia, Uzbekistan, Tajikistan, Kyrgyzstan, Mongolia South Africa, Kenya, Nigeria, Uganda, Morocco, Tunisia, Algeria, Cote d'ivoire, Angola, UAE, Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Qatar, Botswana, Oman, Egypt, Pakistan, Cameroon, Democratic Republic of Congo, Djibouti, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iraq, Malta, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mozambique, Namibia, Rwanda, Senegal, Seychelles, Tanzania, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe Brazil Germany, Switzerland 10 parts and labor -

1 year battery pack - 1 year parts and labor - 1 or 2 years battery pack - 1 year Types of warranty service 3, 4 1, 4 1, 3 4 2, 5 1, 3 Lenovo limited warranty

(continued) Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Types of warranty service Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden, Belgium, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Czech Republic, Slovakia Saudi Arabia Notebook:

80M5 80M6 Turkey parts and labor -

2 years battery pack - 1 year parts and labor -

2 years battery pack - 2 years 1, 3 4 1, 4 If required, the Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors. Types of Warranty Service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Under CRU Service, the Service Provider will ship CRUs to you at its cost for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called Self-service CRUs. Optional-service CRUs are CRUs that may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from a Service Provider or Lenovo under which Self-service CRUs would be installed for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that was shipped with your product or at www.lenovo.com/CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the instructions shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if the Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU from you within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. 11 Lenovo limited warranty 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, a Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the product. Some repairs may need to be completed at a service center. If so, the Service Provider will send the product to the service center at its expense. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping at the expense of the Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product and packing it in a shipping container provided to you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. The service center will return the product to you at its expense. 4 Customer Carry-In Service Under Customer Carry-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for collection. If you fail to collect the product, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 5 Mail-In Service Under Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center after you deliver it at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be returned to you at Lenovo's risk and expense, unless the Service Provider specifies otherwise. 6 Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service Under Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for return shipping at your risk and expense. If you fail to arrange return shipment, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 12 Lenovo limited warranty 7 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton in which you received the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, shall be at Lenovos expense. If you fail to use the carton in which the replacement product was received, you may be responsible for any damage to the failed product occurring during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 13 Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the product with the given MT numbers. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Energy star information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers.

80M5

80M6 By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:

14 Product specific Notices Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 8.1 Power plan: balanced (plugged in)

Turn off the display:

After 10 minutes

Put the computer to sleep:

After 25 minutes

Advanced power settings:

- Turn off hard disks:

After 20 minutes To awaken your computer from a Sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Help and Support information system. 15 Product specific Notices Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The following information refers to Lenovo U31-70, machine type 80M5/80M6. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 16 Product specific Notices Responsible party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Telephone: (919) 294-5900 German Class B Compliance Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden. Deutschland:

Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. 17 Product specific Notices Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo

(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:

Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B. European Union Compliance Statement Class B Compliance European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-

recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. EU Contact Address: Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia 18 Specifications Model Name: Lenovo U31-70 Machine Type: 80M5/80M6 Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Processor Processor Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity Slots Hard disk drive Form factor Interface Display Display resolution

(LCD) LCD backlight Appr. 323.0 mm 230.0 mm 19.3 mm Appr. 1.52 kg 13.3-inch View the system properties of your computer. You can do this as follows: Open the Control Panel, and then select System and Security System. DDR3L-1600 MHz 8 GB SODIMM 1 2.5-inch, 5.0 mm or 7.0 mm SATA III 1,366 768 pixels HD / 1,920 1,080 pixels FHD LED 19 Specifications I/O Ports USB Audio Video/Audio Ethernet Card reader Battery pack Type Cells/Capacity AC power adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera Security USB 2.0 1, USB 3.0 2 Combo audio jack 1 HDMI port 1 RJ-45 1 (1000 Mbps) Memory card slot (SD/SDHC/SDXC/MMC) Li-Polymer 2 cells, 35 Wh 100 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC Discreted Graghics 65 W Integrated Graphics 45 W HD Kensington lock slot 1 20 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 21

 

 

Lenovo U31-70 User Guide Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes

Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide rst. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 8.1. If you are using another Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice

For details, refer to Guides & Manuals at http://support.lenovo.com. First Edition (March 2015) Copyright Lenovo 2015. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer..................................................................................... 1 Top view ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 Left-side view ................................................................................................................................................ 5 Right-side view .............................................................................................................................................. 8 Bottom view ................................................................................................................................................. 11 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1........................................................................................ 12 Configuring the operating system for the first time .............................................................................. 12 Operating system interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 12 The charms ................................................................................................................................................... 13 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down ................................................................................ 15 Connecting to a wireless network ............................................................................................................ 17 Help and support ........................................................................................................................................ 18 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System.............................................................................. 19 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting............................................................................................................ 20 Frequently asked questions ....................................................................................................................... 20 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................... 22 Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................... 25 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note: The dashed areas indicate parts that are not visible externally. Attention:

When closing the display panel, be careful not to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a Integrated camera b Built-in microphone c Computer display d Wireless LAN antennas e Power button f Ventilation slots Use the camera for video communication. Captures sound which can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or audio recording. The computer display with LED backlight provides brilliant visual output. Connect to a wireless LAN adapter to send and receive wireless radio signals. Press this button to turn on the computer. Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that the ventilation slots are not blocked or else the computer may overheat. g Touchpad The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Touchpad: To move the pointer on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the pointer to move. Touchpad buttons: The functions of the left/right side correspond to that of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad by pressing F6 (

). 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using the keyboard Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn

; then press one of the function keys b

. a 2 1 The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Home:

Fn + End:

Fn + PgUp:

Fn + PgDn:

Activates the pause function. Activates the break function. Enables/disables the scroll lock. Activates the insert function. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Hotkeys You can access certain system settings quickly by pressing the appropriate hotkeys.

: Mutes/unmutes the sound.

: Enables/disables Airplane mode.

: Decreases the volume level.

: Displays all currently active apps.

:

Increases the volume level.

: Closes the currently active window.

:

Refreshes the desktop or the currently active window.

:

:

Turns on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Toggles the display between the computer and an external device.

: Decreases the display brightness.

: Enables/disables the touchpad.

:

Increases the display brightness. Setting hotkey mode By default, the hotkey functions are accessible by pressing the appropriate hotkey. However, you can disable the hotkey mode in the BIOS setup utility. To disable the hotkey mode:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. 3 In the BIOS setup utility, open the Configuration menu, and change the setting of HotKey Mode from Enabled to Disabled. 4 Open the Exit menu, and select Exit Saving Changes. Note: When hotkey mode is disabled, press the Fn key and the appropriate hotkey to access the corresponding hotkey function. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 2 3 4 5 6 a Kensington lock slot Attach a security lock (not supplied) here to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Notes:

You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. features. Lenovo offers no comment, judgment, or warranty regarding the function, quality, or performance of locking devices and security features. b AC power adapter jack c USB 2.0 port Connects to the AC power adapter. Connects to USB devices. Notes:

When the computer is on, the USB port supports charging function. When the battery has more than a 20% charge, the USB port with the devices while the computer is shut down. For details, see Connecting USB device on page 9. icon can charge external USB d Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 7. e Combo audio jack Connects to headsets. Notes:

The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. The recording function might not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer f System status indicators Indicator Indicator status Meaning On (solid white) On (solid amber) The battery has more than 20% charge. The battery has between 5% and 20% charge. Blinking quickly (amber) The battery has less than 5% charge. Battery status indicator Blinking slowly (amber) Blinking slowly (white) The battery is being charged. When the battery charge reaches 20%, the blinking color will change to white. The battery has between 20% and 80% charge and is still charging. When the battery reaches 80%

charge the light will stop blinking, but charging will continue until the battery is fully charged. Power status indicator On (solid white) The computer is powered on. Blinking Off The computer is in sleep mode. The computer is powered off. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card

Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) card

Secure Digital eXtended Capacity (SDXC) card

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Notes:

Insert only one card in the slot at a time. This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Inserting a memory card Insert the memory card until it touches the bottom of the slot. Removing a memory card Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it by using the Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a Novo button When the computer is off, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System or the BIOS setup utility, or to enter the boot menu. 1 2 3 4 Notes:

You can use the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or similar object without a sharp tip) to gently press the Novo button. For details, see Lenovo OneKey Recovery System on page 19. b USB 3.0 port Connect to USB devices. Notes:

When the computer is on, the USB port supports charging function. For details, see Connecting USB device on page 9. c RJ-45 port Connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Connecting network cables on page 10. d HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or an external display. 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting USB device Your computer comes with three USB ports compatible with USB devices. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver has been installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after it has been connected, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data to that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the Windows notification area to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 9 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting network cables To insert a network cable, do the following:

1 Hold one connector of the network cable to press the RJ-45 cover down gently 2 Insert the connector into the RJ-45 port b

. a

. 1 2 Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 10 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 2 a Louvers b Speakers 2 Allow air to enter the computer for cooling. Provide audio output. 11 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Configuring the operating system for the first time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below:

Accepting the end user license agreement

Configuring the Internet connection

Registering the operating system

Creating a user account Operating system interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Windows 8.1 comes with two main user interfaces: the Start screen and the Windows desktop. To switch from the Start screen to the Windows desktop, do one of the following:

Select the Windows desktop tile on the Start screen.

Press the Windows key

+ D. To switch from the desktop to the Start screen, do one of the following:

Select Start

Move the cursor to the lower-left corner, and then select the Start button. from the charms bar. Start screen Desktop Note: The screenshots of operating system are for reference only. Please refer to the actual product. 12 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 The charms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Charms are navigation buttons that let you control your Windows 8.1 experience. Charms include: Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings. The Charms Bar is the menu that contains the charms. The five charms provide new and faster ways to perform many basic tasks, and are always available regardless of whichever app you are currently in. To display the charms, do one of the following:

Move the cursor to the upper-right or lower-right corner until the charms bar is displayed.

Press Windows key

+ C. Search charm The Search charm is a powerful new way to find what you are looking for, including settings, files, Web images, Web videos, etc. Share charm The Share charm lets you send links, photos, and more to your friends and social networks without leaving the app you are in. 13 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Start charm The Start charm is a fast way to go to the Start screen. Devices charm The Devices charm allows you to connect or send files to any external devices, including the devices to play, print, and project. Settings charm The Settings charm lets you perform basic tasks, such as setting the volume or shutting down the computer. Also, you can get to the Control Panel through the Settings charm when on the Desktop screen. 14 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

When you have finished working with your computer, you can put it to sleep or shut it down. Putting your computer to sleep If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer to sleep. When the computer is in sleep mode, you can quickly wake it to resume use, bypassing the startup process. To put the computer to sleep, do one of the following:

Close the display lid.

Press the Power button.

Open the charms, and then select Settings Power Sleep. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep mode) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following:

Press any key on the keyboard.

Press the Power button. 15 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Shutting down the computer If you are not going to use your computer for a long time, shut it down. To shut down the computer, do one of the following:

Open the charms, and then select Settings Power Shut down.

Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner and select Shut down or sign out Shut down.

Select Shut down in the upper-right corner of the Start screen. Note: The operation depends on the BIOS setup. Please refer to the actual product. 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Connecting to a wireless network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless functions, do the following:

1 Press to disable airplane mode. 2 Open the charms and select Settings to open the network configuration page. Note: Ensure the Wi-Fi switch on the Network configuration page is toggled to On. Connecting to a wireless network After wireless has been enabled, the computer will automatically scan for available wireless networks and display them in the wireless network list. To connect to a wireless network, click the network name in the list, and then click Connect. Note: Some networks require a network security key or passphrase for connection. To connect to one of those networks, ask the network administrator or the Internet service provider (ISP) for the security key or passphrase. 17 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Help and support - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you have a problem with the operating system, see the Windows Help and Support file. To open the Windows Help and Support file, do one of the following:

Select Settings charm, then select Help.

Press Windows key

+ Fn + F1. You can read the Windows Help and Support file on your computer. You can also get online help and support by clicking on one of the two links listed under More to explore. Note: Windows 8.1 also provides an app, Help + Tips. You can find it on the Start screen, to learn more information on new features of Windows 8.1. 18 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System The Lenovo OneKey Recovery System is software designed to back up and restore your computer. You can use it to restore the system partition to its original status in case of a system failure. You can also create user backups for easy restoration as required. Notes:

If your computer is preinstalled with a GNU/Linux operating system, OneKey Recovery System is not available. To utilize the features of the OneKey Recovery System, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and the OneKey Recovery System program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons, which explains why the available disk space is less than the stated capacity. Backing up the system partition You can back up the system partition to an image file. This image file can be used to restore the system partition. To back up the system partition:

1 In Windows, press the Novo button or double-click OneKey Recovery icon to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. 2 Click System Backup. 3 Select a back-up location and click Next to start the backup. Notes:

You can choose a back-up location on the local hard disk drive or an external storage device. Remove the removable hard disk drive before starting the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. Otherwise, data from the removable hard disk drive might be lost. The back-up process may take a while. The back-up process is only available when Windows can be started normally. Restoring You can choose to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. To restore the system partition:

1 In Windows, press the Novo button or double-click OneKey Recovery icon to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. 2 Click System Recovery. The computer will restart to the recovery environment. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. Notes:

The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any data you wish to save on the system partition before starting the recovery process. The recovery process may take a while. So be sure to connect the AC power adapter to your computer during the recovery process. The above instructions should be followed when Windows can be started normally. If Windows cannot be started, then follow the steps below to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button. From Novo Button Menu, select System Recovery and press Enter. 19 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions by category. Finding information What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

The Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide which came with your computer contains safety precautions for using your computer. Read and follow all the precautions when using your computer. Where can I find the hardware specifications for my computer?

You can find the hardware specification for your computer on the printed flyers which came with your computer. Where can I find warranty information?

For detailed warranty information on this machine, please visit below website to check out:

support.lenovo.com/warrantystatus. Drivers and preinstalled software Where are the installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software (desktop software)?

Your computer did not come with installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software. If you need to reinstall any preinstalled software, you can find the installation program on the D partition of your hard disk. If you cannot find the installation program there, you can also download it from the Lenovo consumer support website. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?

If your computer is preinstalled with a Windows operating system, Lenovo provides drivers for all the hardware devices that you need on the D partition of your hard disk. You can also download the latest device drivers from the Lenovo consumer support website. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with any recovery discs. Use the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System if you need to restore the system to its original factory status. What can I do if the back-up process fails?

If you can start the backup but it fails during the back-up process, try the following steps:

1 Close all open programs, and then restart the back-up process. 2 Check to see if the destination media is damaged. Select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to its factory status?

Use this feature when the operating system fails to start up. If there is critical data on the system partition, back it up before starting recovery. 20 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting BIOS setup utility What is the BIOS setup utility?

The BIOS setup utility is a ROM-based software. It displays basic computer information and provides options for setting boot devices, security, hardware mode, and other preferences. How can I start the BIOS setup utility?

To start the BIOS setup utility:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. How can I change the boot mode?

There are two boot modes: UEFI and Legacy Support. To change the boot mode, start the BIOS setup utility and set boot mode to UEFI or Legacy Support on the boot menu. When do I need to change the boot mode?

The default boot mode for your computer is UEFI mode. If you need to install a legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc. (that is, any operating system before Windows 8) on your computer, you must change the boot mode to Legacy Support. The legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc. cannot be installed if you don't change the boot mode. Getting help How can I contact the customer support center?

See Chapter 3. Getting help and service in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 21 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. The screen goes blank while the computer is on. Sleep problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test (POST). If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The AC power adapter is connected to the computer, and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. Press the Power button again for confirmation. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to its original factory contents using the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to resume from sleep mode:

- Press any key on the keyboard.

- Press the Power button.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC power adapter to the computer. Make sure that:

- The battery pack is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery pack is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. The computer does not return from sleep mode, and the computer does not work. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC power adapter to the computer, then press the Power button. If the system still does not return from sleep mode, stops responding, or cannot be turned off, reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the Power button for five seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC power adapter. 22 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Display panel problems The screen is blank. Do the following:

- If you are using the AC power adapter or the battery pack, and the battery status indicator is on, press F12 (

make the screen brighter.

) to

- If the power indicator is blinking, press the Power button to resume from sleep mode.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off.

- If the problem persists, follow the solution in the next problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Make sure that:

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. Is the operating system or programs installed correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speakers even when the volume is turned up. Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The combo audio jack is not being used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 23 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Battery pack problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. Other problems Your computer does not respond. The connected external device does not work. Recharge the battery. To turn off your computer, press and hold the Power button for five seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC power adapter. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on. Otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use an external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or the system may shut down as a result. 24 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 25 L e n o v o C h n a i 2 0 1 5 en-US Rev. AA00

 

 

FLEX 3/EDGE 2 User Guide Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes

Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide rst. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 8.1. If you are using another Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice

For details, refer to Guides & Manuals at http://support.lenovo.com. First Edition (September 2014) Copyright Lenovo 2014. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Lenovo FLEX 3/EDGE 2 FLEX 3/EDGE 2 User Guide User Guide Instructions and technical information in this manual are applicable to the following Lenovo notebook computers unless otherwise stated. Model name FLEX 3-1470 FLEX 3-1475 FLEX 3-1570 EDGE 2-1570 FLEX 3-1470 HSW FLEX 3-1475 Carrizo FLEX 3-1570 HSW EDGE 2-1570 HSW MT 80JK 80JL 80JM 80JX 80JY 80K1 80K0 80K2 Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer..................................................................................... 1 Top view ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 Left-side view ................................................................................................................................................ 6 Right-side view .............................................................................................................................................. 9 Bottom view ................................................................................................................................................. 10 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1........................................................................................ 12 Configuring the operating system for the first time .............................................................................. 12 Operating system interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 12 The charms ................................................................................................................................................... 13 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down ................................................................................ 15 Touch screen operation .............................................................................................................................. 16 Connecting to a wireless network ............................................................................................................ 20 Help and support ........................................................................................................................................ 21 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System.............................................................................. 22 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting............................................................................................................ 23 Frequently asked questions ....................................................................................................................... 23 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................... 25 Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................... 28 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

FLEX 3-1470/FLEX 3-1475/FLEX 3-1470 HSW/FLEX 3-1475 Carrizo 2 3 1 3 2 4 5 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer FLEX 3-1570/EDGE 2-1570/FLEX 3-1570 HSW/EDGE 2-1570 HSW 2 3 1 3 2 4 5 Note: The dashed areas indicate parts that are not visible externally. Attention:

When closing the display panel, be careful not to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a Integrated camera

(on select models) b Wireless LAN antennas c Built-in microphone d Multi-touch screen e Touchpad Use the camera for video communication. Connect to a wireless LAN adapter to send and receive wireless radio signals. Captures sound which can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or audio recording. The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant visual output. Multi-touch function is available on this display. The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. Touchpad: To move the pointer on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the pointer to move. Touchpad buttons: The functions of the left/right side correspond to that of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad by pressing F6 (

). 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using the keyboard Keyboard function keys You can access certain system settings quickly by pressing the appropriate function keys.

: Mutes/unmutes the sound.

: Enables/disables Airplane mode.

: Decreases the volume level.

: Displays all currently active apps.

:

Increases the volume level.

: Closes the currently active window.

:

Refreshes the desktop or the currently active window.

:

:

Turns on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Toggles the display between the computer and an external device.

: Decreases the display brightness.

: Enables/disables the touchpad.

:

Increases the display brightness. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Positioning the display panel The display panel can be opened to any angle up to 300 degrees. Notebook Mode Suitable for tasks that require a keyboard and mouse (such as creating documents, writing e-mails, and so on). Stand Mode (Theater Mode) Suitable for tasks that require little or no touch (such as viewing photos or playing videos). Attention:

Do not open the display with too much force, otherwise the panel or hinges may be damaged. Note: The keyboard and touchpad are automatically locked when the screen is opened beyond 190 degrees

(approximately). 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a Kensington lock slot Attach a security lock (not supplied) here to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Notes:

You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. features. Lenovo offers no comment judgment or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features. b AC power adapter jack c USB port Connects to the AC power adapter. Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB device on page 7. d Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 7. e Combo audio jack Connects to headsets. Notes:

The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. The recording function might not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. f Rotation lock button Keeps the screen locked in portrait or landscape orientation. Locking the screen rotation will disable the gravity sensing function, thereby preventing the screen from changing its orientation automatically depending upon the angle at which it is held. Note: The screen rotation lock button will be disabled in notebook mode. g Volume down button h Volume up button Decreases the volume level. Increases the volume level. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting USB device Your computer comes with 3 USB ports compatible with USB devices. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver has been installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after it has been connected, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data to that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the Windows notification area to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card

Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) card

Secure Digital eXtended Capacity (SDXC) card

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Notes:

Insert only one card in the slot at a time. This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Inserting a memory card Insert the memory card until it touches the bottom of the slot. Removing a memory card Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it by using the Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Screen orientation You can rotate the display panel to your preferred orientation.

The orientation of the display automatically changes (alternating between portrait and landscape modes) depending on how you hold it. Landscape Portrait

To prevent automatic orientation, press the rotation lock button. It is located on the right edge of the computer (See illustration below). Note: The screen rotation lock button will be disabled in notebook mode. 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 2 3 4 5 6 a Battery status indicator b Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. Indicator Indicator status Meaning On (solid white) On (solid amber) Blinking quickly (amber) Blinking slowly (amber) Blinking slowly (white) On (solid white) Blinking Off The battery has more than 20% charge. The battery has between 5% and 20% charge. The battery has less than 5% charge. The battery is being charged. When the battery charge reaches 20%, the blinking color will change to white. The battery has between 20% and 80%

charge and is still charging. When the battery reaches 80% charge the light will stop blinking, but charging will continue until the battery is fully charged. The computer is powered on. The computer is in sleep mode. The computer is powered off. When the computer is off, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System or the BIOS setup utility, or to enter the boot menu. Connects to USB 3.0 devices. Battery status indicator Power status indicator c Novo button d USB port Note: For details, see Connecting USB device on page 7. e RJ-45 port f HDMI port Connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or an external display. 9 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

FLEX 3-1470/FLEX 3-1475/FLEX 3-1470 HSW/FLEX 3-1475 Carrizo 1 2 2 10 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer FLEX 3-1570/EDGE 2-1570/FLEX 3-1570 HSW/EDGE 2-1570 HSW 1 2 2 a Ventilation slots Dissipate internal heat. Note: Make sure that the ventilation slots are not blocked or else the computer may overheat. b Speakers Provide audio output. 11 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Configuring the operating system for the first time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below:

Accepting the end user license agreement

Configuring the Internet connection

Registering the operating system

Creating a user account Operating system interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Windows 8.1 comes with two main user interfaces: the Start screen and the Windows desktop. To switch from the Start screen to the Windows desktop, do one of the following:

Select the Windows desktop tile on the Start screen.

Press the Windows button

.

Press the Windows key

+ D. To switch from the desktop to the Start screen, do one of the following:

Select Start

Move the cursor to the lower-left corner, and then select the Start button. from the charms bar. Start screen Desktop 12 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 The charms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Charms are navigation buttons that let you control your Windows 8.1 experience. Charms include: Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings. The Charms Bar is the menu that contains the charms. The five charms provide new and faster ways to perform many basic tasks, and are always available regardless of whichever app you are currently in. To display the charms, do one of the following:

Move the cursor to the upper-right or lower-right corner until the charms bar is displayed.

Use one finger to swipe in from the right edge of the screen until the charms bar is displayed.

Press Windows key

+ C. Search charm The Search charm is a powerful new way to find what you are looking for, including settings, files, Web images, Web videos, etc. Share charm The Share charm lets you send links, photos, and more to your friends and social networks without leaving the app you are in. 13 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Start charm The Start charm is a fast way to go to the Start screen. Devices charm The Devices charm allows you to connect or send files to any external devices, including the devices to play, print, and project. Settings charm The Settings charm lets you perform basic tasks, such as setting the volume or shutting down the computer. Also, you can get to the Control Panel through the Settings charm when on the Desktop screen. 14 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

When you have finished working with your computer, you can put it to sleep or shut it down. Putting your computer to sleep If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer to sleep. When the computer is in sleep mode, you can quickly wake it to resume use, bypassing the startup process. To put the computer to sleep, do one of the following:

Close the display lid.

Press the Power button.

Open the charms, and then select Settings Power Sleep. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep mode) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following:

Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only)

Press the Power button.

Press the Windows button

. Shutting down the computer If you are not going to use your computer for a long time, shut it down. To shut down the computer, do one of the following:

Open the charms, and then select Settings

Press and hold or right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner and select Shut down or Shut down. Power sign out Shut down.

Select Shut down in the upper-right corner of the Start screen. Note: The operation depends on the BIOS setup. Please refer to the actual product. 15 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Touch screen operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The display panel can accept inputs like a tablet, using the multi-touch screen, or like a traditional notebook computer, using the keyboard and touchpad. Multi-touch gestures You can touch the screen with one or more fingertips to perform a variety of tasks. Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Tap Tap once on an item. Performs an action, such as starting an app, opening a link, or performing a command. Similar to left-clicking with a mouse. Press and hold Press your finger down and leave it there for a moment. Enables you to see detailed information before selecting an action. Can also open a menu with more options. Similar to right-

clicking with a mouse. 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Zoom Move two fingers together or apart while touching the screen. Zooms in and out on visual apps, such as pictures and maps. Can also jump to the beginning or end of a list. Rotate Place two or more fingers on an item and then turn your hand. Rotates an object (Note: Not all items can be rotated, depending upon the app.). Slide Drag your finger across the screen. Pans or scrolls through lists and pages. Can also move an object or be used to draw or write, depending upon the app. Similar to pressing and holding to pan and to scrolling with a mouse. 17 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swipe Start from any edge of the screen, then swipe inwards toward the center. Swiping down from the top edge or up from the bottom edge displays a task bar on the bottom of the screen with app commands, including save, edit, and delete. If you have an app currently open, you can also:

Swipe from the top edge to halfway down the screen without lifting your finger to dock that app on the left or right side of the screen. This enables you to keep two apps open simultaneously in a split-screen format. Swipe from the top edge straight down to the bottom edge of the screen continuously without lifting your finger to close the currently open app. 18 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swiping in from the left edge can:

Bring in and open an app currently running in the background. If there is more than one currently open app, you can:

Swipe in from the left to bring in an app and, without lifting your finger, push that app quickly back off the left edge of the screen. This displays a list of the apps currently running in the background. Swiping in from the right edge of the screen displays the charms. 19 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Connecting to a wireless network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless functions, do one of the following:

Press F7 (

) to disable airplane mode.

Open the charms and select Settings Then toggle the airplane mode switch to off. to open the network configuration page. Note: Ensure the Wi-Fi switch on the Network configuration page is toggled to On. Connecting to a wireless network After wireless has been enabled, the computer will automatically scan for available wireless networks and display them in the wireless network list. To connect to a wireless network, click the network name in the list, and then click Connect. Note: Some networks require a network security key or passphrase for connection. To connect to one of those networks, ask the network administrator or the Internet service provider (ISP) for the security key or passphrase. 20 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Help and support - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you have a problem with the operating system, see the Windows Help and Support file. To open the Windows Help and Support file, do one of the following:

Select Settings charm, then select Help.

Press Windows key

+ Fn + F1. You can read the Windows Help and Support file on your computer. You can also get online help and support by clicking on one of the two links listed under More to explore. Note: Windows 8.1 also provides an app, Help + Tips. You can find it on the Start screen, to learn more information on new features of Windows 8.1. 21 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System The Lenovo OneKey Recovery System is software designed to back up and restore your computer. You can use it to restore the system partition to its original status in case of a system failure. You can also create user backups for easy restoration as required. Notes:

If your computer is preinstalled with a GNU/Linux operating system, OneKey Recovery System is not available. To utilize the features of the OneKey Recovery System, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and the OneKey Recovery System program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons, which explains why the available disk space is less than the stated capacity. Backing up the system partition You can back up the system partition to an image file. To back up the system partition:

1 Press the Novo button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. 2 Click System Backup. 3 Select a back-up location and click Next to start the backup. Notes:

You can choose a back-up location on the local hard disk drive or an external storage device. Remove the removable hard disk drive before starting the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. Otherwise, data from the removable hard disk drive might be lost. The back-up process may take a while. The back-up process is only available when Windows can be started normally. Restoring You can choose to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. To restore the system partition:

1 Press the Novo button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. 2 Click System Recovery. The computer will restart to the recovery environment. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. Notes:

The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any data you wish to save on the system partition before starting the recovery process. The recovery process may take a while. So be sure to connect the AC power adapter to your computer during the recovery process. The above instructions should be followed when Windows can be started normally. If Windows cannot be started, then follow the steps below to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button. From Novo Button Menu, select System Recovery and press Enter. 22 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions by category. Finding information What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

The Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide which came with your computer contains safety precautions for using your computer. Read and follow all the precautions when using your computer. Where can I find the hardware specifications for my computer?

You can find the hardware specification for your computer on the printed flyers which came with your computer. Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Safety, Warranty, and Setup Guide (SWSG) that came with your computer. Drivers and preinstalled software Where are the installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software (desktop software)?

Your computer did not come with installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software. If you need to reinstall any preinstalled software, you can find the installation program on the D partition of your hard disk. If you cannot find the installation program there, you can also download it from the Lenovo consumer support website. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?

If your computer is preinstalled with a Windows operating system, Lenovo provides drivers for all the hardware devices that you need on the D partition of your hard disk. You can also download the latest device drivers from the Lenovo consumer support website. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with any recovery discs. Use the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System if you need to restore the system to its original factory status. What can I do if the back-up process fails?

If you can start the backup but it fails during the back-up process, try the following steps:

1 Close all open programs, and then restart the back-up process. 2 Check to see if the destination media is damaged. Select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to its factory status?

Use this feature when the operating system fails to start up. If there is critical data on the system partition, back it up before starting recovery. 23 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting BIOS setup utility What is the BIOS setup utility?

The BIOS setup utility is a ROM-based software. It displays basic computer information and provides options for setting boot devices, security, hardware mode, and other preferences. How can I start the BIOS setup utility?

To start the BIOS setup utility:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. How can I change the boot mode?

There are two boot modes: UEFI and Legacy Support. To change the boot mode, start the BIOS setup utility and set boot mode to UEFI or Legacy Support on the boot menu. When do I need to change the boot mode?

The default boot mode for your computer is UEFI mode. If you need to install a legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc (that is, any operating system before Windows 8) on your computer, you must change the boot mode to Legacy Support. The legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc cannot be installed if you don't change the boot mode. Getting help How can I contact the customer support center?

See Chapter 3. Getting help and service in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 24 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. The screen goes blank while the computer is on. Sleep problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test (POST). If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The AC power adapter is connected to the computer, and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. Press the Power button again for confirmation. If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to its original factory contents using the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your screen saver or power management may be enabled. Do one of the following to resume from sleep mode:

- Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only)

- Press the Power button.

- Press the Windows button.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC power adapter to the computer. Make sure that:

- The battery pack is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery pack is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 25 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode, and the computer does not work. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC power adapter to the computer, then press the Windows button or the Power button. If the system still does not return from sleep mode, stops responding, or cannot be turned off, reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the Power button for eight seconds or more. If the computer is still not reset, remove the AC power adapter. Display panel problems The screen is blank. Do the following:

- If you are using the AC power adapter or the battery pack, and the battery status indicator is on, press F12 (

make the screen brighter.

) to

- If the power indicator is blinking, press the Power button to resume from sleep mode.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off.

- If the problem persists, follow the solution in the next problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Make sure that:

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. Is the operating system or programs installed correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speakers even when the volume is turned up. Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The combo audio jack is not being used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 26 Battery pack problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. Other problems Your computer does not respond. The connected external device does not work. Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Recharge the battery. To turn off your computer, press and hold the Power button for eight seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC power adapter. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on. Otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use an external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or the system may shut down as a result. 27 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 28 L e n o v o C h n a i 2 0 1 4 en-US Rev. AA00